Canon Trisoft InfoShare Vario PRINT 140 Operation Guide

User Manual: Canon varioPRINT 140 Operation Guide Production Printing User Manuals

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 473 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Operation guide
varioPRINT DP line
varioPRINT 115, 130, 140
Copyright and Trademarks
Copyright
Copyright 2011-2017 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any information storage or
retrieval system without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.
Copyright
Copyright 2011-2017 Océ.
Illustrations and specifications do not necessarily apply to products and services offered in each
local market. No part of this publication may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Océ.
OCÉ MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THE CONTENTS OF THIS
PUBLICATION, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. OCÉ SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR
LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE CONTENTS OF THIS PUBLICATION.
Océ reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the
content hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revision or changes.
Trademarks
Océ, Océ PRISMA, Océ PRISMAprepare, Océ SRA, Océ varioPRINT are registered trademarks of
Océ-Technologies B.V. Océ is a Canon company.
Adobe, Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Office, Excel, Explorer, Internet Explorer are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corp. incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Edition 2017-01
Software version 5.1 US
Note
This Operation Guide is written for world-wide markets. As such it may contain
information relating to accessories or licensed functionality not supported by Canon
U.S.A., Inc. as of the date of the manual publication.
Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction.........................................................................................................................9
Notes for the reader....................................................................................................................................... 10
Users of the print system...............................................................................................................................11
Information in this operation guide.............................................................................................................. 12
Chapter 2
Explore the print system..................................................................................................13
Overview of the varioPRINT DP line Including Accessories....................................................................... 14
Printer Only Configuration.............................................................................................................................16
Naming Conventions for Accessories (Generic Naming in User Interfaces)............................................ 17
The Paper Modules........................................................................................................................................ 18
Professional stacker / stapler.........................................................................................................................19
Copy tray.........................................................................................................................................................21
Removable Hard Disk (Option)......................................................................................................................22
Introduction to the Removable Hard Disk..............................................................................................22
Main Parts.................................................................................................................................................23
Remove the Removable Hard Disk.........................................................................................................24
Insert the Removable Hard Disk............................................................................................................. 26
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................................................28
Chapter 3
Explore the ease of operation..........................................................................................29
What the print system can do for you.......................................................................................................... 30
Control panel.................................................................................................................................................. 31
Settings Editor................................................................................................................................................ 34
Remote Manager............................................................................................................................................36
Media-based workflow...................................................................................................................................37
Document printing workflow.........................................................................................................................38
Transaction printing workflow...................................................................................................................... 39
Chapter 4
Start the print system...................................................................................................... 41
Power Buttons and Power Modes.................................................................................................................42
Turn On the System....................................................................................................................................... 44
Shut Down the System.................................................................................................................................. 45
Restart the System......................................................................................................................................... 46
Chapter 5
Prepare the print system..................................................................................................47
Adjust the control panel.................................................................................................................................48
Work with the Workflow Profiles.................................................................................................................. 52
Automated Workflows................................................................................................................................... 58
Introduction to Automated Workflows...................................................................................................58
Add an Automated Workflow................................................................................................................. 62
Edit an Automated Workflow..................................................................................................................63
Delete an Automated Workflow..............................................................................................................64
Restore the Factory Default Workflow................................................................................................... 65
Contents
3
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Hotfolders........................................................................................................................................................66
Introduction to Hotfolders.......................................................................................................................66
Activate the Hotfolder Function..............................................................................................................67
Create a Hotfolder....................................................................................................................................68
Create a Shared Network Folder on a Workstation...............................................................................69
Create a Hotfolder Default Ticket ('default_ticket.jdf').......................................................................... 70
Accounting......................................................................................................................................................71
General Information.................................................................................................................................71
Introduction to the Accounting Function.........................................................................................71
The Accounting Related Settings in the Settings Editor................................................................ 72
Enable the Identification and Verification of Account IDs..............................................................73
The Account ID File..................................................................................................................................74
The Account ID File............................................................................................................................74
Download, Edit and Upload the Account ID File.............................................................................75
The Account Log File............................................................................................................................... 76
The Account Log File.........................................................................................................................76
Save an Account Log File..................................................................................................................82
Use Accounting........................................................................................................................................83
Select an Accounting Mode..............................................................................................................83
Enter an Account ID per Job.............................................................................................................85
Enter an Account ID in the Printer Driver........................................................................................ 86
Chapter 6
Prepare the jobs................................................................................................................ 87
Prepare print jobs...........................................................................................................................................88
Where to Define Print Job Settings........................................................................................................88
Prepare print jobs with Remote Printer Driver...................................................................................... 90
Print a Job Using PRISMAprepare (Option).......................................................................................... 92
Print a File from a USB Drive.................................................................................................................. 94
Print a page number via PRISMAsync................................................................................................... 96
Prepare copy jobs and scan jobs.................................................................................................................. 97
Introduction to the Copy Function..........................................................................................................97
Introduction to the Scan Function.......................................................................................................... 99
Scanning Information............................................................................................................................101
Copy or scan originals and books using the glass plate.................................................................... 103
Copy or Scan Originals Using the ADF................................................................................................ 107
Access Other Functions During a Copy Job or Scan Job...................................................................108
Chapter 7
Plan the workload remotely.......................................................................................... 109
PRISMAsync Remote Manager (Option).................................................................................................... 110
Use the Remote Control app to monitor printing......................................................................................111
Chapter 8
Plan the jobs....................................................................................................................113
Manage the jobs in the queue.....................................................................................................................114
Schedule a Waiting Job for Printing.................................................................................................... 114
Print an Urgent Job Immediately......................................................................................................... 115
Give Priority to a Print Job....................................................................................................................116
Print a Scheduled Job Later..................................................................................................................117
Send a job to another printer................................................................................................................118
Bundle Jobs in the List of [Waiting jobs].............................................................................................119
Add extra sheets to a job.......................................................................................................................121
Use the DocBox (Option)............................................................................................................................. 122
The DocBox Function.............................................................................................................................122
Introduction to the DocBox Function.............................................................................................122
Create a New DocBox......................................................................................................................124
Handle the Jobs in a DocBox................................................................................................................125
Contents
4
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs...................................................................125
Edit a Job in a DocBox.................................................................................................................... 142
Combine Jobs in a DocBox (Build Function).................................................................................143
Split a Combined Job in the DocBox.............................................................................................144
Lock a Job in a DocBox...................................................................................................................145
Unlock a Job in a DocBox...............................................................................................................146
Move a Job from One DocBox to Another....................................................................................147
Print the Jobs in a DocBox....................................................................................................................148
Print a Non-Urgent Job from the DocBox..................................................................................... 148
Print an Urgent Job from the DocBox Immediately..................................................................... 149
Select and Print Multiple Jobs from the DocBox..........................................................................150
Chapter 9
Carry Out Print Jobs....................................................................................................... 153
Change the Print Job Settings on the Control Panel.................................................................................154
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel...........................154
Change the [Output] Settings............................................................................................................... 170
Change Two-Sided into One-Sided and Vice Versa..................................................................... 170
Change the Binding Edge............................................................................................................... 171
Select Another Media for a Job......................................................................................................172
Change the Settings for Covers......................................................................................................173
Shift the Image Roughly to Create Binding Space....................................................................... 174
Shift the Image Precisely to Create Binding Space or Correct the Layout................................. 175
Change the Print Delivery Settings................................................................................................ 176
Change the Stacking Method per Job........................................................................................... 177
Change the Print Quality Settings..................................................................................................178
Change the Finishing Method........................................................................................................ 180
Define the Finishing for Print Jobs.................................................................................................181
Change the [Job] Settings.....................................................................................................................182
Change the Number of Sets........................................................................................................... 182
Check the First Set...........................................................................................................................183
Change the Page Range You Want to Print...................................................................................184
Change the Use of Separator Sheets.............................................................................................185
Change the Print Job Settings on Page Level..................................................................................... 186
Print Your Jobs Using the Control Panel....................................................................................................187
Reprint a Job.......................................................................................................................................... 187
Select more than One Job for Printing................................................................................................ 188
Print a Job Ticket....................................................................................................................................189
Make a Proof...........................................................................................................................................190
Stop the Printer...................................................................................................................................... 191
Delete Print Jobs....................................................................................................................................193
Variable data printing...................................................................................................................................194
Variable data printing............................................................................................................................ 194
Convert a job to a variable data job..................................................................................................... 195
Transaction Printing (Option)...................................................................................................................... 196
Introduction to the [Transaction] Section ........................................................................................... 196
Activate Transaction Printing................................................................................................................199
Deactivate Transaction Printing............................................................................................................200
Shift the image in the Transaction Printing Mode.............................................................................. 201
Transaction Setups................................................................................................................................ 202
Create a New Transaction Setup....................................................................................................202
Edit a Transaction Setup.................................................................................................................203
Activate a Transaction Setup..........................................................................................................204
Exchange All Setups Between Printers..........................................................................................205
IPDS.........................................................................................................................................................206
Media information (IPDS)............................................................................................................... 206
Output Recovery in Case of an Error (IPDS)..................................................................................207
PCL.......................................................................................................................................................... 210
Media Messages (PCL)....................................................................................................................210
Contents
5
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Media Mode (PCL).................................................. 211
Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Tray Mode (PCL)..................................................... 212
Chapter 10
Carry Out Copy Jobs...................................................................................................... 213
Copy Your Documents.................................................................................................................................214
Description of the Copy Job Settings...................................................................................................214
Make an easy copy.................................................................................................................................231
Create templates to use for recurring jobs.......................................................................................... 232
Copy Non-Standard Size Originals.......................................................................................................233
The Zoom Behavior............................................................................................................................... 234
Staple, Punch, Fold, or Trim the Output.............................................................................................. 236
Rename a Copy Job...............................................................................................................................237
Combining subsets into one document...............................................................................................238
Insert Tab Sheets to Divide Your Document....................................................................................... 239
Scan Now and Print Later......................................................................................................................241
Chapter 11
Carry Out Scan Jobs.......................................................................................................243
Configure the Scan Function.......................................................................................................................244
Configure the Settings for Scan to File................................................................................................ 244
Configure the Settings for Scan to SMB..............................................................................................245
Configure the Settings for Scan to Email.............................................................................................246
Configure the Settings for the LDAP Server........................................................................................247
Use the Address List File (ral.csv).........................................................................................................248
Scan Your Documents................................................................................................................................. 249
Description of the Scan Job Settings...................................................................................................249
Scan to File............................................................................................................................................. 257
Scan to Email..........................................................................................................................................258
Use an address book for scan to email................................................................................................259
Scan to USB............................................................................................................................................261
Scan to DocBox......................................................................................................................................262
Scan to SMB...........................................................................................................................................263
PDF scan job...........................................................................................................................................264
Create templates to use for recurring jobs.......................................................................................... 265
Combine subsets into one file ............................................................................................................. 266
Optimize the Scan Quality.....................................................................................................................267
Chapter 12
Keep the system printing...............................................................................................269
Use the Schedule (Option)...........................................................................................................................270
Introduction to the [Schedule] View.....................................................................................................270
Load Media via the [Schedule] View....................................................................................................273
The Dashboard............................................................................................................................................. 274
The Operator Attention Light...................................................................................................................... 276
Remote Monitor............................................................................................................................................277
Chapter 13
Media Handling............................................................................................................... 279
Introduction...................................................................................................................................................280
Introduction to the Media Handling..................................................................................................... 280
Introduction to the [Trays] View........................................................................................................... 282
Introduction to the [Media] Section......................................................................................................284
Media Related Actions................................................................................................................................. 287
Open a Tray and Load Media Using the Paper Tray Button...............................................................287
Load and Assign Media Using the [Trays] Softkey.............................................................................288
Add media to the media catalog...........................................................................................................290
Contents
6
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Add Temporary Media to the Media Catalog...................................................................................... 291
Media indicators Black & White............................................................................................................292
Use the Separation Enhancer............................................................................................................... 293
Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray............................................................................................................295
Adjust the Size of the optional Bulk Tray for small Format................................................................301
Use the JIS B5 Adapter (Option)...........................................................................................................303
Process Special Media................................................................................................................................. 305
Process Pre-Printed Media and Use of the [Pre-printed mode] Setting............................................ 305
Process Wax Paper and Use of the [Wax mode] Setting....................................................................307
Deal with Paper Dust and Use of the [Paper quality] Setting.............................................................309
Media Registration....................................................................................................................................... 311
When to Perform a Media Registration................................................................................................311
Examples of when to Perform Media Registration.......................................................................311
How to Perform a Media Registration..................................................................................................315
Media Registration Quick Start.......................................................................................................315
Order of the Media Registration Actions.......................................................................................318
Print the Verification Chart for Media Registration.......................................................................319
Option 1 - Automatic Media Registration Adjustment................................................................. 321
Option 2 - Manual Media Registration Adjustment (Only Needed in Incidental Cases)............325
Media registration: Troubleshooting....................................................................................................347
Registration of Preprinted Media Fails ......................................................................................... 347
Automatic Media Registration of Long Sheets is not satisfactory.............................................. 348
Shifted Image after Paper Path Registration (Only if POC is Applicable) .................................. 349
Media Registration: Frequently Asked Questions...............................................................................350
Chapter 14
Maintain the print system..............................................................................................351
System configuration...................................................................................................................................352
System configuration and maintenance..............................................................................................352
Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel....................................... 354
Introduction to the [Setup] Section...................................................................................................... 359
Backup and restore.......................................................................................................................................361
Counters........................................................................................................................................................362
Introduction to the Counters.................................................................................................................362
Reset the Day Counters......................................................................................................................... 363
Print the Billing Counters Report..........................................................................................................364
Software upgrade.........................................................................................................................................365
Upgrade PRISMAsync from server.......................................................................................................365
Upgrade PRISMAsync .......................................................................................................................... 366
Upgrade Microsoft Windows................................................................................................................367
Install software from a USB installation drive.....................................................................................368
Printer Operation Care (POC)...................................................................................................................... 369
Introduction to Printer Operation Care (POC)......................................................................................369
Perform a Paper Path Registration....................................................................................................... 371
Replace the Separation Rollers.............................................................................................................373
Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils........................................................................................................ 381
Replace the Spiral Cleaner.................................................................................................................... 390
Remove Paper from the TTF................................................................................................................. 399
Remove Paper from the Heat Exchanger.............................................................................................408
Advanced Maintenance Actions for High Capacity Stacker-G1 and High Capacity Stacker-H1......409
Replace the Flip Rings in the Flip Unit...........................................................................................409
Clear a Paper Jam in the Lower Input Paper Path of the Registration Unit................................413
Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit................................................................................... 415
Remote Service (ORS) (Option)...................................................................................................................420
Remote Service...................................................................................................................................... 420
Add Toner and Staples................................................................................................................................ 422
Check the Status of the Toner Reservoir..............................................................................................422
Add Toner...............................................................................................................................................423
Check the Status of the Staple Cartridges........................................................................................... 425
Contents
7
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Stapler Unit................................................................................ 427
Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Saddle Stitch Unit......................................................................429
Cleaning........................................................................................................................................................ 432
Clean the Scanner Sensors................................................................................................................... 432
Clean the Z Sensor.................................................................................................................................435
Manually Start a Drum Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 438
Automatic Drum Cleaning.....................................................................................................................439
Chapter 15
Troubleshooting..............................................................................................................443
Solving Errors...............................................................................................................................................444
Store the logging in case of software errors..............................................................................................446
Appendix A
Specifications.................................................................................................................. 447
General..........................................................................................................................................................448
Environmental.............................................................................................................................................. 449
Printer Speed................................................................................................................................................ 450
Paper Modules..............................................................................................................................................451
Finishing and delivery specifications .........................................................................................................452
Media Specifications....................................................................................................................................454
Printing, Copying and Scanning................................................................................................................. 455
PRISMAsync Controller................................................................................................................................457
Printer Driver Support..................................................................................................................................458
Index.................................................................................................................................459
Contents
8
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 1
Introduction
Notes for the reader
Introduction
This manual helps you to use the varioPRINT DP line. The manual contains a description of the
product and guidelines to use and operate the varioPRINT DP line.
Definition
Attention-Getters
Parts of this manual require your special attention. These parts can provide the following:
• Additional general information, for example, information that is useful when you perform a
task.
• Information to prevent personal injuries or property damage.
Symbols used in this manual
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling
precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
Overview of the attention-getters
Word Icon Indicates
WARNING Indicates a warning concerning operations that may
lead to death or injury to persons if not performed
correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay at-
tention to these warnings.
CAUTION Indicates a caution concerning operations that may
lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly.
To use the machine safely, always pay attention to
these cautions.
IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions.
Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the
machine correctly and to avoid damaging the ma-
chine or property.
NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation or contains
additional explanations for a procedure. Reading
these notes is highly recommended.
- Indicates an operation that must not be performed.
Read these items carefully and make sure not to
perform the described operations.
Notes for the reader
10 Chapter 1 - Introduction
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Users of the print system
The varioPRINT DP line enables to set up a flexible and efficient print environment.
Default user groups
The varioPRINT DP line knows five default customer user groups, each with their default access
rights. Users can be member of one or more user groups: default or custom groups. Custom user
groups fit your organization or department and are created by the system administrator. The
default user groups are:
Operators are responsible for print production. They are able to access personal jobs that are
submitted to the print system. The users that are members of this group can access the control
panel.
Key operators are responsible for the system configuration defaults and print quality procedures.
Members of this group are also able to access all jobs that are submitted to the print system.
Central operators are responsible for print production. They are able to access all jobs that are
submitted to the print system. The members of this group have access to the control panel and
remote tools.
Maintenance operators are allowed to perform secured cleaning and maintenance procedures.
System administrators are allowed to configure IT and security settings. The members of this
group are also responsible for troubleshooting procedures.
Access rights per user group
Each default user group has default access rights. These rights correspond to access to tools and
settings. The table below shows the access rights of the user group members.
Access to Operator Central
operator
Key opera‐
tor
Mainte‐
nance op‐
erator
System
adminis‐
trator
Only personal jobs
All jobs
Control panel
Remote tools
Maintenance tasks
Configuration settings
IT settings
Users of the print system
Chapter 1 - Introduction 11
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Information in this operation guide
Contents of this guide
Read this operation guide to learn what the varioPRINT DP line product can do for you, how to
operate and maintain the print system, and how to use it in a safe way.
The guide starts with basic information on the print system (Chapter 2). The ease of operation
and the highlights of PRISMAsync are part of Chapter 3.
In the next chapters you find the instructions how to start up the print system and prepare the
system printing (Chapter 4 and 5). For several tasks in these chapters you need to have access to
configuration tasks.
Next the guide describes how you can prepare print jobs, copy jobs, and scan jobs for operators
(Chapter 6).
Then, the guide describes how you can plan and monitor the workload of jobs remotely (Chapter
7). For the tasks in this chapter you need to have access to the remote tools.
The way you can plan the jobs from the control panel is described in Chapter 8.
How to carry out print jobs, copy jobs, and scan jobs is in the next chapters (Chapter 9, 10, and
11).
Chapter 12 informs you how to keep the system printing.
Carefully read the media handling instructions of chapter 13.
Maintenance instructions teach you how to keep the print system running, and how to keep
machine parts clean (Chapter 14). Chapter 15 has information about the solving of problems.
The appendix gives the specifications about your product.
Optionals described in this operation guide
This operation guide includes the description of the following finishing optionals:
• Stacker/Stapler
Other product information
On the downloads site downloads.oce.com you find the following product information for the
varioPRINT DP line:
• This operation guide
• Safety guide for print system
• Technical reference manual
• High Capacity Stacker operation guide
• Decurler operation guide
• PRISMAsync Remote Manager operation guide
The other optionals have an operation guide that is delivered together with the product.
Information in this operation guide
12 Chapter 1 - Introduction
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 2
Explore the print system
Overview of the varioPRINT DP line Including
Accessories
Illustration
NOTE
The illustration shows an example of a full varioPRINT DP line product line including most of the
available accessories. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information about the
possible configurations.
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
1011
12
13
14
3
[1] Full varioPRINT DP line product line
Description
NOTE
Whenever a number of sheets is mentioned in the table below, the figure is based on media of
80 g/m² (20 lb bond).
NOTE
The manual uses functional names for product and the available accessories. However,
sometimes you need the commercial name, for example to order an accessory. See
Naming
Conventions for Accessories (Generic Naming in User Interfaces)
on page 17 for the
commercial names.
The specifications of the product and the available accessories are described in the specification
section.
The components of a full varioPRINT DP line product line
Item Component Function
1 Control panel • Manage your print, copy and scan jobs.
• Make system settings and workflow settings.
• Support for troubleshooting, for example clear paper
jams.
2 External paper module
(four paper trays), optional
Hold the media required to print your jobs.
Total capacity: 4,600 sheets, or 7,800 sheets with the op-
tional dual paper trays installed.
3 Internal paper module
(four paper trays)
Hold the media required to print your jobs.
Total capacity: 4,000 sheets.
4 Printer module Print the jobs. Access to the printer module is required:
• To clear paper jams, and
• To carry out Printer Operation Care (POC) actions. 4
Overview of the varioPRINT DP line Including Accessories
14 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Item Component Function
5 Scanner • Scan paper originals.
• Copy paper originals.
• Perform media registrations.
Capacity: A stack of maximum 300 originals.
6 Operator attention light Make the status of the system visible from a distance.
7 Decurler Fixes paper curl caused by heat etc.
8 Inserter Hold the (pre-printed) cover sheets or insert sheets to
finish your documents.
9 First stacker High capacity stacker to receive the output.
10 Second stacker Add additional output capacity.
11 Folder Fold the output in various ways.
12 Stacker/stapler Staple and stack the output. Optional, the stacker/stapler
can be equipped with a Puncher Unit to punch the out-
put.
13 Booklet Trimmer Trim the fore-edge of each booklet.
14 Two-Knife Booklet Trim-
mer
Trim the top and bottom of each booklet.
not
shown
Puncher Punch the output.
not
shown
Booklet maker Make a booklet of the output.
not
shown
Copy tray Tray to receive the output.
Overview of the varioPRINT DP line Including Accessories
Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 15
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Printer Only Configuration
Introduction
Next to the configurations mentioned in section
Overview of the varioPRINT DP line Including
Accessories
on page 14, the varioPRINT DP line also has a printer only version. The printer only
version cannot copy and scan.
The printer only configuration is a varioPRINT DP line product that doesn't have an ADF. Instead
of the ADF the varioPRINT DP line product has a cover. The glass plate and the corresponding
scanner are still present. You can use the glass plate for service purposes and for media
registration. You perform the media registration on a printer only configuration in the same way
as on a configuration with an ADF.
The copy and scan mode are not available on the control panel, which disables the use of the
scanner to carry out copy and scan jobs.
Printer Only Configuration
16 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Naming Conventions for Accessories (Generic Naming
in User Interfaces)
Generic Naming of Accessories in User Interfaces
To improve the readability of texts in User Interfaces of control panels and software, the
accessories are generally referred to by their function. The table below shows the naming
conventions for accessories (commercial product names and the generic terminology used in
User Interfaces). Some accessories listed below may not be available in certain markets.
NOTE
In some cases, there is only 1 name for more modules. The reason is that a configuration can
only contain 1 of the available types of modules.
Conversion table for commercial names versus generic terminology in User Interfaces
Commercial product name: In UI, printer driver and software referred to
as:
Finisher-W1 [Stacker/stapler]
Booklet Finisher-W1 with saddle press func-
tionality
[Stacker/stapler]
Professional Puncher-B1 [Puncher]
GBC® eWire™ [eWire]
Paper Folding Unit-J1 [Folder]
Document Insertion Unit-N1 [Inserter]
High Capacity Stacker-F1 [Stacker]
High Capacity Stacker-G1 [Stacker]
High Capacity Stacker-H1 [Stacker]
Booklet Trimmer-F1 [Trimmer]
Two-Knife Trimmer-A1 [Trimmer]
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-L1 [Scanner]
Decurler Unit-C1 [Decurler]
BLM600 [Booklet maker]
Output tray [Copy tray]
Naming Conventions for Accessories (Generic Naming in User Interfaces)
Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 17
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The Paper Modules
Internal Paper Module
NOTE
Whenever a number of sheets is mentioned below, the figure is based on media of 80 g/m² (20 lb
bond).
The varioPRINT DP line contains four integrated, internal paper trays.
• Two bulk trays with a capacity of 1,500 sheets each.
• Two multi-size trays with a capacity of 500 sheets each.
The bulk trays support A4, LTR, 16K, and JIS B5 only. When a bulk tray is configured for one of
these media sizes, you can only load media with that size. To switch to another media size, you
must manually adjust the size of the bulk trays before you can load that other media size.
External Paper Module
You can extend the system with an optional external paper module. This paper module contains
four paper trays.
• Two bulk trays with a capacity of 1,700 sheets each (or 3,300 A4/LTR sheets each when the
optional dual paper trays are installed)
• Two standard trays with a capacity of 600 sheets each.
Contact your local authorized dealer for more information about the dual paper trays.
The Paper Modules
18 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Professional stacker / stapler
There are two professional stacker / stapler configurations: the stacker / stapler with booklet
maker (Booklet Finisher-W1) and without booklet maker (Staple Finisher-W1). The booklet maker
folds and staples booklets. Both finisher configurations can enable the optional punch unit to
punch two, three or four holes in the printed output.
The dashboard of the control panel displays the status of the staple cartridges. When the color of
the staple icon is orange or red, the staple cartridge needs replacement.
1
2
6
5
1
2
6
5
4
3
[2] Professional stacker / stapler with booklet maker (Booklet Finisher-W1) and without booklet maker (Staple
Finisher-W1)
Description stacker/stapler
1 Cover, to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs.
2 Cover, to access the area where you replace staple cartridges, clear a paper jam, or
clear a staple jam.
3 Booklet tray, to collect booklets.
4 Auxiliary booklet tray, to collect large booklets.
5 Lower tray, to collect finished output. The guides enable correct placement of the
printed output.
6 Upper tray, to collect finished output. The guides enable correct placement of the
printed output. Extension guides for long sheets are attached to this tray.
Professional stacker / stapler
Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 19
Canon varioPRINT DP line
12
[3] Internal view of the stacker / stapler and saddle-stitch unit (Booklet Finisher-W1 )
Description internal parts of stacker/stapler
1 Punch waste tray, to collect the punch waste.
2 Staple waste tray, to collect the staple waste.
Professional stacker / stapler
20 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Copy tray
The copy tray collects the printed output. The copy tray is part of the print module. Printed output
goes to the copy tray when no other finishing optionals are part of the print system.
The copy tray can have extension guides to collect long sheets.
NOTE
The copy tray has no empty / full sensor. You must take care that there is enough space to
deliver sheets to the copy tray.
1 2
[4] Copy tray
Description
1 Auxiliary tray, to collect large, printed output (A3 / 11" x 17" or A4R / LTRR).
2 Copy tray, to collect printed output.
Copy tray
Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 21
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Removable Hard Disk (Option)
Introduction to the Removable Hard Disk
Introduction
The PRISMAsync controller can be equipped with a removable hard disk. The removable hard
disk is located behind the horizontal cover in front of the control panel.
IMPORTANT
Avoid installing the machine at high altitudes above approximately 3,000 meters above sea
level, or higher.
Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes above
approximately 3,000 meters above sea level, or higher.
Illustration
[5] Location of the removable hard disk
Using the Removable Hard Disk
The removable hard disk is intended to prevent the theft of confidential data. After working hours,
for example, the hard disk can be removed from the controller and stored in a safe. The next
working day, the hard disk must be placed back before the printer is turned on.
A lock in front of the removable hard disk prevents unauthorized removal of the hard disk. For
security reasons, only a limited number of people will have a key to the lock.
Each removable hard disk is unique. Always use the same dedicated removable hard disk with a
particular printer.
Removable Hard Disk (Option)
22 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Main Parts
Illustration
[6] Main parts of the removable hard disk
Part Description
1 Hard disk
2 Hard disk housing
3 Right-hand handle
4 Left-hand latch
Main Parts
Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 23
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Remove the Removable Hard Disk
Before you begin
Shut down the printer completely.
Wait until the Sleep button and the On/Off button are off.
Procedure
Remove the removable hard disk
Step Action Illustration
1 Open the cover (1) in front of the oper-
ator panel.
2 Remove the staple box (2).
3 Remove the lock (3).
4 Press the left-hand latch (1) of the hard
disk housing. The right-hand handle (2)
is released.
5 Pull the right-hand handle to slide out
the removable hard disk.
6 Place the staple box back.
7 Close the cover. 4
Remove the Removable Hard Disk
24 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
8 Store the hard disk in a secure place,
for example a safe.
Remove the Removable Hard Disk
Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 25
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Insert the Removable Hard Disk
Before you begin
Make sure that the printer is completely off before you insert the removable hard disk.
Procedure
Step Action Illustration
1 Take the removable hard disk
from the secure location where it
is stored.
2 Open the cover in front of the op-
erator panel.
3 Remove the staple box.
4 Slide the removable hard disk in.
Make sure that you push the
hard disk itself. Do not use the
right-hand handle to slide the
hard disk in.
5 When the hard disk is completely
inserted, close the right-hand
handle (1).
A click confirms that the right-
hand handle is locked correctly
behind the left-hand latch (2).
4
Insert the Removable Hard Disk
26 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
6 Place the lock (1).
7 Place the staple box (2) back.
8 Close the cover (3).
9 Press the On/Off button to turn
the printer on.
Insert the Removable Hard Disk
Chapter 2 - Explore the print system 27
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
When Then
You turn the printer on while the removable
hard disk is not inserted
The printer operator panel displays an error
message.
• Press the On/Off button behind the printer
operator panel for approximately 5 seconds.
The printer will shut down.
• Insert the correct hard disk for this printer.
• Press the On/Off button to turn on the print-
er.
You turn the printer on while the hard disk of a
different printer is inserted
NOTE
Do not insert other hard disks or hard disks without the correct varioPRINT DP line software. The
printer will not function correctly.
Troubleshooting
28 Chapter 2 - Explore the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 3
Explore the ease of operation
What the print system can do for you
The varioPRINT DP line is an easy-to-use multitasking print system that offers many useful
functions.
You can define the same job properties from several locations: in Remote Printer Driver, the
control panel, and Remote Manager.
Across the whole print workflow the central media catalog with a wide range of media definitions
is available. This ensures first-time-right output.
PRISMAsync supports a structured document printing workflow to make the best use of staff
resources and expertise.
The input and finishing optionals support many different media types and finishing options. The
print system can staple, fold, trim, crease or punch the printed output in various ways. You can
print professional looking, high quality output, such as stapled booklets and books with glued,
preprinted covers.
You can use the print system in two modes: document printing and transaction printing.
Remote tools help you to operate the printer from a distance. The web-based PRISMAsync
Remote Manager application offers remote workload and job planning across the printer fleet
from one central overview. The Remote Control App ensures you stay informed about the print
production on your printers.
What the print system can do for you
30 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Control panel
The control panel is the location on the print system to manage print jobs, copy jobs, and scan
jobs. The control panel provides you full system control.
1
11
2
3
4
57 8
10
69
The following table describes the main parts of the control panel and their functions.
The main components of the control panel
Component Function
1 Sleep button Put the system into the sleep mode or wake up the
system.
2 Stop button Stop the printing process after a set or as soon as
possible.
3 Paper tray button Get immediate access to the [Trays] section on the
control panel to do the following (for example):
• Check the content of all paper trays.
• Load a new media type into a paper tray.
• Change the media type which is available in one
of the paper trays.
• Open the front door of the printer.
4 USB port Insert a USB drive into the USB port to:
• Print any documents on the USB drive, or
• Scan paper originals to the USB drive
You can disable the USB port.
5 [Schedule] button (optional) Access the [Schedule] view to manage the jobs in
the schedule.
6 [Jobs] button Manage and print the jobs in the lists of [Waiting
jobs], [Scheduled jobs] and [Printed jobs], or in a
DocBox (optional).
7 [Trays] button Access the [Trays] section on the control panel to
do the following, for example:
• Check the content of all paper trays.
• Load a new media type into a paper tray, or
• Change the media type which is available in one
of the paper trays. 4
Control panel
Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation 31
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Component Function
8 [System] button Access the [System] section to do the following, for
example:
• Check the status of the toner, staples and other
supplies.
• Get information of the finishers.
• Read counters.
• Start maintenance.
• Set up the preferred workflows.
• Change a number of default system settings such
as the language.
• Adjust the brightness and contrast of the LCD
panel.
• Shut down the printer.
• View the content of the media catalog or add
(temporary) media to the media catalog.
9Username The username of the user that is currently logged
in. When you want to log in as another user, log out
or change your password, use this button.
10 Dashboard The dashboard displays information about the sys-
tem status such as:
• Information about the current printing process.
• Information about operator intervention that is
required soon.
• Information about errors.
• Information about the status of the toner reser-
voir and staple cartridges.
11 Status LED The status LED displays the status of the system:
• Red LED
The machine has stopped, for example because a
required media type is not available or an error
has occurred. Operator attention is required now.
• Orange LED
The machine will stop soon, for example because
more paper is required. Operator attention is re-
quired soon.
The orange light illuminates when the machine
reaches the warning time. The warning time is a
time you can set to determine when the orange
light must illuminate. You can set the warning
time in the [System] view of the control panel.
• Green LED
The machine is busy printing. The machine can
print longer than the set warning time. Operator
attention is not required.
• LED off
The machine is idle. There are no jobs scheduled
for printing and no operator attention is required.
Access to the control panel
Control panel
32 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The access to the control panel can be secured to protect the contents of the documents and print
quality settings. When the access to the control panel is secured, you need to log in to the print
system.
The system administrator is responsible for user authorization and for providing your credentials.
For more information, see
Users of the print system
on page 11.
[7] Login screen
[8] Username is displayed at the bottom of the screen
Control panel
Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation 33
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Settings Editor
Introduction
The Settings Editor is a web-based application and therefore accessible via an Internet browser.
The Settings Editor enables you to manage settings or to display information in the following
areas.
PRISMAsync offers the web-based Settings Editor to configure the print system according to
requirements of the print environment. Part of these settings is also available on the control
panel.
The following configuration settings are available In the Settings Editor:
• Media settings, to maintain the media catalog and media families.
• Default job settings, the print and scan quality, finishing properties, and most print languages.
• Energy save modes
• Default system settings of finishers, o/a high capacity stacker, stacker.
• Workflow settings, to set up the DocBox folders, SMB shares, fonts, scan profiles, hotfolders
and automated workflows.
• Transaction printing settings (optional), to define setups, image shifting, tray mapping and
resources.
• IT and security settings, to establish the connection with servers, to ensure a secure
environment, and to set up the accounting system.
• Support information, to view contact and counter information, to install licenses, to update
software, to download Remote Printer Driver, to troubleshoot, to generate loggings.
• Troubleshooting to create and download loggings, to backup and restore the system settings,
to remove jobs.
How to access the Settings Editor
Make sure you have the following information before you access the Settings Editor.
• The IP address or host name of the PRISMAsync controller.
• The key operator password to change all settings except for the settings in the [Configuration]
tab.
• The system administrator password to change all settings including the settings in the
[Configuration] tab.
Procedure
1. Open your web browser.
NOTE
When the Settings Editor does not display the correct language, you can change the
preferred language in the Internet options of your Internet browser. The desired
language must be first in the list of languages.
2. In the address bar, enter the IP address or host name of the PRISMAsync controller.
http://<printername or IP address>
https://<printername or IP address>
The Settings Editor application appears.
Settings Editor
34 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation
Canon varioPRINT DP line
You can now make the required changes.
Settings Editor
Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation 35
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Remote Manager
The web-based Remote Manager provides workload planning on the configured PRISMAsync
print systems. Workload planning helps to achieve an optimal print production and an efficient
job handling.
When you work with Remote Manager, you can access the queues of the connected print
systems. So, you are able to do the following planning tasks:
• Monitor the status and current activities of each printer.
• Distribute jobs across the available print systems.
• Submit PDF jobs.
• Export and import PDF jobs for preflight tooling.
Remote Manager
36 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Media-based workflow
The media catalog is the backbone of the media-based workflow. The media catalog contains the
media that the print system supports.
The prepress staff select the media for the job from the media catalog. The control panel shows
the operator the media the job needs.
The operator loads and assigns the media in the paper
trays.
Prepress staff selects the required media from the media
catalog.
The media and color defaults are defined in the media
catalog.
The operator can change job media and manage media in
the catalog.
[9] Media-based workflow
During the initial configuration of the print system, the media catalog is filled with media and
media attributes.
When you work with the media catalog, you can take advantage of the following benefits:
• The media in the media catalog store print quality attributes that the entire print system uses.
Each time you select the media from the media catalog, the print system automatically applies
the same print quality settings.
• The control panel shows the operator which media to load.
• The control panel, Remote Printer Driver and the PRISMA software access the same media
catalog.
• You can also use the media catalog for copy jobs.
Define the media attributes on the control panel or with the Settings Editor.
The system administrator determines if operators are allowed to manage the media catalog from
the control panel.
Media-based workflow
Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation 37
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Document printing workflow
The document printing workflow describes the route from the job preparation to the finishing and
delivery of the printed output. The document printing workflow has four phases:
1. Job preparation
Prepress staff defines the print document and job settings, and submits the print job to the
PRISMAsync printer. The prepress staff uses PRISMA software, Remote Printer Driver,
automated workflows or hotfolders to prepare and submit the jobs.
2. Workload planning
Remote Manager is used to monitor the connected print systems, paper trays, scheduled
jobs, and upcoming actions to manage the workload across all connected print systems.
3. Job planning
Print jobs arrive in one of the following PRISMAsync job locations: a DocBox, the list of
waiting jobs or the list of scheduled jobs. The active workflow profile determines how
PRISMAsync routes the jobs.
4. Print production
The print system prints and finishes jobs according to the job sequence in the list of
scheduled jobs.
Job preparation
Print production
Job planning
Waiting
jobs
Printed jobs
Scheduled
jobs
Workload planning
Remote Manager
DocBox
PRISMAsync driverPRISMAprepare
[10] Job workflow for document printing mode
Document printing workflow
38 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Transaction printing workflow
When there is a license for transaction printing (IPDS or PCL), you can operate the print system in
the transaction printing mode. An IPDS or PCL host sends a streaming job to a dedicated port in
the print system. The transaction printing mode fits print environments with large numbers of
business critical data, such as invoices, checks and salary slips.
Typical for the transaction print mode is that first non-variable parts of a print job are stored on
the print server and then merged with the variable parts of the print job.
Print production
Job planning
Scheduled
jobs
Job preparation
Applications to prepare and
submit job stream
PRISMAproduction
Preflight and
make ready
Data input
Job scheduling and
monitor
[11] Job workflow for transaction printing mode
During daily work, you can switch between the transaction printing and document printing
modes without rebooting the print system.
When the transaction printing mode is active, the print system still accepts PDF and PostScript
jobs. However, PRISMAsync starts to process these jobs, when you switch off the transaction
printing mode.
Differences between the two printing modes
The transaction printing mode is different from the document printing mode in several respects:
1. All data in one connection session are part of the same streaming job. This streaming job can
have job separators. In this instance, you can see the different job names on the control
panel.
2. The print resolution for IPDS is 240, 300, 600 dpi, or automatically detected.
3. When the transaction printing jobs contain paper tray selection numbers, you can select a
mapping method. The paper tray number corresponds to a physical tray or to media from the
catalog:
• Tray-to-media mapping
You can assign the paper tray number included in the print job to a physical paper tray.
You select media from the media catalog and link these to a logical tray, indicated by a
number. The print system maps the media of the logical tray to the physical paper trays
that hold these media. For color management, the output profile associated with the media
family of the media is used. The control panel shows the media which the job uses.
Transaction printing workflow
Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation 39
Canon varioPRINT DP line
• Tray-to-tray mapping
You specify which logical tray (indicated by a number) corresponds to a physical paper
tray. The print system will use the media that are loaded in the physical paper tray to which
the job refers via a logical tray. Also other paper trays that contain these media are used
when needed. The control panel shows the media which the job uses. For color
management, the output profile associated with the media family of the media is used.
Transaction printing setups
A transaction printing setup is a collection of preset print settings for a transaction job, such as
output location, data resolution, face orientation, offset stacking, font capture, and logical page
size.
Create transaction printing setups in the Settings Editor.
Work in transaction printing mode
When you want to print in the transaction printing mode, first activate the transaction mode and
establish the connection with the IPDS or PCL host. When you print in the transaction printing
mode, the schedule informs you which types of media the streaming job uses. The schedule
cannot predict the time needed for a streaming job.
Image adjustment
You can create a transaction printing preset with an image shift definition. This is useful for better
alignment of variable data, such as names or addresses, on the page. You define the image shift
on the control panel, but also in the Settings Editor.
Secure error recovery
When an job error occurs in transaction printing mode, the job recovery takes place from the
page that caused the error. When multiple pages of the same document are not allowed, for
example, for lotteries and bank accounts, you must adjust the error recovery settings. When you
select the secure error recovery in the Settings Editor, the print system does not perform an
output recovery and deletes all remaining pages. A stack eject follows when the printed output
goes to the high capacity stacker. As a result, you must submit the job again.
Transaction printing workflow
40 Chapter 3 - Explore the ease of operation
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 4
Start the print system
Power Buttons and Power Modes
The Power Buttons
The printer has the following switches and buttons to control the power supply.
Button Name Description
On/Off button The On/Off button is located on top of the printer. Using
the On/Off button starts up or shuts down the whole sys-
tem, including the PRISMAsync controller.
Sleep button The Sleep button is located at the right-hand side of the
control panel. Using the Sleep button puts the printer in-
to sleep mode or wakes the printer up from the sleep
mode. When you press the Sleep button, the control
panel will be turned off too. The PRISMAsync controller
remains on.
The Sleep button allows you to switch between the
Ready mode and the Sleep mode. This is only possible
when the On/Off button is On and the start-up phase is
completed.
The Power Modes
You can find the energy saving settings in the Settings Editor under [Preferences] -> [System
settings] -> [Energy save modes].
The power modes
Power mode Control panel Description
Off Off The printer and the controller are completely off. There
is no power consumption. The printer cannot receive or
print any job.
Ready On The printer is ready to print jobs.
Low power mode Off The low power mode is an energy save mode.
To use the low power mode, the [Low power mode tim-
er enabled] setting in the Settings Editor must be set to
[Yes]. When this setting is disabled, the printer skips the
low power mode and goes into the sleep mode or deep
sleep mode after the time set for these modes.
When the printer has been idle for the time defined in
the [Low power mode timer] setting, the printer goes in-
to low power mode automatically.
Possible values: 5 - 30 minutes.
Factory default: 20 minutes.
The printer wakes up when a job arrives in the list of
[Scheduled jobs] or when you touch the control panel
(either the screen or any button). 4
Power Buttons and Power Modes
42 Chapter 4 - Start the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Power mode Control panel Description
Sleep mode Off Once the printer has been idle for the time defined in the
[Sleep mode timer] setting in the Settings Editor, the
printer goes into sleep mode automatically. Compared
to the low power mode, the printer uses less energy.
Possible values: 31 - 240 minutes.
Factory default: 40 minutes.
The printer wakes up when:
• You press the Sleep button on the control panel, or
• A wake-up timer expires, or
• A job arrives in the list of [Scheduled jobs], provided
that the [Automatic wake-up enabled] setting in the
Settings Editor is set to [Yes].
Press the Sleep button on the right-hand side of the
control panel to put the printer into the sleep mode man-
ually. The printer goes into the sleep mode after all jobs
are finished.
When the [Deep sleep mode enabled] setting is set to
[Yes], the printer goes into the deep sleep mode.
Deep sleep mode Off The deep sleep mode is an alternative to the sleep mode
described above. To use the deep sleep mode, the [Deep
sleep mode enabled] setting in the Settings Editor must
be set to [Yes]. Also sleep mode must be enabled.
In the deep sleep mode:
• The printer uses less energy than in sleep mode.
• The printer needs more time to wake up than in sleep
mode.
NOTE
An application in your workflow may require
the printer to wake up more quickly. If the
printer does not wake up quick enough, the
application may give an error. In that case it is
advised to disable the deep sleep mode. Then
the printer will use the sleep mode instead.
Power Buttons and Power Modes
Chapter 4 - Start the print system 43
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Turn On the System
Illustration
[12] The On/Off button
Procedure
NOTE
This procedure applies to a system that is completely off.
1. Put the On/Off button of each connected finishing unit into the "I" position.
2. Press the On/Off button on top of the printer, next to the base of the control panel.
Turn On the System
44 Chapter 4 - Start the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Shut Down the System
Illustration
[13] Shut down the system
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Shut down system].
The control panel displays the message [Are you sure you want to shut down?].
2. Press [Yes].
A message indicates when the shut down will begin.
When the shut down is complete, the control panel will be off.
3. To shut down the system completely, switch the On/Off button of each connected finishing unit
into the "O" position.
Shut Down the System
Chapter 4 - Start the print system 45
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Restart the System
Introduction
You can restart the system via the Settings Editor (under [Support] -> [Troubleshooting]) or via
the control panel.
Illustration
[14] Restart the system
Procedure
1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Shut down system].
The control panel displays the message [Are you sure you want to shut down?].
2. Press [Restart].
Restart the System
46 Chapter 4 - Start the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 5
Prepare the print system
Adjust the control panel
You can change several settings to adjust the control panel according to your needs or workflow.
Change the display language of the control panel
1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Language].
2. Select the language.
3. Touch [OK]
Adjust the warning time
The dashboard and the operator attention light warn you when an operator intervention is
expected. You can change the warning time or disable the warning in advance.
Choose a warning time so that you have sufficient time to prepare media or remove prints
without a print system stop. The factory default is 10 minutes.
[15] Warning time setting
1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Warning time].
2. Touch [Warning in advance] to enable or disable the function.
3. Touch the - or + button to decrease or increase the warning time in increments of 1 minute.
You can set a time from 1 - 60 minutes.
4. Touch [OK].
Use of shorter job names
When the job name is too long to display on the control panel, PRISMAsync truncates the job
name. You can determine how PRISMAsync shortens the job names.
Adjust the control panel
48 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[16] Job name truncation
1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Job name truncation].
2. Indicate how you want to shorten the job name.
3. Touch [OK].
Adjust the readability of the control panel
You can adjust the brightness and contrast of the control panel screen. Use the automatic or
manual adjustment.
Setting Description
[Auto adjust] The screen of the control panel will automatically set the correct
ratio of brightness and contrast.
[Brightness] You can increase or decrease the brightness from level 20 to 100
in steps of one. The higher the value, the higher the brightness.
[Contrast] You can increase or decrease the contrast from level 10 to 100 in
steps of one. The higher the value, the higher the contrast.
Adjust the control panel
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 49
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[17] Control panel adjustments
1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Control panel settings].
2. Choose the automatic adjustment method or touch the + and - buttons to adjust the
brightness and contrast manually.
3. Touch [OK].
Use pinch zoom gestures
When you want to use pinch-in and pinch-out gestures you must first enable the multi-touch
function.
Adjust the control panel
50 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[18] Multi-touch function
1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Control panel settings].
2. Enable the multi-touch function.
3. Touch [OK].
4. Restart the system.
Adjust the control panel
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 51
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Work with the Workflow Profiles
Introduction
The machine is used in different printing environments. Each environment requires other settings
to optimize the workflow or to meet your personal workflow preferences. The machine contains a
number of default workflow profiles to help you optimize your workflow. The default workflow
profiles are combinations of frequently used settings for print jobs ([Receive], [Print] and
[Output]). However, the workflow profiles cannot cover all the possible workflows you may need.
Therefore, you can also define the settings individually (custom workflow).
This section makes recommendations about when to use which workflow profile. Furthermore,
this section describes the settings and the effects of the settings.
NOTE
The [Workflow profile] button in the [Setup] section of the [System] view displays the name of
the selected workflow profile. When you customized the settings of a workflow profile, the
button displays the text [Custom].
NOTE
The [Workflow profile] button in the [Setup] section of the [System] view displays the name of
the selected workflow profile. When you customized the settings of a workflow profile, the
button displays the text [Custom].
The Use of the Default Workflow Profiles
[19] The workflow profiles screen
The following sections make recommendations about when to use which default workflow
profile.
Work with the Workflow Profiles
52 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Standard workflow profile
[Standard]
DocBox
Scheduled
jobs
Finishing and delivery Printing Media loading
Waiting
jobs
Print production
Job planning
[20] Standard workflow profile
• The standard workflow profile fits
a productive workflow with suffi-
cient control over jobs.
• Jobs go to the list of scheduled
jobs and the print system prints
the jobs.
• The print system selects another
output tray for each next job.
Job by job workflow profile
[Job by job]
DocBox
Scheduled
jobs
Finishing and delivery Printing Media loading
Waiting
jobs
Print production
Job planning
[21] Job by job workflow profile
• The job-by-job workflow profile
fits a workflow in which every job
needs attention.
• All jobs come in the list of sched-
uled jobs and you start the jobs
one by one from the list of sched-
uled jobs. Always touch [Resume]
in the dashboard to start the next
job.
• The print system selects another
output tray for each next job.
Work with the Workflow Profiles
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 53
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Check and print workflow profile
[Check and print]
Print production
Job planning DocBox
Finishing and delivery Printing Media loading
Waiting
jobs
Scheduled
jobs
[22] Check and print workflow profile
• The check-and-print workflow pro-
file is suitable for a workflow in
which every job requires attention.
You check the print quality and
layout setting of the first set.
• All jobs are received in the list of
scheduled jobs and only the first
set of the job is printed. After ap-
proval of the first set, you give the
print command to print the other
sets in one run.
• The print system selects another
output tray for each next job.
Manual planning workflow profile
[Manual planning]
Print production
Job planning DocBox
Scheduled
jobs
Finishing and delivery Printing Media loading
Waiting
jobs
[23] Manual planning workflow profile
• The manual planning workflow fits
a workflow in which you want to
determine the print priority of the
jobs.
• All jobs are received in the list of
waiting jobs.
• The print system selects another
output tray for each next job.
Work with the Workflow Profiles
54 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Unattended workflow profile
[Unattended]
DocBox
Scheduled
jobs
Finishing and delivery Printing Media loading
Waiting
jobs
Print production
Job planning
[24] Unattended workflow profile
• The unattended workflow profile
fits a workflow in which productiv-
ity is very important.
• All jobs go to the list of scheduled
jobs and are printed.
• To keep the system running, you
should make sure consumables
remain available and you remove
printed output and waste on time.
The Default Settings for [Receive]
The default [Receive] settings
Workflow profile [Receive] settings
[Destination of print
job]
[Destination of copy
job]
[Destination of Doc‐
Box job]
[Standard] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]
[Job by job] [As in job] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]
[Check and print] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]
[Manual planning] [Waiting jobs] [Waiting jobs] [Scheduled jobs]
[Unattended] [As in job] [Scheduled jobs] [Scheduled jobs]
The Default Settings for [Print]
The default [Print] settings
Workflow profile [Print] settings
[Confirm start of job] [Check first set]
[Standard] [Off] [As in job]
[Job by job] [On] [As in job]
[Check and print] [Off] [On]
[Manual planning] [Off] [As in job]
[Unattended] [Off] [Off]
Work with the Workflow Profiles
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 55
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The Default Settings for [Output]
The default [Output] settings
Workflow profile [Output] settings
[Next output tray] [Offset stacking]
[Standard] [After each job] [Sets (as in job)]
[Job by job] [After each job] [Sets (as in job)]
[Check and print] [After each job] [Sets (as in job)]
[Manual planning] [After each job] [Sets (as in job)]
[Unattended] [When tray is full] [Banners]
Values and effects of the settings
The following table describes the effects of the various values of the settings.
Values and effects of the settings
Setting Values Effect
[Destination of
print job]
[Scheduled jobs] The jobs are immediately sent to the list of [Scheduled
jobs].
[Waiting jobs] The jobs are sent to the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can
manually define the order in which the jobs will be prin-
ted.
[As in job] The jobs are sent to the destination that is defined in the
job ticket or in the copy job.
[Destination of
copy job]
[Scheduled jobs] The jobs are immediately sent to the list of [Scheduled
jobs].
[Waiting jobs] The jobs are sent to the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can
manually define the order in which the jobs will be prin-
ted.
[DocBox] The copy jobs go directly to the [DocBox]. When you
have more than 1 [DocBox] on your system, you can se-
lect the [DocBox] to which the jobs will be sent.
[Destination of
DocBox job]
[Scheduled jobs] The jobs are immediately sent to the list of [Scheduled
jobs].
[Waiting jobs] The jobs are sent to the list of [Waiting jobs]. You can
manually define the order in which the jobs will be prin-
ted.
[Confirm start of
job]
[On] The machine always stops before the next scheduled
job. Touch [Resume] in the dashboard to start each job.
[Off] The machine keeps printing all the jobs. The machine
does not stop before the next scheduled job, unless
there is a reason to stop. For example when a media is
not available. 4
Work with the Workflow Profiles
56 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Effect
[Check first set] [On] The machine goes on hold after the first set of a job is
printed. You can check the quality and layout of the first
set before the machine prints the remaining sets.
[Off] The machine will print the whole job without stopping
after the first set.
[As in job] The machine will print the jobs as indicated in the job
ticket.
[Next output tray] [After each job] Each job is sent to the next available output tray. In this
context, the second stack of the stacker is also defined
as an output tray.
[When tray is full] All the jobs are stacked until an output tray is full. When
an output tray is full, the next jobs are sent to the next
output tray.
[Offset stacking] [Jobs] Each printed job that is delivered to an output location is
stacked on top of the previous printed job with an offset.
This helps you to identify the various jobs.
[Sets (always)] Each printed set that is delivered to an output location is
stacked on top of the previous set with an offset. This
helps you to identify the various sets.
[Sets (as in job)] Each printed set is delivered to the output location as de-
fined in the job ticket or copy job. Therefore, the sets can
be stacked in one straight line or with an offset.
[Banners] Each banner page of a job is delivered to the output lo-
cation with an offset. This helps you to identify the sepa-
rate jobs. The jobs themselves are stacked in one
straight line.
[Off] All the printed jobs or sets are stacked in one straight
line. There is no offset between the jobs or sets.
Work with the Workflow Profiles
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 57
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Automated Workflows
Introduction to Automated Workflows
Definition
The Settings Editor enables you to set up separate automated workflows. Automated workflows
are print queues that you can program to perform a range of operations. Automated workflows
are mostly used for legacy applications where jobs are printed automatically and certain settings
must be set automatically. Every automated workflow represents a different virtual printer with
its own specific attributes. The table below describes the attributes you can define.
The selection of automated workflows is handled when the job is sent over LPR via the name of
the automated workflow of the job ticket. Once the job is sent to a specified automated workflow
on the printer, you cannot move the job to another workflow. The control panel does not display
the various automated workflows. However, jobs can get a label that you can use as a selection
criterion for further processing and production.
The use of automated workflows has for example the following advantages.
• The print workflow is automated even more, which improves the productivity.
• The programming of individual jobs is eliminated, which optimizes the job throughput.
• You can more easily distinguish, prioritize and produce jobs in different automated workflows
with different properties using less operator involvement.
• You can easily assign legacy applications without job tickets to specific job profiles.
NOTE
You can define whether or not the settings of a job ticket overrule the settings of an automated
workflow in the Settings Editor.
Attributes
NOTE
It is not mandatory to define all the settings. When you put a check mark in front of a setting,
that setting and its values become enabled.
Attribute Description
[Queue name] You can enter a distinguishing name for the automated workflow
(maximum 25 characters). This name is also used as a label on the
control panel. This helps the operator to identify certain jobs on
the control panel. In this way, the operator can identify from which
LPR queue or workflow the job has arrived. Different LPR queues
can have the same label if the operator chooses to do so. In that
case, the operator cannot distinguish from which specific queue a
job has arrived. The LPR queue name is not displayed on the con-
trol panel.
[Description] You can enter a description of maximum 200 characters.
[Overrule job ticket] When this settings is enabled, then the settings of the automated
workflow will be used.
When this setting is disabled, then the settings of the job ticket
will be used.
[Number of copies] You can indicate how many copies of a job must be printed. 4
Automated Workflows
58 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Attribute Description
[Sort] You can indicate whether the jobs must be sorted [By Set] or [By
Page].
[Media] You can enter the media that must be used.
[Fit to media] You can indicate whether every page must be scaled to the media
size.
[Print sides] You can indicate whether the jobs must be printed one-sided or
two-sided.
[Orientation] You can indicate whether the prints must be [Portrait] or [Land-
scape].
[Rotate 180 degrees] You can indicate that the prints must be rotated 180 degrees.
[Tumble] You can indicate the orientation of page images on opposite sides
of a sheet.
When [Tumble] is set to [Yes], the two pages are oriented in such
a way that the binding is at the top or bottom. The image is rota-
ted 180 degrees on alternate pages. Both sides of the page are
printed. However, the position of the image is reversed (from top
to bottom) on every other page.
When [Tumble] is set to [No], the binding is at the left or right. The
images are not rotated on alternate pages.
NOTE
[Tumble] is only possible when the setting [Print sides]
is set to [2-sided].
[Impositioning] You can indicate how the prints must look, for example [2-up] or
[Same 2-up].
[Impositioning size] You can indicate the size of booklet jobs.
[Front or booklet cover] You can indicate which media must be used for the front covers or
booklet covers.
[Front cover print on] You can indicate which sides of the front cover must be printed.
[Back cover] You can indicate which media must be used for the back covers.
[Back cover print on] You can indicate which sides of the back cover must be printed.
[Perfect binding] You can indicate where the binding must be done, for example
[Left binding] or [Right binding]
[Offset stacking] You can indicate whether each next job or set must be stacked
with an offset compared to the previous job or set.
[Staples] You can indicate where the prints must be stapled, for example
[Top left] or [Top right].
[Output location] You can indicate where the jobs are sent, for example to the stack-
er.
[Sheet order] You can indicate the order in which the sheets will be delivered,
for example [Face down - Normal order].
[Feed edge] You can indicate whether the sheets will be fed [Long edge] or
[Short edge]. 4
Introduction to Automated Workflows
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 59
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Attribute Description
[Header up/down] You can indicate whether the header of the sheets must be [Head-
er-up] or [Header-down].
[Offset stacking] You can indicate whether the prints must be delivered to the out-
put location with or without a small shift.
[Offset after N sets] You can indicate the number of sets that will be shifted together.
[Punches] You can indicate how many punch holes are required.
[Folding] You can indicate the required folding method.
[Fold to] You can indicate the size in which the media must be folded.
[Trim] You can indicate how the media must be trimmed.
[Trim / target width ({0})] You can indicate the width that must be trimmed.
[Trim / target height ({0})] You can indicate the height that must be trimmed.
[Contrast] You can indicate the contrast of the print.
[Brightness adjustment] You can indicate whether the print must be darker or lighter.
[Resolution] You can indicate whether the job must be printed on [1200 x 1200
dpi] or [600 x 2400 dpi].
[Halftoning] You can indicate whether the job must be printed [Line 200 LPI],
[Dot 200 LPI] or [Dot 125 LPI].
[Fattening] You can indicate whether [Fattening] must be on or off.
[Minimum line width] You can indicate whether the minimum line width must be main-
tained, or thinner lines can be printed.
[Enhanced color rendering] You can indicate whether the [Enhanced color rendering] must be
on or off.
[Page numbers] You can indicate whether or not you want to print a page number
on each page of a PDF print job.
[Start with page number] You can indicate with which number the page numbering starts.
[Position] You can indicate the position of the page number on the page.
[Text before page number] You can indicate the text that is printed before the page number.
[Text after page number] You can indicate the text that is printed after the page number.
[Job destination] You can indicate the list to which the job must be sent. For the
varioPRINT DP line, you can select [Waiting jobs], [Scheduled
jobs] or [DocBox jobs] (optional).
[DocBox name] You can indicate the name of the DocBox to which the jobs must
be sent.
[Printing workflow] You can indicate the type of workflow for the jobs. You can select
[Receive, then print while RIP is in progress] or [Streaming].
[PDL type] You can indicate whether PostScript®, PCL, PDF or XPS must be
used as page description language. 4
Introduction to Automated Workflows
60 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Attribute Description
[Separator sheets] [Separa-
tor sheets]
[A separator sheet is an empty sheet that is inserted before a set.
If 'As in job' is selected, the addition of a separator sheet to the job
is as defined in the job. If the job does not specify separator sheet,
no separator sheet is added to the job.]
[Separator sheet after N
sets]
[Indicate after how many sets you want to include a separator
sheet in the stack. N represents the number of sets.]
[Account ID] You can indicate the account number of the customer that will be
used for accounting purposes.
[Cost center] [Cost center can be a maximum of 40 characters long.]
[Custom] [Custom can be a maximum of 255 characters long.]
Introduction to Automated Workflows
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 61
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Add an Automated Workflow
Introduction
The Settings Editor contains one factory default automated workflow. You can add your own
specific automated workflows to improve your productivity.
NOTE
It is not compulsory to define all the settings. When you put a check mark in front of a setting,
that setting and its values become enabled.
Illustration
[25] Add an automated workflow
Procedure
1. Select [Workflow] -> [Automated workflows].
2. Click the [Add] button.
A pop-up window displays the attributes you can specify for the new workflow.
3. Tick the checkboxes of the attributes you want to define.
4. Specify or select the values of the attributes.
5. Click [Ok].
Add an Automated Workflow
62 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Edit an Automated Workflow
Introduction
You can change the attributes of an existing automated workflow.
NOTE
It is not compulsory to define all the settings. When you put a check mark in front of a setting,
that setting and its values become enabled.
Procedure
1. Select [Workflow] -> [Automated workflows].
2. Tick the checkbox of the workflow you want to edit.
3. Click the [Edit] button.
A pop-up window displays the attributes you can specify for your workflow.
4. Change the attributes.
5. Click [Ok].
Edit an Automated Workflow
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 63
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Delete an Automated Workflow
Introduction
When you no longer need a certain automated workflow, you can delete that workflow.
NOTE
You cannot delete the factory default automated workflow.
Procedure
1. Select [Workflow] -> [Automated workflows].
2. Tick the checkbox of the workflow you want to delete.
3. Click the [Delete] button.
4. Click [Ok].
Delete an Automated Workflow
64 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Restore the Factory Default Workflow
Introduction
You can restore the factory default automated workflow. This has the following consequences.
• All the automated workflows you added will be removed
• All the changes in the default workflow will be lost.
Procedure
1. Select [Workflow] -> [Automated workflows].
2. Click the [Restore] button.
The factory default automated workflow is restored.
Restore the Factory Default Workflow
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 65
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Hotfolders
Introduction to Hotfolders
Introduction
Technically, a hotfolder is a mapped network drive on a workstation that is linked to a shared
folder on the PRISMAsync controller.
For an operator, a hotfolder is a folder on a workstation where printable files can be dropped for
printing.
Hotfolders are primarily aimed at recurring workflows. In these workflows identical printable files
with identical settings are printed on a regular basis. Hotfolders should not be used in
combination with print job tickets.
The Job Settings for Hotfolders
The settings of a hotfolder can be defined by:
• A hotfolder default ticket in the hotfolder itself, or
• The automated workflow to which the hotfolder is linked.
It is advisable to use the hotfolder functionality in combination with the hotfolder default ticket.
However, if you want to use the settings of the automated workflow where the hotfolder is linked
to, it is advised not to place a hotfolder default ticket in the hotfolder, to prevent mixing up
settings. Furthermore, you must make sure that the [Overrule the job ticket] setting in that
automated workflow is enabled (tick the checkbox).
Before You Can Use a Hotfolder
To be able to use the hotfolder function, the following steps must be carried out first:
• In the Settings Editor, the system administrator must activate the hotfolder function.
• In the Settings Editor, the system administrator must create a hotfolder and link the hotfolder
to an automated workflow.
• On a workstation, the key operator must create a shared network drive that is linked to the
hotfolder.
• On the desktop of that workstation, the key operator can create a shortcut to the hotfolder, if
desired.
Hotfolders
66 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Activate the Hotfolder Function
Introduction
The information in this section is intended for system administrators.
NOTE
By factory default, the hotfolder function is disabled. To use the hotfolder function, the system
administrator must activate this function once. After the system administrator activated the
hotfolder function, up to 10 hotfolders can be defined.
NOTE
For this procedure, the System administrator password is required.
Procedure
1. Open the web browser and enter the host name or IP address of your PRISMAsync controller.
2. Select [Workflow] -> [Hotfolders].
3. Click [Configure].
4. At [Enabled], select [Yes] to activate the hotfolder function.
5. Enter a unique [User name] and [Password].
Make sure that you filled in the user name and password before you continue with the next step.
6. Click [OK] to confirm the activation of the hotfolder function.
A confirmation window opens.
7. Click [OK] to restart the controller now.
Activate the Hotfolder Function
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 67
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Create a Hotfolder
Introduction
The information in this section is intended for system administrator.
Before you begin
The hotfolder function must be activated. Otherwise, the system administrator must activate the
hotfolder function first.
Procedure
NOTE
This procedure requires the system administrator password for the Settings Editor.
1. Open your web browser and enter the host name or IP address of your PRISMAsync controller.
2. Select [Workflow] -> [Hotfolders].
3. Click [Add].
4. Give the hotfolder a logical name.
A logical name helps you to recognize the type of jobs you want to process using this hotfolder.
5. Select the automated workflow to which you want to link the hotfolder.
6. Click [OK].
Create a Hotfolder
68 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Create a Shared Network Folder on a Workstation
Introduction
The information in this section is intended for key operators.
Before creating a shared network folder on a workstation, the following actions must be carried
out first:
• Enable the hotfolder function.
• Create an automated workflow (optional).
• Create a hotfolder.
NOTE
This procedure describes the creation of a shared network folder on a workstation with a
Microsoft® Windows® operating system. Depending on the operating system of your
workstation, the procedure can be different.
Procedure
1. Open Microsoft® Explorer.
2. Click Tools -> Map Network Drive...
3. Select a drive letter for the shared network folder.
4. Enter the name of the shared network folder, for example \\12.34.56.78\Booklet, or click the
'Browse' button to navigate to the required location.
NOTE
Instead of 12.34.56.78 you must enter the host name or IP address of the PRISMAsync
controller. Booklet is the name you gave to the hotfolder when you created the
automated workflow.
5. Click 'Finish'.
A log in screen will appear.
6. Enter the user name and the password that were defined when the hotfolder function was
enabled in the Settings Editor.
7. Click 'OK.'
The hotfolder is now ready for use.
8. If desired, you can create a shortcut to the shared network folder on the desktop of the
workstation.
Create a Shared Network Folder on a Workstation
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 69
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Create a Hotfolder Default Ticket ('default_ticket.jdf')
Introduction
Hotfolders are primarily aimed at recurring workflows. In these workflows identical printable files
with identical settings are printed on a regular basis. A hotfolder default ticket ('
default_ticket.jdf') in the hotfolder determines the settings for the print jobs. The name of the
hotfolder default ticket must not be changed, otherwise it will not be used in the hotfolder.
NOTE
If you want to use the hotfolder default ticket, make sure that the [Overrule job ticket] setting of
the automated workflow in which the hotfolder was created, is disabled (no check mark in the
checkbox). Otherwise, the settings of the automated workflow overrule the settings of the
hotfolder default ticket.
Procedure
NOTE
This procedure is an example of the procedure on a Microsoft® Windows® operating
system. For other operating systems, the procedure can vary.
1. Click Start - Settings - Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer driver of your printer and select Printing Preferences.
3. Define the required settings.
4. Click the [Save] icon in the Templates bar.
5. Enter a name for the template.
6. Click [OK].
7. Right-click the template you just created and select 'Save as ticket'.
8. Browse to the shared network folder and click [Save].
The template is saved as a hotfolder default ticket.
Do not change the name of the hotfolder default ticket ('default_ticket.jdf').
Create a Hotfolder Default Ticket ('default_ticket.jdf')
70 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Accounting
General Information
Introduction to the Accounting Function
Introduction
NOTE
Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.
The accounting function is meant to charge the costs for print, copy and scan jobs to customers
or users.
Below, the basics of accounting are described. Detailed information about the accounting
function is described in separate chapters.
Basics
• Mandatory:
To use the accounting function, a license file must be uploaded to the PRISMAsync controller
first. Then the account log file is created too.
For each job, the account log file stores job information such as type of job and account ID, if
applicable. To calculate the costs, you can download the account log files via the Settings
Editor.
• Optional:
If you want to distinguish jobs for various customers, you must use account IDs. An account ID
is a number that is unique for a certain customer. To be able to enter account IDs, you must set
the [Identification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor to [Yes]. From now on, each job
requires an account ID. However, any ID entered is considered valid. Jobs with an account ID
can be recognized by a $ on the job icon.
On the control panel, the [Account ID] and the [Accounting mode] buttons become available.
• Optional:
If you want to make sure that only predefined account IDs are accepted, you must set the
[Verification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor to [Yes] and upload an account ID file to the
PRISMAsync controller. The account ID file ('accid.csv') must contain account related
information, but at least account IDs.
Now the PRISMAsync controller checks whether an account ID entered on the control panel is
predefined in the account ID file. When you enter a non-valid account ID for a job, the control
panel displays the message [Invalid account ID. Enter a valid account ID.]. You must enter a
valid account ID to continue with this job.
NOTE
In the Settings Editor, navigate to [Configuration] -> [Accounting] for all accounting settings.
Only key operators or system administrators can perform actions in the [Accounting] section.
Accounting
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 71
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The Accounting Related Settings in the Settings Editor
Description
NOTE
Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.
The table below describes the available accounting related settings in the Settings Editor
(navigate to [Configuration] -> [Accounting]).
The accounting related settings
Setting Description
[Save account log files] You can save the account log files to a location on your
PC or network to create invoices for customers, for ex-
ample.
[Upload account ID file] [Upload a file with account IDs to make sure that submit-
ted print jobs will only be printed when they have a valid
account ID. To use this functionality, verification of ac-
count IDs must be activated.]
[Download account ID file] [Download the file with account IDs from the system, for
example to update the file with new IDs.]
[Default account ID for streaming
jobs]
[Use this setting to define the default account ID that is
used when the system processes streaming jobs.]
[Identification enabled] [Enable this setting if every job which is printed/copied
on the system must have an account ID.]
[Verification enabled] [Enable this setting if the account ID of every job must
be verified. For this verification, an account ID file must
be uploaded to the system.]
[Account field separator] This setting allows you to select the character used in
the account log files to separate the information. You
can select [Use ';' (semi-colon)] or [Use ',' (comma)].
[UTF-8 header enabled] This settings allows you to indicate that the account log
files must be encoded in UTF-8.
The Accounting Related Settings in the Settings Editor
72 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Enable the Identification and Verification of Account IDs
Introduction
NOTE
Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.
To be able to enter account IDs for jobs, the [Identification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor
must be set to [Yes].
If you want to make sure that the PRISMAsync controller accepts only predefined account IDs, the
[Verification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor must be set to [Yes] too. Then an account ID
file is required too.
NOTE
You can only enable the verification function when the identification function was enabled first.
Procedure
NOTE
System administrators only.
1. Access the Settings Editor.
2. Click [Configuration] -> [Accounting].
3. To enable the identification function, click [Identification enabled] -> [Yes] -> [OK].
4. To enable the verification function, click [Verification enabled] -> [Yes] -> [OK].
NOTE
When both the [Identification enabled] and the [Verification enabled] settings in the
Settings Editor are set to [Yes], the control panel displays the account name that
corresponds to the account ID as defined in the 'accid.csv' file. When no account name
is defined, the control panel displays the account ID.
Enable the Identification and Verification of Account IDs
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 73
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The Account ID File
The Account ID File
Introduction
NOTE
Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.
All account related information, such as account IDs and account names, is stored in an account
ID file ('accid.csv'). You can download this file via the Settings Editor to add, edit or delete
account information. You can enter a maximum of 2,000 account IDs. Make sure that each
account ID is unique.
NOTE
The first row of the account ID file contains header information. Do not change or delete this
row.
The content of the Account ID File
The account ID file contains 4 columns with the account information. Only the first two columns
<recordid> and <accountid> are mandatory. Filling in the other columns is optional.
The content of the account ID file
Data field Description
<recordid> All accounts, starting in row two, must have the ID 4313.
<accountid> This column contains the IDs (maximum 40 characters) that will be
checked for validity when [Verification enabled] is set to [Yes].
NOTE
You can only enter 12 digits on the control panel.
<accountname> This column contains the account name (maximum 40 characters)
that corresponds with the account ID in the second column.
When you enter an account ID and [Verification enabled] is set to
[Yes], the control panel displays the name that corresponds with
the account ID. When no name is defined in the account ID file, the
control panel displays the account ID.
<comment> This column is a free text field (maximum 255 characters) where
you can enter additional information about an account, for exam-
ple the maximum monthly print volume. This information is not
displayed on the control panel.
The Account ID File
74 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Download, Edit and Upload the Account ID File
Procedure
NOTE
Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.
1. In the Settings Editor, click [Configuration] -> [Accounting].
2. Click [Download account ID file].
3. Click the link to the 'accid.csv' file.
4. Click [Save].
5. Browse to the location where you want to save the file, then click [Save].
6. Using Microsoft® Excel®, for example, you can now add, edit, or delete account IDs from the file,
then click [Save].
7. In the Settings Editor, click [Configuration] -> [Accounting].
8. Click [Upload account ID file].
9. Browse to the location of the changed 'accid.csv' file.
10. Select the required file and click 'Open'.
11. Click [Upload account ID file].
Download, Edit and Upload the Account ID File
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 75
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The Account Log File
The Account Log File
The Name of an Account Log File
NOTE
Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.
An account log file has the following name format:
<serialnumber><yyyy><mm><dd><extension>, for example 012345678920120115.CSV.
Item Description
<serialnumber> The serial number of the device.
This number is a text string with a maximum length of 10 characters
(A-Z, a-z, 0-9). The serial number is provided by the PRISMAsync con-
troller at the moment the account log file is created.
<yyyy><mm><dd> The year, month and day the account log file was created.
<extension> The file extension, either .CSV (Comma Separated Values) for inactive
log files, or .ACL (ACtive Log) for the active log file.
For the current day, the file has the extension .ACL. At midnight,
the .ACL file is converted into a .CSV file.
The PRISMAsync controller can store a maximum of 99 .CSV files +
1 .ACL file. When the limit is reached, the oldest .CSV file is removed.
You can retrieve the account log files from the Settings Editor ([Config-
uration] -> [Accounting] -> [Save account log files]) and import the files
into Microsoft® Excel, for example.
Data Records
An account log file consists of data records. The data records contain information about the use
of the varioPRINT DP line. For each job, a new data record is added to the current account log file.
The first record of an account log file is the header record. The header record always starts with
4302. Every subsequent data record starts with 4303. These records contain the actual accounting
information for each job.
The Fields of an Account Log File
The following table describes the fields of each data record in an account log file.
Field name Specification Description
<recordtype> 4303 A number that identifies a data record.
<documentid> A text string with a max-
imum length of 40 char-
acters
A unique identification for a job or document,
which is supplied by the submitter of the job. The
document ID is extracted from the print data, for ex-
ample the attribute 'documentid' in an OJT. This
field keeps the same value when the job is submit-
ted multiple times. The field is empty when the at-
tribute is not available. 4
The Account Log File
76 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Field name Specification Description
<jobid> A number The PRISMAsync controller creates a unique job
identification number when:
• A new print job is received
• A new copy or scan job is started
• An existing job is started from the mailbox
• An existing job is moved from the [Printed jobs]
section to the [Waiting jobs] section
NOTE
The term mailbox is understood to in-
clude the list of [Waiting jobs] and the
[DocBox].
<jobtype> Possible entries:
• COPY
• IP
• AP
• SYSTEM
• SCAN
• SCAN2MBX
• MBXCOPY
Describes the type of job.
• COPY: Direct copy job
• IP: Interactive print job (a job that was printed
from the mailbox).
• AP: Automatic print job (a job that was directly
printed from the network, not from the mailbox)
• SYSTEM: A test print that was started in the serv-
ice mode or service copy mode.
• SCAN: A scan-to-file job.
• SCAN2MBX: A job that was scanned to the mail-
box.
• MBXCOPY: A copy job that was printed from the
mailbox.
NOTE
The term mailbox is understood to in-
clude the list of [Waiting jobs] and the
[DocBox].
<startdate> <yyyy>-<mm>-<dd>
NOTE
When you
open the file
in Microsoft®
Excel, the date
format
changes into
the date for-
mat that is de-
fined in Micro-
soft® Excel
The date on which the printer started printing the
job. Typically, this is the first moment that a job can
be interrupted or stopped via the control panel.
4
The Account Log File
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 77
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Field name Specification Description
<starttime> <hh>:<mm>:<ss>
NOTE
When you
open the file
in Microsoft®
Excel, the time
format
changes into
the time for-
mat that is de-
fined in Micro-
soft® Excel
The time on which the printer started printing the
job. Typically, this is the first moment that a job can
be interrupted or stopped via the control panel.
<activetime> <hh>:<mm>:<ss> The total time the job is active and actually printing.
Hours can exceed 24.
<idletime> <hh>:<mm>:<ss> The total time the job is active, but waits for an ac-
tion by the operator, such as clearing an error or
loading the required media. Hours can exceed 24.
<readydate> <yyyy>-<mm>-<dd> The date on which the job was finished or aborted.
<readytime> <hh>:<mm>:<ss> The time the job was finished or aborted.
<result> Possible entries:
• Done
• Abrt
• Stop
Information about how the job was completed.
• Done: The job was finished correctly.
• Abrt: The operator or the PRISMAsync controller
stopped or aborted the job, for example in case
of an error.
• Stop: The job was stopped by the user and
moved to the [Waiting jobs] section. When the
job is restarted or continued later, multiple ac-
count records will be generated for this job.
<username> A text string with a max-
imum length of 255
characters
The user name that is defined for the job, for exam-
ple in the attribute 'username' in an OJT.
<jobname> A text string with a max-
imum length of 255
characters
The name of the job for automatic or interactive
print jobs and scan jobs, for example in the attrib-
ute 'jobname' in an OJT. For scan jobs, the gener-
ated file name is used.
<costcentre> A text string with a max-
imum length of 40 char-
acters
The name of a department or user as defined in the
[Cost center] field of the [Account] tab of the printer
driver or in the attribute 'GroupName' in an OJT.
This field is empty when the attribute is not availa-
ble
<custom> A text string with a max-
imum length of 255
characters
Information as defined in the [Custom] field of the
[Account] tab of the printer driver or in the attribute
'custom' in an OJT, for example.
This field is empty when the attribute is not availa-
ble 4
The Account Log File
78 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Field name Specification Description
<accountid> A text string with a max-
imum length of 40 char-
acters
The account ID as defined in the [Account ID] field
of the [Account] tab of the printer driver, or on the
control panel, or in the attribute 'accountid' in an
OJT, for example.
This field is empty when the attribute is not availa-
ble
<jobaddres-
see>
A text string with a max-
imum length of 255
characters
The name of the recipient of the print job. The
name is extracted from the print data, for example
the attribute 'jobaddressee' in an OJT.
<nofscana4> A number The number of scanned A4-like sheets, including
custom sized sheets of which at least one dimen-
sion is equal to or less than 257 mm / 10.1".
<nofscana3> A number The number of scanned A3-like sheets, including
custom sized sheets of which all dimensions are
larger than 257 mm / 10.1".
<nofsinglesta-
ples>
A number The number of times that a single staple was used
in a job.
NOTE
This number does not include the staples
from an off-line stapler.
<nofdoublesta-
ples>
A number The number of times that double staples were used
in a job.
NOTE
This number does not include the staples
from an off-line stapler.
<noffinished-
sets>
A number The number of finished sets. A set is finished after
the last sheet is sent to the output location.
<outputdestina-
tion>
Names of output loca-
tions
A descriptive name of the output location. The ex-
act names vary per product and depend on the con-
figuration of the product.
<nofprinte-
da4bw>
A number The number of printed A4-like sheets (copy jobs or
print jobs) printed in B&W. Inserts will be counted
as B&W too.
<nofprinte-
da4c>
A number The number of printed A4-like sheets (copy jobs or
print jobs) printed in color.
<nofprinte-
da3bw>
A number The number of printed A3-like sheets (copy jobs or
print jobs) printed in B&W. Inserts will be counted
as B&W too.
<nofprinte-
da3c>
A number The number of printed A3-like sheets (copy jobs or
print jobs) printed in color.
<tonerblack> Value in milligrams The estimated total usage of black toner for sheets
that are printed or copied in B&W.
<tonercolor> Value in milligrams The estimated total usage of toner for sheets that
are printed or copied in color. 4
The Account Log File
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 79
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Field name Specification Description
<nofsim-
plex>(1-16)*
A number The number of 1-sided sheets of a certain paper
type used in a job.
<nofdu-
plex>(1-16)*
A number The number of 2-sided sheets of a certain paper
type used in a job.
<mediafor-
mat>(1-16)*
A text string with a max-
imum length of 255
characters
The media size used for the job. Not every product
supports all media sizes.
<medi-
atype>(1-16)*
A text string with a max-
imum length of 40 char-
acters. Some entries are
standardized:
• PLAIN
• TRANS
• COVER
• MYPAPER
• COLOR_COPY
• COATED
• OTHER
Description of the media types used.
• PLAIN: normal paper
• TRANS: transparencies
• COVER: a special front or back page
• MYPAPER: a special media type that must be
placed in a paper tray before starting the job, and
that must be removed from that paper tray as
soon as the job is ready.
• COLOR_COPY: color copy paper
• COATED: coated media
• OTHER: unspecified media. This is used when
custom strings are not available.
<media-
weight>(1-16)*
A number The weight of the media type in grams per m² or lb.
<mediacol-
or>(1-16)*
A text string with a max-
imum length of 40 char-
acters
The color of the media used for the job.
<media-
name>(1-16)*
A text string with a max-
imum length of 40 char-
acters
The name of the media used for the job.
<cycle-
length>(1-16)*
A number If subsequent sheets are not identical (cyclic me-
dia), the cycle length indicates after how many
sheets the same sequence starts again. For normal
media the cycle length is 1. For cyclic media with an
unknown cycle length, the cycle length is 0.
<isin-
sert>(1-16)*
Yes or no ('y' or 'n') A media attribute that indicates whether the bit-
maps are printed on this media (y) or not (n).
An insert sheet can be 1-sided or 2-sided. The bit-
maps corresponding to insert sheets typically are
still part of the print job. Selection of insert media
enforces that these bitmaps are not printed (again)
on the insert media.
<istab>(1-16)* Yes or no ('y' or 'n') This is a media attribute that indicates whether the
media is tab media. Typically, tab media has a cycle
length of 1, but this is not mandatory
<punch-
count>(1-16)*
A number The number of punch holes of the prepunched me-
dia.
<nofpunches> A number The number of punched sheets in a job.
<noffolds> A number The number of folded sheets in a job. 4
The Account Log File
80 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Field name Specification Description
<nofbooklets> A number The number of booklets in a job.
<nofbinds> A number The number of bound sets in a job.
NOTE
* All fields that contain (1-16) will be included 16 times in an account log file. Each number refers
to the type of media (1 up to 16) that is used. The media characteristics of the first media type in
a job are logged in the fields ending on '1'. The characteristics of the next, different media type
are logged in the fields ending with '2' and so on. For example, <mediatype2> and
<mediaweight2> both correspond to the second type of media used in a job. If you use less than
16 media types, the remaining fields are empty. If you use more than 16 media types, they are
logged as if they were media type 16. The maximum number of media types per job is 16.
The Account Log File
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 81
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Save an Account Log File
Procedure
NOTE
Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.
1. In the Settings Editor, click [Configuration] -> [Accounting].
2. Click [Save account log files].
3. Click the link to the required file, then click [Save].
4. Browse to the location where you want to save the file, then click [Save].
Save an Account Log File
82 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Use Accounting
Select an Accounting Mode
Introduction
NOTE
Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.
When the [Identification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Yes], the accounting
function becomes available on the control panel. In the [Accounting mode] setting on the control
panel, you can select when an account ID must be entered. The table below describes the
options.
The accounting modes
Setting Description
[Per job] Each job requires an account ID. You can enter a new ac-
count ID for each job. By default, the control panel dis-
plays the account ID used for the previous job. However,
you can change the account ID displayed.
[Per job(Clear account ID)] Each job requires an account ID. You must enter a new
account ID for each job. The system clears the account
ID used for the previous job. Therefore, the [Account ID]
field in the [Job] pane is empty before the next job. 4
Use Accounting
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 83
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Description
[Fixed] The same account ID is used for all jobs until you select
[Change account ID] or [Clear account ID] under [Sys-
tem] -> [Setup] -> [Accounting] to terminate the fixed ac-
count ID currently in use.
When you use a fixed account ID, the [Account ID] field
in the [Job] pane is grayed out.
NOTE
The [Fixed] setting overrules account IDs that
are indicated in applications or printer drivers.
Therefore, select another accounting mode be-
fore printing jobs that were submitted from an
application or printer driver.
Illustration
[26] Select an accounting mode
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Accounting].
2. Press [Accounting mode].
3. Select the desired setting.
4. Press [OK].
Select an Accounting Mode
84 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Enter an Account ID per Job
Introduction
NOTE
Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.
When the [Identification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Yes], the accounting
function becomes available on the control panel. The description below applies to entering an
account ID on the control panel when the [Accounting mode] is set to [Per job(Clear account ID)].
Illustration
[27] The [Account ID] field in the [Job] pane
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch the [Account ID] button in the [Job] pane of print, copy and scan jobs.
A numerical keyboard appears.
2. Enter the account ID for the current job (1 - 12 digits).
Use the "C" button to correct a wrong entry.
3. Press [OK].
Enter an Account ID per Job
Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system 85
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Enter an Account ID in the Printer Driver
Before you begin
NOTE
Accounting requires a license. Contact your local authorized dealer for more information.
To use the accounting function in the printer driver the [Enable accounting] setting in the
[Properties] of the printer driver must be enabled.
In Microsoft® Windows® XP, for example, you must click Start -> Settings -> Printers and Faxes ->
right-click your printer -> [Properties] -> tab that shows the name of your printer, to enable
accounting.
NOTE
The fixed account ID as defined on the operator panel overrules the account ID that is defined in
the printer driver. Therefore, make sure that you cancel the fixed account ID before you print the
job from the [Waiting jobs] section on the operator panel.
Procedure
1. In your application, click 'File' -> 'Print'.
2. If more printers are available, select the required printer from the list.
3. Click [Properties].
4. Click [Account].
5. Enter the [Account ID].
6. Optionally, you can enter the name of the [Cost center] and any additional information in the
[Custom] field.
7. Click [OK].
NOTE
When the [Verification enabled] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Yes], automatic
print jobs that do not have a valid account ID are automatically placed in the [Waiting
jobs] section. You must enter a valid account ID to print the jobs.
Enter an Account ID in the Printer Driver
86 Chapter 5 - Prepare the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 6
Prepare the jobs
Prepare print jobs
Where to Define Print Job Settings
Introduction
Print jobs can vary from straightforward jobs with only a few settings to complex jobs with
extended settings. Therefore, there are several possibilities to define the settings for your print
jobs. For straightforward jobs, the use of the printer driver can be fine. If you often print recurring
jobs with identical, complex settings, the use of automated workflows or hotfolders can be the
best way to print your jobs. This section gives an overview of various possibilities.
NOTE
It is strongly recommended to define the settings for a print job in only one place, for example in
a printer driver or in an automated workflow, but not in both. Otherwise, undesired output
results can occur because settings can become mixed.
Where to Define Print Job Settings
Define the job settings
Item Description
PDL settings The job will be printed using either
• the PDL default settings as defined in the Settings Editor, or
• the PDL settings that were defined in a job itself, as interpreted
by the PDL.
Job ticket The job will be printed using the settings that were defined in the
printer driver.
When you frequently print jobs with identical settings, you can
use the template function of the printer driver. Templates contain
predefined job settings. You can also create your own custom
templates.
Hotfolder Hotfolders are primarily aimed at recurring print workflows. In
these workflows, identical PDFs or other printable files with identi-
cal settings are printed on a regular basis. The advantage of a hot-
folder is that you do not have to open a file and check the settings
before printing.
Operators can see hotfolders as a folder on their workstation
where they can simply drag & drop files.
A hotfolder option is the default ticket ('default_ticket.jdf') in a hot-
folder, which defines the settings for the print jobs. The files will
be printed according to settings of the hotfolder default ticket in
that hotfolder.
Automated workflow Automated workflows are LPR print queues that you can program-
med to perform a range of operations. Automated workflows are
primarily aimed at recurring print jobs with identical settings that
must be printed the same way as before. The advantage of auto-
mated workflows is that you do not have to open a file and check
the settings before printing. 4
Prepare print jobs
88 Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Item Description
Control panel After a print job has arrived on the PRISMAsync controller, the
print job becomes visible on the control panel. There you can
change a number of job settings or combine print jobs, for exam-
ple. It is best to change the print job settings in the list of [Waiting
jobs] or in the optional [DocBox]. With the optional [Page pro-
gramming] function, you can insert pages and define the media
and finishing settings for the page ranges in a job.
NOTE
You can only make changes to jobs that are currently
not being printed.
Where to Define Print Job Settings
Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs 89
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Prepare print jobs with Remote Printer Driver
Remote Printer Driver enables you to prepare the complete print job. Remote Printer Driver is
available in all applications for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems. You
use Remote Printer Driver to submit documents from applications, such as Microsoft Office and
Adobe Acrobat.
Be aware that there are also other PRISMAsync locations from where you can define job settings
at a later moment. In addition, workflow definitions can overrule settings you have made with
Remote Printer Driver.
The printer and its finishing equipment determine which settings are available in Remote Printer
Driver. Below you find an overview of the functions. The online help of Remote Printer Driver also
provides detailed information on the available functions. Download Remote Printer Driver from
the Settings Editor.
1
2
3
456
78
9 10
[28] Functions of PRISMAsync Remote Printer Driver
Function Description
1 Printer configuration Click the icon to see the finishing options of the printer. When
the printer is not available for printing, the printer icon turns
red.
Available media Click the icon to check which media are currently assigned in
the paper trays of the printer.
Printer has stopped When you see a red exclamation mark in this area the printer
has stopped printing. Click on the mark to see why the printer
stopped.
2 Job name The job name identifies the job on the PRISMAsync Print
Server. 4
Prepare print jobs with Remote Printer Driver
90 Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Function Description
3 Document view This preview displays the layout of the document when using
the current settings.
4 Document size The default document size is transferred from the application.
5 Document orientation The default document orientation is transferred from the ap-
plication.
7 Job settings The job settings refer to the layout, finishing, color / black &
white options to change the job.
8 Job destination, workflow,
and output delivery settings
These settings refer to several options: the number of sets,
the use of separator sets, the job location on the control pan-
el, the required output tray. The label option allows for an ex-
tra identification field.
9 Job template A template bundles a series of job settings. Click the icon to
save the current job settings for later re-use. It is also possi-
ble to delete stored templates.
10 Submit job to printer With the OK button you submit the document and job ticket
to the printer.
Prepare print jobs with Remote Printer Driver
Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs 91
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Print a Job Using PRISMAprepare (Option)
Introduction
PRISMAprepare (optional) is a software application that enables you to prepare your print jobs on
page level. You can preview the result per page.
This procedure describes the most important steps for the preparation of print jobs.
NOTE
See the online help of PRISMAprepare for all the details.
Procedure
1. Prepare the document.
[29] Lay out preparation with PRISMAprepare
2. Use the media catalog to define the media.
With PRISMAprepare you can export the media catalog to PRISMAsync controllers.
Print a Job Using PRISMAprepare (Option)
92 Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[30] The media catalog in PRISMAprepare
3. Define the required finishing options.
Print a Job Using PRISMAprepare (Option)
Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs 93
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Print a File from a USB Drive
Introduction
You can print documents (*.pdf, *.ps, *.prn, *.xps files) on a USB drive.
You can disable / enable this function in the Settings Editor.
Illustration
[31] Example of a folder structure on the USB drive
Print a File from a USB Drive
94 Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[32] Save a file to a different location
Procedure
1. Insert the USB drive into the USB port at the left-hand side of the control panel.
2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [USB].
3. Touch to browse through the directories on the USB drive.
4. Touch the file or files you want to print, or touch [Select] to select multiple files.
5. Touch [Print] to send the file to the list of [Scheduled jobs] immediately, or
6. Touch [Save] to save a copy of the file to another location on your printer such as the list of
[Waiting jobs] or a DocBox. Then you can edit the file first and print the file from the other
location
The locations you can select depend on your system configuration.
7. Remove the USB drive from the control panel when the USB LED on the control panel is off.
Print a File from a USB Drive
Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs 95
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Print a page number via PRISMAsync
Introduction
You can print a page number on each page for PDF print jobs. Per job you can specify the
position and alignment of the page number, the prefix, and the suffix of the page number.
You can also add a page number via PRISMAprepare. In PRISMAprepare you can also add a
company logo, headers, and footers.
Before you begin
Define the font and the font size for the page number in the Settings Editor.
You can add page numbers via the job properties, see below, or via an automated workflow
(AWF) in the Settings Editor.
Procedure
1. Touch [Jobs].
2. Go to the location of the job.
3. Select the job to which you want to add page numbers.
4. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job.
5. Indicate in the print quality tile the required information for the page numbers.
Print a page number via PRISMAsync
96 Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Prepare copy jobs and scan jobs
Introduction to the Copy Function
Introduction
The copy function enables you to copy paper originals. You can define the settings of the copy
jobs manually or by using templates. Templates contain predefined settings for recurring types of
copy jobs.
The copy function contains a number of factory default templates, for example for copying
mixed-size originals or combining several sets of originals. Furthermore, you can define
customized templates. The factory default templates are directly available when you access the
copy function. When you select one of these templates, the system sets the typical settings for
the selected type of copy job automatically. Next you can define all other settings for the originals
and the output.
The table below show the factory default templates you can use to start a copy job or a scan job.
The Factory Default Templates
Overview of the templates
Template When to use
[Copy job] Copy originals that have the same media size and only require
simple settings, for example two-sided or a staple.
[Combined copy job] Combine several sets of originals with the same or mixed media
size, and create one single copy job.
When you select this template, the possibility to add subsets is al-
ready displayed.
[Copy to DocBox]
NOTE
[Copy to Doc-
Box]is only visi-
ble when your
system is equip-
ped with the op-
tional DocBox
function.
Send the job to the DocBox to get extended possibilities to pro-
grammed each page separately.
When you select this template, the destination of the copy job is
set to the first available DocBox. The destination is always set to
this DocBox, even when a different copy job destination has been
defined for the active workflow profile.
However, you can change the DocBox to which the job must be
sent.
[Booklet job] Create booklets from paper originals.
When you select this template:
• The [Layout] setting is set to [Booklet], and
• The [Media] setting is set to A3/Tabloid, because the system as-
sumes you want to create booklets of A4/LTR originals.
[Mixed size] Copy a set of originals that consists of different media sizes. The
output will also consist of these different media sizes.
[Easy copy job] Copy originals that only require simple settings: one-sided or two-
sided copy, zoom, media, staples, number of copies.
[PDF scan job] Scan originals to a PDF job that is stored in the DocBox. Now you
can use PDF datapath functionality such as page numbering. 4
Prepare copy jobs and scan jobs
Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs 97
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Template When to use
[Last used] Reuse the settings of the previous copy job or scan job for your
new job.
NOTE
You cannot use [Last used] when the previous job was a
scan job or a combined copy job.
Introduction to the Copy Function
98 Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Introduction to the Scan Function
Definition
The scan function enables you to create digital documents from paper originals. You can scan
paper originals from the automatic document feeder (ADF) and from the glass plate of the
scanner.
Scan Types and Output Locations
NOTE
The scan function requires a software license. If you have a license, scan to file, scan to SMB,
scan to email and scan to USB are available. Scan to DocBox requires an additional software
license for the DocBox function.
Scan types and output locations
Scan type Output location
Scan to file FTP server
Scan to SMB SMB server
Scan to email SMTP server. The file is attached to an email
message.
Scan to USB USB flash drive
Scan to DocBox PRISMAsync controller
PDF scan job DocBox on the PRISMAsync controller
Usage
You can use the scan-to-email, scan-to-file and scan-to-SMB templates through the [Copy/Scan]
section on the control panel ([Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. To scan a document, select the required
template. Next, the job window opens. There you can change a number of settings for this scan
job. These changes are only valid for this job. The default settings of the scan template will not
change. However, you can save the changes in a new template, see
Create templates to use for
recurring jobs
on page 232.
The scan-to-USB function is accessible through the USB button in the [Jobs] section on the
control panel. The left-hand side of the control panel contains the slot for the USB flash drive.
The scan-to-DocBox function is accessible through the [Copy to DocBox] tile in the [Copy/Scan]
section.
The PDF scan job is accessible through the [PDF scan job] tile in the [Copy/Scan] section.
Condition
The customer must have a fully configured FTP, SMB and SMTP server available. The settings in
the Settings Editor are used to connect the printer to the customer's FTP, SMB and SMTP server.
Configuration
To use the scan-to-file, scan-to-SMB and scan-to-email functions, the following items must be
configured in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller.
• Scan to file ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity])
• Scan to SMB ([Workflow] -> [SMB shares])
Introduction to the Scan Function
Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs 99
Canon varioPRINT DP line
• Scan to email ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity])
• LDAP server ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]), if available. Otherwise, you can use an address
list file (ral.csv) to search for recipients.
The scan profiles file contains all copy- and scan templates that are defined. You can download
the scan profiles file for backup.
You can also use the scan profiles file to upload the copy- and scan templates to another system.
Download and upload the scan profiles file via the Settings Editor: [Workflow] -> [Scan profiles].
Removal of Scan Jobs
The PRISMAsync controller buffers the scan jobs until the jobs are delivered to the specified
output location. You can remove scan jobs from the buffer manually or automatically.
• Manually via the printer control panel: Touch [Jobs] -> list of [Scan jobs] -> select a scan job ->
touch [Delete].
• Manually via the Settings Editor: Access the Settings Editor -> click [Support] ->
[Troubleshooting] -> [Clean the scan job export buffer].
• Automatically: The PRISMAsync controller removes a buffered scan job automatically 48 hours
after a scan job has finished.
Introduction to the Scan Function
100 Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Scanning Information
Introduction
You can place an original either vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your
original with the back edge of the glass plate (by the arrow in the top left corner) or the back edge
of the ADF.
The size of the original is automatically detected, and the document is scanned.
The machine cannot always detect the size of the original if it is a non-standard paper size, such
as a book. In this case, specify the size of the original.
Orientation on the Glass Plate
When you put an original on the glass plate, always put the original face down on the glass plate.
NOTE
If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the glass plate (by the arrow in
the top left corner), your original may not be scanned correctly.
Placement on the glass plate
Placement Illustration
Vertical placement
Horizontal placement
Orientation in the ADF
Placement in the ADF
Placement Illustration
Vertical placement
4
Scanning Information
Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs 101
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Placement Illustration
Horizontal placement
Placement of the Originals
You can place originals of the following sizes either vertically or horizontally. However, the
scanning speed for horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than that of vertically placed
originals. Place originals horizontally when you copy with a preset zoom, for example when you
enlarge an A4 original to A3 paper.
NOTE
You must always place A3, B4, B6 and 11" x 17" originals horizontally.
Scanning Information
102 Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Copy or scan originals and books using the glass plate
Introduction
Use the glass plate to copy or scan bound originals (such as books and magazines), heavy or
lightweight originals, and transparencies. Also place originals on the glass plate when you want
to copy an A3 original with an image that extends all the way to the edges without the periphery
of the original being cut off.
CAUTION
Do not press down hard on the ADF when you use the glass plate to copy thick books. Doing so
may damage the glass plate and result in personal injury.
NOTE
The scanner automatically detects the following sizes of originals (after you closed the ADF): A5,
Statement 5.5"x8.5", B5, A4, A4R, Letter 8.5"x11", LetterR, B4R, B5R, LegalR 8.5"x14", A3R,
TabloidR 11"x17", B6.
Procedure
Copy originals on the glass plate
Step Action Illustration
1 Open the ADF.
NOTE
Open the ADF at least 300 mm
(11.8"). Otherwise, the size of
the originals may not be detec-
ted correctly.
Sensor
Sensor = Sensor
2 Place one original face down on the glass
plate.
4
Copy or scan originals and books using the glass plate
Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs 103
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
3 Align the top edge of your original with
the back edge of the glass plate (by the
arrow in the upper-left corner).
NOTE
When you enlarge an A4 or A5
original onto A3 paper, place
the original horizontally on the
glass plate, and align it with the
A4R or A5R marks.
NOTE
When you enlarge a Letter or
Statement original onto 11"x17"
or Legal paper, place the origi-
nal horizontally on the glass
plate, and align it with the Let-
terR or StatementR marks.
4 Gently close the ADF to prevent personal
injury or damage to the scanner.
5 Define the copy or scan settings on the
control panel and touch [Start] .
6 When the copy or scan job is ready, open
the ADF and remove the original from the
glass plate.
7 Gently close the ADF to prevent personal
injury or damage to the scanner.
Copy or scan originals and books using the glass plate
104 Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Copy books on the glass plate
Step Action Illustration
1 Open the ADF.
NOTE
Open the ADF at least 300 mm
(11.8"). Otherwise, the size of
the originals may not be detec-
ted correctly.
Sensor
Sensor = Sensor
2 Place the book on the glass plate with the
pages face down.
3 Align the top edge of pages of your book
with the back edge of the glass plate (by
the arrow in the top left corner).
4 Gently close the ADF to prevent personal
injury, damage to the scanner, or damage
to the book.
5 Define the copy or scan settings on the
control panel and touch [Start] .
Select the setting [Book] to make copies/
scans from a book original on the glass
platen. You can copy/scan the individual
pages of a book.
You can copy/scan the left-hand half and
the right-hand half of the original (opened
book) as two separate copies. Or you can
copy/scan the left-hand half or the right-
hand half of the original (opened book).
6 When the copy or scan job is ready, open
the ADF and remove the book from the
glass plate.
4
Copy or scan originals and books using the glass plate
Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs 105
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
7 Gently close the ADF to prevent personal
injury or damage to the scanner.
Copy or scan originals and books using the glass plate
106 Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Copy or Scan Originals Using the ADF
Introduction
Use the ADF to copy or scan a set of up to 300 originals. The scanner automatically feeds the
originals to the glass plate and scans them. Two-sided originals can be scanned as two-sided
documents.
Do not place the following types of originals into the ADF:
• Thin originals, when the scanner is located in an environment with high temperatures or high
humidity.
• Torn originals or originals with large binding holes.
• Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds.
• Clipped or stapled originals.
• Carbon backed paper.
• Transparencies and other highly transparent originals.
• Any other originals which may not feed smoothly.
NOTE
Always smooth out any folds in your originals before placing them into the ADF.
Procedure
Copy originals in the ADF
Step Action Illustration
1 Adjust the paper guides to fit the size of
your originals.
2 Neatly place your originals with the side
to be copied face up into the originals
tray.
Place your originals as far into the ADF as
possible until the originals indicator is lit.
3 Define the copy or scan settings on the
control panel, and touch [Start] .
4 When scanning is complete, remove the
originals from the original output area to
avoid paper jams.
Copy or Scan Originals Using the ADF
Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs 107
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Access Other Functions During a Copy Job or Scan Job
Introduction
When you access the copy function or scan function from the [Copy/Scan] view, the job window
opens in full screen mode. Therefore, the buttons that give access to the other system functions
are not visible. However, you can access the other functions while you define the settings for
your copy job or scan job.
NOTE
The machine will remember all the job settings you already defined.
Procedure
1. In the job window on the control panel, touch [Minimize].
The [Copy/Scan] view appears. The navigation buttons at the bottom of the control panel become
visible and accessible.
2. Carry out the desired actions.
3. To get back to your job window, touch [Jobs].
4. Press [Resume job].
Access Other Functions During a Copy Job or Scan Job
108 Chapter 6 - Prepare the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 7
Plan the workload remotely
PRISMAsync Remote Manager (Option)
With PRISMAsync Remote Manager you can monitor printers, operate printers remotely and send
jobs and ready-to-print documents to the printer queues of all configured printers. You must
enable and configure PRISMAsync Remote Manager in the Settings Editor.
Refer to the user manual for the PRISMAsync Remote Manager for the options available when
using this product.
PRISMAsync Remote Manager (Option)
110 Chapter 7 - Plan the workload remotely
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Use the Remote Control app to monitor printing
The PRISMAsync Remote Control app helps you to stay informed about the print production on
the available PRISMAsync printers. Even at a distance.
With PRISMAsync Remote Control on your smartphone, you see the status of your PRISMAsync
driven printers at a glance. You receive alerts when operator actions, such as loading media or
adding consumables, are foreseen. Or, in case a problem at the printer asks for an immediate
action. PRISMAsync Remote Control helps you to keep your printers printing, even while you're
doing other things.
[33] The Remote Control app: notifications, upcoming events, and printer status on a smartphone
Before you begin
To use the Remote Control app you need the following:
• One of the following smartphones:
• Smartphone with Google Android 4.1 or higher
• Apple iPhone 4 or later with iOS 7 or higher
• A Microsoft or Google account.
Set up Remote Control
You must set up Remote Control on every print system you want to monitor. You need
administrator rights to set up Remote Control.
1. Go to the control panel to enable and configure the proxy server:
Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [System configuration] -> [Proxy server].
2. Enable and configure the remote connection:
Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [System configuration] -> [Remote connection].
3. Open the Settings Editor.
4. Register this printer in the Remote Control administration in the Settings Editor.
5. Enable the Remote Control function in the Settings Editor.
6. Administer the users of the Remote Control app in the Settings Editor.
Use the Remote Control app to monitor printing
Chapter 7 - Plan the workload remotely 111
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Set up the Remote Control app
1. Download the PRISMAsync Remote Control app from Google Play or the Apple App Store
.
2. Start the app and log in with your Google or Microsoft account.
3. Change the default settings, if required.
Use the Remote Control app to monitor printing
112 Chapter 7 - Plan the workload remotely
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 8
Plan the jobs
Manage the jobs in the queue
Schedule a Waiting Job for Printing
Introduction
The selected workflow determines the destination of jobs. When jobs go to the list of [Waiting
jobs], you must manually send the jobs to the print queue (list of [Scheduled jobs]). This enables
you to keep full control of all jobs that must be printed.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues].
2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the desired list of [Waiting jobs].
3. Touch the job(s) you want to print, or use the [Select] button to make a selection.
To undo the multiple selection and only select one job, you must touch and hold that job for two
seconds.
4. Press [Print].
The job is moved to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs].
Manage the jobs in the queue
114 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Print an Urgent Job Immediately
Introduction
When a job must be printed urgently, you can give that print job priority over all other print jobs.
The [Print now] button allows you to print a job immediately. When you use the [Print now]
button, the active print job will be paused as soon as the current set is ready.
To print a job as soon as possible but not immediately, you can use the [To top] function.
Locations of the [Print now] Button
The [Print now] button is available at the following locations.
• List of [Scheduled jobs].
• DocBox (optional).
NOTE
To give priority to a job in the list of [Waiting jobs], you must first touch [Print] to send the job to
the list of [Scheduled jobs]. There you can select the job and touch [Print now].
To give priority to a job in the list of [Printed jobs], you must first reprint the job. The job is sent
to the list of [Waiting jobs]. From there, you must send the job to the list of [Scheduled jobs].
There you can select the job and touch [Print now].
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues].
2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs].
3. Touch the job which you want to print immediately.
4. Press [Print now].
The urgent job appears at the top of the list of [Scheduled jobs].
The active print job is paused as soon as the current set is ready and becomes second in the
list.
Print an Urgent Job Immediately
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 115
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Give Priority to a Print Job
Introduction
When you want to print a job as soon as possible, but not necessarily immediately, you must use
the [To top] function. The [To top] function moves the selected job to the second position in the
list of [Scheduled jobs], below the active print job . The job will be printed when the active print
job is ready.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues].
2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs].
3. Touch the job to which you want to give priority.
4. Press [To top].
Give Priority to a Print Job
116 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Print a Scheduled Job Later
Introduction
The machine prints the jobs that are present in the list of [Scheduled jobs] jobs.
However, you can decide to print a job later, for example because:
• The required media are out of stock, or
• You first want to make a proof.
Then you must move the job back to the list of [Waiting jobs].
NOTE
To select the active print job you must first press the Stop button 2x to stop the job.
NOTE
To select the active print job you must first press the Stop button two times to stop the job.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues].
2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs].
3. Touch the job or jobs you want to print later or use the [Select] button to make a selection.
To undo the multiple selection and only select one job, you must touch and hold that job for two
seconds.
4. Press [Move].
The job is moved to the list of [Waiting jobs].
Print a Scheduled Job Later
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 117
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Send a job to another printer
You can send jobs with their settings to another PRISMAsync printer from the following
locations:
• List of scheduled jobs
• List of waiting jobs
• A DocBox
• List of printed jobs
NOTE
When one or more settings or finishing options for the job are not available on the selected
remote printer, a warning icon is displayed in the job on the remote printer. The job on the
remote printer indicates that there are contradictions you must resolve.
NOTE
The list of remote printers must be available and configured in the Settings Editor.
Procedure
1. Touch [Jobs].
2. Go to the location of the jobs.
3. Select the jobs you want to send to another printer, or use an option from the [Select] menu to
select multiple jobs together.
4. Select [Copy to] from the button bar or from the drop-down menu.
5. Select a printer from the list or use [Other printer] to manually enter a printer name.
6. Touch [OK].
Send a job to another printer
118 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Bundle Jobs in the List of [Waiting jobs]
Introduction
The bundle function allows you to combine two or more jobs into one new job. For example, this
can be convenient when the participants of a meeting need several documents in a specific order.
Often, the required documents are sent from several workplaces to the printer in advance.
Normally, this means that you must print the documents first and sort or staple them later. By
using the bundle function you can determine the order of the documents before printing and
print all documents in the correct order in only 1 print job.
Important Information About the Bundle Function
• You can only bundle print jobs that are currently in the list of [Waiting jobs].
• You can change a number of settings for the bundled job via the [Properties] window.
• By default, the number of sets for a bundled job is one. So before printing, you must first
indicate the required number of sets.
• When you stop a job after a set, the printing stops after one copy of the complete bundle.
• The jobs in a bundle are accounted separately under the account ID of the original jobs.
• All the jobs in the bundle must have the same output location. Otherwise, the control panel
displays a warning message. To continue, you must first split the bundled job, then change the
individual job settings and finally bundle the jobs again.
Main Actions on the Bundle Function
The table below describes the main actions you can carry out with regard to the bundle function.
Main bundle functions
Main actions Description
[Bundle] When you touch [Bundle] after selecting two or more jobs, a new
job is created that contains the original jobs. The new job is added
to the bottom of the list of [Waiting jobs]. The original jobs are re-
moved from the list. The new job gets a new name that is based
on the name of the first job in the bundle.
[Split] When you touch [Split] after selecting a bundled job, the job is
split into the original, separate jobs. The bundled job is removed.
The separate jobs are added to the bottom of the list of [Waiting
jobs]. You can use the [Split] function to correct mismatched set-
tings, for example.
Change job settings The [Properties] window gives access to a pane where you can do
the following.
• Change a number of job settings.
• Change the order of the jobs in the bundle.
[Delete] Delete the job.
[Ticket] Print the job ticket of the job.
[Proof] Print one copy of the job first to check if the result meets your ex-
pectations.
Bundle Jobs in the List of [Waiting jobs]
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 119
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Illustration
[34] The [Create bundle] window
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Waiting jobs].
2. Touch the jobs you want to combine, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple
jobs at once.
3. Press [Bundle].
A [Create bundle] window appears that allows you to make some changes.
4. If necessary, use the [Up] and [Down] buttons to change the job order.
5. If necessary, change the generic job settings, such as [Number of bundles].
6. Press [OK].
Bundle Jobs in the List of [Waiting jobs]
120 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Add extra sheets to a job
Introduction
You can add extra sheets to print and copy jobs to get more information on your printed jobs.
Include banner and trailer pages to see the beginning and end of a job. Use separator sheets to
separate the sets in jobs.
Print job information is printed on banner and trailer pages, while separator sheets are not
printed on.
Banner and trailer page
With the Settings Editor you can enable the banner and trailer pages function. You can configure
whether banner and trailer pages are applicable to all jobs or to copy jobs or to print jobs.
[35] Banner and trailer page
Separator sheets
[36] Separator sheets
Below you find the procedure to add separator sheets.
You add the separator sheets in one of the following locations via the control panel (see below):
• List of waiting jobs
• List of scheduled jobs
• A DocBox
You can also add separator sheets via the automated workflow in the Settings Editor. Here you
can indicate after how many sets to want a separator sheet.
Procedure
1. Touch [Jobs].
2. Go to the location of the job.
3. Select the job to which you want to add separator sheets.
4. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job.
5. Indicate at the top right corner that you want separator sheets.
Add extra sheets to a job
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 121
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Use the DocBox (Option)
The DocBox Function
Introduction to the DocBox Function
Introduction
DocBox is short for Document Box. The DocBox function, which is available through the operator
panel, creates a buffer between the preparation of a job, for example page programming, and the
printing of the job. The DocBox supports the operator by offering comprehensive means to store,
group, edit and reprint documents.
A DocBox can contain the following jobs:
• Print jobs
• Scan jobs
NOTE
In the Settings Editor, the system administrator can create as many DocBoxes as required, for
example a DocBox for each individual customer or department.
Illustration
[37] The starting page for DocBox jobs
When to Use the DocBox
For example:
• To carry out advanced job preparation actions.
Use the DocBox (Option)
122 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
• To correct settings when the proof print is not correct, for example change the print quality or
layout of a document.
• To combine analogue documents with digital documents.
• To store jobs that must be reprinted regularly, for examples reports or books.
Introduction to the DocBox Function
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 123
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Create a New DocBox
Illustration
[38] Create a DocBox
Procedure
NOTE
Only the System Administrator is allowed to create a new DocBox in the Settings Editor.
1. Open your web browser and enter the host name or IP address of the PRISMAsync controller.
2. Log on to the Settings Editor as System Administrator.
3. Select [Workflow] -> [DocBox].
4. Click [Add].
5. Enter a new DocBox name. Identical DocBoxes are not allowed.
6. If you want to secure the new DocBox with a PIN, set [PIN enabled] to [Yes] and enter a PIN to
secure the DocBox.
Each time you access this DocBox through the operator panel, you must enter this PIN.
7. Confirm the PIN.
8. Click [OK].
Create a New DocBox
124 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Handle the Jobs in a DocBox
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
Introduction
When you select a job in a DocBox and touch [Properties], the current settings of the selected job
are displayed. Below, the available settings are described.
NOTE
Depending on the type of job you want to edit, either a print job or scan job, some settings
cannot be changed. When a setting cannot be changed, the setting is greyed out.
Preview the job settings for PDF print jobs
For PDF print jobs a realistic preview is displayed in the job properties. For other jobs a general
preview is displayed indicating most of the settings.
1. View the result of the job and imposition settings in the sheet view .
2. Touch the icon and browse the document.
3. View how the document will look after printing in the document view .
4. Use the zoom function to view specific details.
Handle the Jobs in a DocBox
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 125
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Available settings
1
2
3
4
5
Number Pane Description
1 [Original] The [Original] pane shows the general job settings
you can define for the originals
2 [Output] The [Output] pane shows the generic settings you
can define for the whole job
3 [Jobs] The [Jobs] pane shows the settings you can define
for the job
4 Preview The preview displays the settings you defined for
the output.
5 Action buttons The action buttons indicate the actions you can car-
ry out.
With the optional [Page programming] function,
you can insert pages and define the media and fin-
ishing settings for the page ranges in a job.
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
126 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[1- or 2-sided]
Setting Values Description
[1- or 2-sided]
[1-sided]
The output contains an image on one side.
[2-sided]
The output contains an image on both sides.
[Binding edge]
Setting Values Description
[Binding edge]
[Portrait left]
• The original has a vertical format (height >
width).
• The binding edge is at the left-hand side.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding
edge, the image or text on the back of the
sheet is in readable form.
[Portrait top]
• The original has a vertical format (height >
width).
• The binding edge is at the top.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding
edge, the image or text on the back of the
sheet is in readable form.
[Landscape left]
• The original has a horizontal format (width >
height).
• The binding edge of the original is at the
left-hand side.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding
edge, the image or text on the back of the
sheet is in readable form.
[Landscape top]
• The original has a horizontal format (width >
height).
• The binding edge of the original is at the
top.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding
edge, the image or text on the back side of
the sheet is in readable form.
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 127
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Media]
Setting Values Description
[Media]
Names of the media in
the media catalogue
Here you can select the media for the job. The
list displays all the media that are available in
the media catalog including the temporary me-
dia. The media catalog is a list of media that
you can define in the Settings Editor.
NOTE
You can only change to media with
the same size, for example, from A4
blue to A4 green.
[Cover]
Setting Values Description
[Cover]
[Front]
Touch the button to toggle between [On] and
[Off]. When [Front] is [On] then the [Media]
setting below [Front] becomes enabled.
[Media] When [Front] is [On], you can select a media
from the media catalog to use as front cover.
[Print sides] When [Front] is [On], you can indicate which
side of the front cover must be printed. You
can select.
• [Both sides]
• [Front side]
• [Back side]
• [None]
[Back]
Touch the button to toggle between [On] and
[Off]. When [Back] is [On] then the [Media] set-
ting below [Back] becomes enabled.
[Media] When [Back] is [On], you can select a media
from the media catalogue to use as back cover.
[Print sides] When [Back] is [On], you can indicate which
side of the back cover must be printed. You
can select:
• [Both sides]
• [Front side]
• [Back side]
• [None]
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
128 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Layout]
Setting Values Description
[Layout]
[Normal]
The machine prints the pages with no special lay-
out settings.
[Booklet]
The machine prints the pages in booklet order. The
pages one and four are printed on the front side of
a sheet. The pages two and three are printed on
the back side of a sheet.
[Same up]
The machine prints the same image multiple times
next to each other. By default, the system keeps
the size of the originals.
When you copy A4/LTR originals with the setting
[Same up] and [Images per sheet] is two, the ma-
chine will automatically print the job on A3 / 11" x
17", for example. When you cut the A3 / 11"x 17"
sheets in two, you get two identical A4 / LTR cop-
ies of your document. To reduce your A4/LTR orig-
inals to A5/STMT prints, you can use the zoom
function or select another media type.
[Multiple up]
The machine prints multiple consecutive images
on one side of a sheet, next to each other.
[Same-up flipped]
The machine prints the same image twice on one
side of a sheet, but one image is upside down
compared to the other.
[Images per sheet] Here, you can select the number of images you
want to print when you select [Same up] or [Multi-
ple up].
[Zoom]
Setting Values Description
[Zoom] [Fit to page] When [Fit to page] is [On], the image is resized so
it fits onto the page.
When [Fit to page] is [Off], the original size of the
image is maintained.
[Percent] Use the + and - buttons to reduce or enlarge the
size of the image (from 25% to 400%). The preview
pane immediately shows the results of your ac-
tion.
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 129
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Align]
Setting Values Description
[Align]
[Top left]
An image on a sheet may be smaller than the
media size of the output, for example because
you scaled the image to 70% of its original
size. The [Align] setting allows you to indicate
the position of the image on the sheet. [Top
left] moves the image to the upper left corner
of the sheet.
[Top center]
[Top center] moves the image to the center at
the top of the sheet.
[Top right]
[Top right] moves the image to the upper right
corner of the sheet.
[Center left]
[Center left] moves the image to center of the
left side of the sheet.
[Center]
[Center] moves the image to the center of the
sheet.
[Center right]
[Center right] moves the image to the center of
the right side of the sheet.
[Bottom left]
[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left
corner of the sheet.
[Bottom center]
[Bottom center] moves the image to the center
of the bottom side of the sheet.
[Bottom right]
[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower
right corner of the sheet.
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
130 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Shift]
Setting Values Description
[Shift] [Margin shift] Use this setting to increase or decrease the
margin. By default, the values of the front side
and the back side are interlocked. This means
that the values for the front side and the back
side remain identical.
Widening the margin can be useful if you want
to staple or punch the output, for example.
Narrowing the margin can be useful if you do
not need additional space for stapling or
punching the output, for example.
By default, the front side and the back side are
linked . Then the image on both sides will be
shifted the same amount. Touch to terminate
the link and shift each side individually.
[Image shift] Use this setting to shift the image horizontally
or vertically. By default, the values of the front
side and the back side are interlocked. This
means that the values for the front side and
the back side remain identical.
By default, the front side and the back side are
linked . Then the image on both sides will be
shifted the same amount. Touch to terminate
the link and shift each side individually.
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 131
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Print delivery]
Setting Values Description
[Print delivery] 1 [Output location] Select the output location for the job. Depend-
ing on the settings for your copy job, the ma-
chine automatically suggests the preferred
output location for your job. However, you can
manually overrule this suggestion.
• [Stacker/stapler upper tray]
Deliver the prints at the upper tray of the
stacker/stapler.
• [Stacker/stapler lower tray]
Deliver the prints at the lower tray of the
stacker/stapler.
• [Stacker/stapler booklet tray]
Deliver the prints at the booklet tray of the
stacker/stapler.
• [Folder main tray]
Deliver the folded prints to the tray at the
bottom of the folder.
[Sort]
[By page]
The output is sorted by page.
[By set]
The output is sorted by set.
[Offset stacking] This setting is only available when the [Offset
stacking] setting is set to [Sets (as in job)] in
the workflow profile.
[Each set]
Each set delivered to an output location will
have a small shift on top of the previous set.
This makes it easier to recognize individual
sets.
[Off]
All the sets or jobs that get to an output loca-
tion are stacked in a straight stack.
[Advanced settings] It may only be necessary to change the ad-
vanced settings when an offline finisher pro-
cesses sheets in a non-standard way. Please
refer to the finisher manuals for more informa-
tion. 4
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
132 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Print delivery] 2 [Sheet order]
[Face up]
Deliver the prints face up, first sheet on top.
[Face up reverse]
Deliver the prints face up, last sheet on top.
[Face down]
Deliver the prints face down, first sheet on top.
[Face down reverse]
Deliver the prints face down, last sheet on top.
[Sheet orientation]
[Header up LEF]
Deliver the prints with the header on top side
and in portrait position (vertical).
[Header up SEF]
Deliver the prints with the header on top side
and in landscape position (horizontal).
[Header down LEF]
Deliver the prints with the header at the bot-
tom side and in portrait position (vertical).
[Header down SEF]
Deliver the prints with the header at the bot-
tom side and in landscape position (horizon-
tal). 4
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 133
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Print delivery] 3 [Print order] • [Front/back]
Default value. The front page on the front,
the back page on the back.
• [Back/front]
Puts the front page on the back and the back
page on the front.
[Rotation] • [0 degrees]
• [180 degrees]
Rotates the prints 180 degrees.
[Margin erase]
Setting Values Description
[Margin erase]
[Binding edge] Margins of a document sometimes contain notes
or punch holes, for example. The machine allows
you to hide these elements on the copy. With the +
and - buttons of the [Binding edge] setting you can
define how much margin of the original you want
to erase. You can enter a value up to 100 mm /
3.94".
[Exposure]
Setting Values Description
[Exposure] [Dark] You can adjust the settings for light areas and dark
areas on the print separately.
• When an area on the output must be darker,
then select a value of -1 to -3.
• When the area must be lighter, then select a val-
ue of 1 to 3.
[Light] • When the area must be darker, then select a val-
ue of -1 to -3.
• When an area on the output must be lighter,
then select a value of 1 to 3.
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
134 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Print quality]
Setting Values Description
[Print quality] 1 [Brightness] (default
0)
When your prints are too dark or too light,
changing the brightness can correct this prob-
lem.
-1 to -3 creates darker prints.
+1 to +3 creates lighter prints.
[Contrast] (default 0) When the difference between light and dark
areas of a print is not big enough, you can
change the contrast to correct this problem.
Example: When a blue text is displayed ras-
tered, you can increase the contrast to make
the text more black and sharper.
[Advanced settings] The advanced settings are intended for special
print jobs, such as printing bar codes or print-
ing a color image on a B/W printer.
[Fattening] (default
[Off])
The fattening function can increase the reada-
bility of texts with small fonts (< 6 points, 6/72
inch).
However, when you print special data such as
bar codes, fattening can make bar codes diffi-
cult to read. Therefore, you can turn the fatten-
ing function off when you print such special
data.
[Minimum line width]
(default [On])
The minimum line width function is required
to keep thin lines visible. The lines in PS/PDF
jobs always keep a minimum width of 1/600
inch.
However, when you print special data such as
CAD drawings, smaller lines may be required.
Therefore, you can turn the minimum line
width function off. Then even thinner lines will
be printed. 4
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 135
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Print quality] 2 [RIP resolution] (de-
fault [600x2400] dpi)
The RIP resolution can improve the readability
of fine details. When you print very thin, slan-
ted lines, for example in Chinese characters,
1200x1200 gives the best result. 600x2400 is
best suited for mainly horizontal and vertical
objects.
[RIP raster] (default
[LINE_200LPI])
The default raster is [LINE_200LPI]. This is best
suited for over 95% of all prints. In special ca-
ses, for example moiré patterns from scanned
images, you can try to improve the print result
with the [DOT_200LPI] raster or even the
[DOT_125LPI] raster. However, then you may
loose some fine details.
The raster screen for PS/PDF jobs is
[LINE_200LPI]. All raster screens are compati-
ble with resolutions of 600x2400 dpi and
1200x1200 dpi.
[Color profile] (default
[Normal])
You can use color profiles when you print col-
or images on a B&W printer. The selected col-
or profile determines how a color image is re-
produced in black and white.
• [Enhanced] is a color profile developed by
Océ that converts CMYK or RGB data into
different gray values in a contrast-balanced
way. When you select [Enhanced], the im-
ages will become lighter, softer and less
contrast-rich.
• [Normal] is a color profile developed by
Adobe® that converts color data into gray
values. When you select [Normal], the im-
ages will become darker and more contrast-
rich.
NOTE
You can also use your own color
profiles. Make the required settings
in the Settings Editor.
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
136 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Binding]
Setting Values Description
[Binding] [None] Here you can define the required number of sta-
ples. Furthermore you can define where you want
the staples with the [Location] option.
The available locations for one staple:
• [Top left]
• [Top right]
• [Bottom left]
• [Bottom right]
The available locations for two staples:
• [Left edge]
• [Top edge]
• [Bottom edge]
• [Right edge]
Check the preview for the result of the selection.
[1 staple]
[2 staples]
[Saddle stitching]
[Folding]
This option is only available when you have a folding unit connected.
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 137
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Folding]
[None]
[Z-fold]
Required output location for Z-folded A4R, Let-
terR and Legal:
• Folder output tray, or
• Any output tray of the stacker/stapler.
NOTE
Z-folded A3, B4 and Tabloid 11" x 17"
sheets must be sent to the stacker/
stapler.
[Z-fold large sheets
only]
Required output location for Z-folded A3, B4
and Tabloid 11" x 17": Any output tray of the
stacker/stapler.
[Tri-fold in]
Required output location: Folder output tray
[Tri-fold out]
Required output location: Folder output tray
[Parallel fold]
Required output location: Folder output tray
[Print method] Use the [Print method] option to define on
which side to print:
• [Print inside]
• [Print outside]
Check the preview for the result of the selec-
tion.
[Trimming]
This option is only available when you have a trimming unit connected.
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
138 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Trimming] [None] No trimming of the document.
[Trim size]
You can indicate the amount of trimming at
the long edge and short edge (from 2.0 mm to
20.0 mm / 0.08" - 0.80")
[Finishing size]
You can indicate the size of the resulting docu-
ment after trimming. You can either touch
[Size] to select a default media size or manual-
ly define the width and length of the docu-
ment. When you define a non-standard media
size, the [Size] box displays [Custom].
[Punching]
This option is only available when you have a punching unit connected.
Setting Values Description
[Punching]
[None]
Here you can select the required number and
the location of the punch holes.
Location:
• [Left]
• [Top]
• [Right]
• [Bottom]
[2 holes]
[3 holes]
[4 holes]
[Die set dependent]
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 139
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Number of sets]
Setting Values Description
[Number of sets] [Check first set] When the [Check first set] setting is enabled,
the printer stops after the first set of a job has
been printed. You can check the quality of the
output.
NOTE
This setting is only available when in
the workflow profile [Check first set]
is set to [As in job].
[Number of sets] You can indicate how many copies of the job
you need. You can enter a value from 1 -
65,000. The default value is 1.
[Job name]
Setting Values Description
[Job name] To identify your job more easily, you can change
the name of the job. When you touch the [Job
name] button a keyboard appears. Then you can
change the name of the job.
[Page range]
Setting Values Description
[Page range] [All] When [All] is selected, all pages of the job will
be printed.
[Page range] When [Page range] is selected, use the [From]
and [To] fields to indicate the first and last pa-
ges you want printed.
[Separator sheets]
Setting Values Description
[Separator sheets] [On] When the [Separator sheets] setting is ena-
bled, a separate sheet is inserted automatically
before each set of a job to create a clear dis-
tinction between two sets. Separator sheets
are always empty. In the Settings Editor, select
a media from the media catalog use as separa-
tor sheets. You can also indicate the feed di-
rection of the separator sheets (long-edge feed
or short-edge feed).
[Off] No separator sheet will be inserted before
each set.
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
140 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Page numbering]
This setting is only available for PDF jobs.
Setting Values Description
[Page numbering] [On] Print a page number on each page of the job.
[Off] No page number on each page of the job.
[Position] [Top left]
[Top center]
[Top right]
[Bottom left]
[Bottom center]
[Bottom right]
The position of the page number on the page.
[Start with page num-
ber]
The number with which the page numbering
starts.
[Text before page
number]
[Text after page num-
ber]
The text that is printed before or after the page
number.
Overview of the Available Settings for DocBox Jobs
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 141
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Edit a Job in a DocBox
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox].
2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to edit.
3. Touch the job you want to edit.
4. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
5. If you want to carry out extended page programming, touch [Page programming].
6. Change the required settings.
7. Touch [OK].
Edit a Job in a DocBox
142 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Combine Jobs in a DocBox (Build Function)
Introduction
You can combine a job in a DocBox with other jobs from the same DocBox. The system creates a
new job from the selected jobs. The icon indicates a built job.
NOTE
You cannot combine PDF jobs with non-PDF jobs.
Illustration
[39] The [Create build] window
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox].
2. Touch the DocBox that contains the jobs you want to combine.
3. Touch the jobs you want to combine, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple
jobs at once.
4. Touch the [Build] button or select [Build] from the drop-down menu.
A [Create build] window appears that allows you to make some changes.
5. If necessary, use the [Up] and [Down] buttons to change the job order.
6. If necessary, change the generic job settings, such as [Number of sets].
7. Touch [OK].
Combine Jobs in a DocBox (Build Function)
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 143
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Split a Combined Job in the DocBox
Introduction
You can split a combined job in the DocBox into the original separate jobs. Then the system
restores the jobs with their original settings and status. You cannot split a combined job in the list
of Waiting jobs.
NOTE
You can only split a job when the job is not locked. Otherwise, you must unlock the job first.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox].
2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to split.
3. Touch the job you want to split.
4. Touch the [Split] button, or select [Split] from the drop-down menu.
The DocBox displays the original jobs.
Split a Combined Job in the DocBox
144 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Lock a Job in a DocBox
Introduction
The DocBox allows you to lock the settings of your jobs. Advantages:
• Settings cannot be changed accidentally.
• The job is always printed exactly the same.
Illustration
[40] Select [Lock].
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox].
2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to lock.
3. Touch one or more jobs that you want to lock, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select
multiple jobs at once.
4. From the drop-down menu, select [Lock].
indicates that the job is locked.
Lock a Job in a DocBox
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 145
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Unlock a Job in a DocBox
Introduction
Unlocking a job can be required if you want to split a locked, combined job into the original jobs,
for example.
Illustration
[41] Select [Unlock].
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox].
2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to unlock.
3. Touch the job that you want to unlock.
4. From the drop-down menu, select [Unlock].
Unlock a Job in a DocBox
146 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Move a Job from One DocBox to Another
Illustration
[42] Move a DocBox job
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox].
2. Touch the DocBox button that contains the job you want to move.
3. Touch the job you want to move.
4. Touch the [Move] button, or select [Move] from the drop-down menu.
5. Touch the destination.
6. Press [OK].
Move a Job from One DocBox to Another
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 147
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Print the Jobs in a DocBox
Print a Non-Urgent Job from the DocBox
Introduction
You can print jobs from the DocBox in two ways:
• Without urgency
The system sends the print job to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs].
• With urgency (immediately)
The system sends the print job to the top of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The job currently
active is put on hold.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox].
2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to print.
3. Touch the desired job.
4. Touch [Print] to print the non-urgent job.
Print the Jobs in a DocBox
148 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Print an Urgent Job from the DocBox Immediately
Introduction
You can print jobs from the DocBox in two ways:
• Without urgency
The system sends the print job to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs].
• With urgency (immediately)
The system sends the print job to the top of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The job currently
active is put on hold.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox].
2. Touch the DocBox that contains the job you want to print.
3. Touch the desired job.
4. Touch [Print now] to print the urgent job immediately.
Print an Urgent Job from the DocBox Immediately
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 149
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Select and Print Multiple Jobs from the DocBox
Introduction
When you want to print one job in a DocBox you can select and print that job. However, you can
also select multiple jobs at a time. The table below shows the available options.
Select multiple jobs
Jobs Description
[All] Select all the jobs from the active DocBox.
[Jobs with available media] These are the jobs for which the required media are cur-
rently available in the paper trays.
[Jobs with label] These are the jobs that have a label. A label is a name
that helps you to identify certain jobs on the operator
panel, for example the name of a customer. The label
can be defined in the printer driver, in a job ticket or via
an automated workflow. For example, the label ‘Custom-
er XYZ’ can be added to jobs. Then you can select and
print all the jobs for 'Customer XYZ' at once.
[Printed jobs] These are the jobs that have already been printed be-
fore.
[New jobs] These are the jobs that have not been printed yet.
Manually Touch the required jobs one by one
Illustration
[43] Select multiple jobs
Select and Print Multiple Jobs from the DocBox
150 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox].
2. Touch the DocBox that contains the jobs you want to print.
3. Touch the [Select] button.
4. From the drop-down menu, select the required option.
5. Press [Print].
Select and Print Multiple Jobs from the DocBox
Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs 151
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Select and Print Multiple Jobs from the DocBox
152 Chapter 8 - Plan the jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 9
Carry Out Print Jobs
Change the Print Job Settings on the Control Panel
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the
Control Panel
Introduction
Usually, the settings for a print job is defined in PDLs, applications, printer drivers, automated
workflows, or hotfolder default tickets. However, when a job has arrived on the PRISMAsync
controller, you can change a number of job settings for all jobs that are currently not being
printed. This section gives an overview of the print job settings that you can change on the
control panel.
With the [Properties] button you view and partly change the job settings of the jobs in the
following queues.
• [Waiting jobs]
• [Scheduled jobs]
You cannot change the settings of an active job.
• [Printed jobs] (view settings only)
You can partly define the following settings for the jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs] and the list of
[Scheduled jobs].
• The characteristics of the output
• Generic settings that apply to the whole job.
Preview the job settings for PDF print jobs
For PDF print jobs a realistic preview is displayed in the job properties. For other jobs a general
preview is displayed indicating most of the settings.
1. View the result of the job and imposition settings in the sheet view .
2. Touch the icon and browse the document.
3. View how the document will look after printing in the document view .
Change the Print Job Settings on the Control Panel
154 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
4. Use the zoom function to view specific details.
Change the job settings
1
2
3
4
5
Number Pane Description
1 [Original] The [Original] pane shows general job information
2 [Output] The [Output] pane shows the output settings you
can define for the whole job
3 [Jobs] The [Jobs] pane shows the general settings you can
define for the job
4 Preview The preview displays the settings you defined for
the output.
5 Action buttons The action buttons indicate the actions you can car-
ry out.
With the optional [Page programming] function,
you can insert pages and define the media and fin-
ishing settings for the page ranges in a job.
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 155
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[1- or 2-sided]
Setting Values Description
[1- or 2-sided]
[1-sided]
The output contains an image on one side.
[2-sided]
The output contains an image on both sides.
[Binding edge]
Setting Values Description
[Binding edge]
[Portrait left]
• The original has a vertical format (height >
width).
• The binding edge is at the left-hand side.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding
edge, the image or text on the back of the
sheet is in readable form.
[Portrait top]
• The original has a vertical format (height >
width).
• The binding edge is at the top.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding
edge, the image or text on the back of the
sheet is in readable form.
[Landscape left]
• The original has a horizontal format (width >
height).
• The binding edge of the original is at the
left-hand side.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding
edge, the image or text on the back of the
sheet is in readable form.
[Landscape top]
• The original has a horizontal format (width >
height).
• The binding edge of the original is at the
top.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding
edge, the image or text on the back side of
the sheet is in readable form.
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
156 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Media]
Setting Values Description
[Media]
Names of the media in
the media catalogue
Here you can select the media for the job. The
list displays all the media that are available in
the media catalog including the temporary me-
dia. The media catalog is a list of media that
you can define in the Settings Editor.
NOTE
You can only change to media with
the same size, for example, from A4
blue to A4 green.
[Cover]
Setting Values Description
[Cover]
[Front]
Touch the button to toggle between [On] and
[Off]. When [Front] is [On] then the [Media]
setting below [Front] becomes enabled.
[Media] When [Front] is [On], you can select a media
from the media catalog to use as front cover.
[Print sides] When [Front] is [On], you can indicate which
side of the front cover must be printed. You
can select.
• [Both sides]
• [Front side]
• [Back side]
• [None]
[Back]
Touch the button to toggle between [On] and
[Off]. When [Back] is [On] then the [Media] set-
ting below [Back] becomes enabled.
[Media] When [Back] is [On], you can select a media
from the media catalogue to use as back cover.
[Print sides] When [Back] is [On], you can indicate which
side of the back cover must be printed. You
can select:
• [Both sides]
• [Front side]
• [Back side]
• [None]
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 157
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Layout]
Name of the setting Available options Description
[Layout]
[Normal]
The printer prints the pages with no special
layout settings.
[Booklet]
The printer prints the pages in booklet order.
The pages 1 and 4 are printed on the front side
of a sheet. The pages 2 and 3 are printed on
the back side of a sheet.
[Same up]
The printer prints the same image 2, 4, 6, 9 or
16 times on 1 side of a sheet. By default, the
system keeps the size of the originals. If neces-
sary, use the Zoom function to reduce or en-
large the size of the images.
[Multiple up]
The machine prints 2, 4, 6, 9 or 16 consecutive
images on 1 side of a sheet. By default, the
system keeps the size of the originals. If neces-
sary, use the Zoom function to reduce or en-
large the size of the images.
[Same-up flipped] The printer prints the same image on 1 side of
a sheet. The images are rotated compared to
each other. By default, the system keeps the
size of the originals. If necessary, use the
Zoom function to reduce or enlarge the size of
the images.
[Zoom]
Name of the setting Available options Description
[Zoom] [Fit to page] When [Fit to page] is [On], the image is resized
so it fits onto the page.
When [Fit to page] is [Off], the original size of
the image is maintained.
[Percent] Use the + and - buttons to reduce or enlarge
the size of the image (from 25% to 400%). The
preview pane immediately shows the results
of your action.
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
158 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Align]
Setting Values Description
[Align]
[Top left]
An image on a sheet may be smaller than the
media size of the output, for example because
you scaled the image to 70% of its original
size. The [Align] setting allows you to indicate
the position of the image on the sheet. [Top
left] moves the image to the upper left corner
of the sheet.
[Top center]
[Top center] moves the image to the center at
the top of the sheet.
[Top right]
[Top right] moves the image to the upper right
corner of the sheet.
[Center left]
[Center left] moves the image to center of the
left side of the sheet.
[Center]
[Center] moves the image to the center of the
sheet.
[Center right]
[Center right] moves the image to the center of
the right side of the sheet.
[Bottom left]
[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left
corner of the sheet.
[Bottom center]
[Bottom center] moves the image to the center
of the bottom side of the sheet.
[Bottom right]
[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower
right corner of the sheet.
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 159
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Shift]
Setting Values Description
[Shift] [Margin shift] Use this setting to increase or decrease the
margin. By default, the values of the front side
and the back side are interlocked. This means
that the values for the front side and the back
side remain identical.
Widening the margin can be useful if you want
to staple or punch the output, for example.
Narrowing the margin can be useful if you do
not need additional space for stapling or
punching the output, for example.
By default, the front side and the back side are
linked . Then the image on both sides will be
shifted the same amount. Touch to terminate
the link and shift each side individually.
[Image shift] Use this setting to shift the image horizontally
or vertically. By default, the values of the front
side and the back side are interlocked. This
means that the values for the front side and
the back side remain identical.
By default, the front side and the back side are
linked . Then the image on both sides will be
shifted the same amount. Touch to terminate
the link and shift each side individually.
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
160 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Print delivery]
Setting Values Description
[Print delivery] 1 [Output location] Select the output location for the job. Depend-
ing on the settings for your copy job, the ma-
chine automatically suggests the preferred
output location for your job. However, you can
manually overrule this suggestion.
• [Stacker/stapler upper tray]
Deliver the prints at the upper tray of the
stacker/stapler.
• [Stacker/stapler lower tray]
Deliver the prints at the lower tray of the
stacker/stapler.
• [Stacker/stapler booklet tray]
Deliver the prints at the booklet tray of the
stacker/stapler.
• [Folder main tray]
Deliver the folded prints to the tray at the
bottom of the folder.
[Sort]
[By page]
The output is sorted by page.
[By set]
The output is sorted by set.
[Offset stacking] This setting is only available when the [Offset
stacking] setting is set to [Sets (as in job)] in
the workflow profile.
[Each set]
Each set delivered to an output location will
have a small shift on top of the previous set.
This makes it easier to recognize individual
sets.
[Off]
All the sets or jobs that get to an output loca-
tion are stacked in a straight stack.
[Advanced settings] It may only be necessary to change the ad-
vanced settings when an offline finisher pro-
cesses sheets in a non-standard way. Please
refer to the finisher manuals for more informa-
tion. 4
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 161
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Print delivery] 2 [Sheet order]
[Face up]
Deliver the prints face up, first sheet on top.
[Face up reverse]
Deliver the prints face up, last sheet on top.
[Face down]
Deliver the prints face down, first sheet on top.
[Face down reverse]
Deliver the prints face down, last sheet on top.
[Sheet orientation]
[Header up LEF]
Deliver the prints with the header on top side
and in portrait position (vertical).
[Header up SEF]
Deliver the prints with the header on top side
and in landscape position (horizontal).
[Header down LEF]
Deliver the prints with the header at the bot-
tom side and in portrait position (vertical).
[Header down SEF]
Deliver the prints with the header at the bot-
tom side and in landscape position (horizon-
tal). 4
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
162 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Print delivery] 3 [Print order] • [Front/back]
Default value. The front page on the front,
the back page on the back.
• [Back/front]
Puts the front page on the back and the back
page on the front.
[Rotation] • [0 degrees]
• [180 degrees]
Rotates the prints 180 degrees.
[Print quality]
Setting Values Description
[Print quality] 1 [Brightness] (default
0)
When your prints are too dark or too light,
changing the brightness can correct this prob-
lem.
-1 to -3 creates darker prints.
+1 to +3 creates lighter prints.
[Contrast] (default 0) When the difference between light and dark
areas of a print is not big enough, you can
change the contrast to correct this problem.
Example: When a blue text is displayed ras-
tered, you can increase the contrast to make
the text more black and sharper.
[Advanced settings] The advanced settings are intended for special
print jobs, such as printing bar codes or print-
ing a color image on a B/W printer.
[Fattening] (default
[Off])
The fattening function can increase the reada-
bility of texts with small fonts (< 6 points, 6/72
inch).
However, when you print special data such as
bar codes, fattening can make bar codes diffi-
cult to read. Therefore, you can turn the fatten-
ing function off when you print such special
data.
[Minimum line width]
(default [On])
The minimum line width function is required
to keep thin lines visible. The lines in PS/PDF
jobs always keep a minimum width of 1/600
inch.
However, when you print special data such as
CAD drawings, smaller lines may be required.
Therefore, you can turn the minimum line
width function off. Then even thinner lines will
be printed. 4
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 163
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Print quality] 2 [RIP resolution] (de-
fault [600x2400] dpi)
The RIP resolution can improve the readability
of fine details. When you print very thin, slan-
ted lines, for example in Chinese characters,
1200x1200 gives the best result. 600x2400 is
best suited for mainly horizontal and vertical
objects.
[RIP raster] (default
[LINE_200LPI])
The default raster is [LINE_200LPI]. This is best
suited for most of the prints. In special cases,
for example moiré patterns from scanned im-
ages, you can try to improve the print result
with the [DOT_200LPI] raster or even the
[DOT_125LPI] raster. However, then you may
loose some fine details.
The raster screen for PS/PDF jobs is
[LINE_200LPI]. All raster screens are compati-
ble with resolutions of 600x2400 dpi and
1200x1200 dpi.
[Color profile] (default
[Normal])
You can use color profiles when you print col-
or images on a B&W printer. The selected col-
or profile determines how a color image is re-
produced in black and white.
• [Enhanced] is a color profile developed by
Océ that converts CMYK or RGB data into
different gray values in a contrast-balanced
way. When you select [Enhanced], the im-
ages will become lighter, softer and less
contrast-rich.
• [Normal] is a color profile developed by
Adobe® that converts color data into gray
values. When you select [Normal], the im-
ages will become darker and more contrast-
rich.
NOTE
You can also use your own color
profiles. Make the required settings
in the Settings Editor.
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
164 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Binding]
Setting Values Description
[Binding] [None] Here you can define the required number of sta-
ples. Furthermore you can define where you want
the staples with the [Location] option.
The available locations for one staple:
• [Top left]
• [Top right]
• [Bottom left]
• [Bottom right]
The available locations for two staples:
• [Left edge]
• [Top edge]
• [Bottom edge]
• [Right edge]
Check the preview for the result of the selection.
[1 staple]
[2 staples]
[Saddle stitching]
[Folding]
This option is only available when you have a folding unit connected.
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 165
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Folding]
[None]
[Z-fold]
Required output location for Z-folded A4R, Let-
terR and Legal:
• Folder output tray, or
• Any output tray of the stacker/stapler.
NOTE
Z-folded A3, B4 and Tabloid 11" x 17"
sheets must be sent to the stacker/
stapler.
[Z-fold large sheets
only]
Required output location for Z-folded A3, B4
and Tabloid 11" x 17": Any output tray of the
stacker/stapler.
[Tri-fold in]
Required output location: Folder output tray
[Tri-fold out]
Required output location: Folder output tray
[Parallel fold]
Required output location: Folder output tray
[Print method] Use the [Print method] option to define on
which side to print:
• [Print inside]
• [Print outside]
Check the preview for the result of the selec-
tion.
[Trimming]
This option is only available when you have a trimming unit connected.
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
166 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Trimming] [None] No trimming of the document.
[Trim size]
You can indicate the amount of trimming at
the long edge and short edge (from 2.0 mm to
20.0 mm / 0.08" - 0.80")
[Finishing size]
You can indicate the size of the resulting docu-
ment after trimming. You can either touch
[Size] to select a default media size or manual-
ly define the width and length of the docu-
ment. When you define a non-standard media
size, the [Size] box displays [Custom].
[Punching]
This option is only available when you have a punching unit connected.
Setting Values Description
[Punching]
[None]
Here you can select the required number and
the location of the punch holes.
Location:
• [Left]
• [Top]
• [Right]
• [Bottom]
[2 holes]
[3 holes]
[4 holes]
[Die set dependent]
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 167
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Number of sets]
Setting Values Description
[Number of sets] [Check first set] When the [Check first set] setting is enabled,
the printer stops after the first set of a job has
been printed. You can check the quality of the
output.
NOTE
This setting is only available when in
the workflow profile [Check first set]
is set to [As in job].
[Number of sets] You can indicate how many copies of the job
you need. You can enter a value from 1 -
65,000. The default value is 1.
Job Name
Setting Values Description
[Job name] To identify your job more easily, you can change
the name of the job. When you touch the [Job
name] button a keyboard appears. Then you can
change the name of the job.
[Page range]
Setting Values Description
[Page range] [All] When [All] is selected, all pages of the job will
be printed.
[Page range] When [Page range] is selected, use the [From]
and [To] fields to indicate the first and last pa-
ges you want printed.
[Separator sheets]
Setting Values Description
[Separator sheets] [On] When the [Separator sheets] setting is ena-
bled, a separate sheet is inserted automatically
before each set of a job to create a clear dis-
tinction between two sets. Separator sheets
are always empty. In the Settings Editor, select
a media from the media catalog use as separa-
tor sheets. You can also indicate the feed di-
rection of the separator sheets (long-edge feed
or short-edge feed).
[Off] No separator sheet will be inserted before
each set.
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
168 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Page numbering]
This setting is only available for PDF jobs.
Setting Values Description
[Page numbering] [On] Print a page number on each page of the job.
[Off] No page number on each page of the job.
[Position] [Top left]
[Top center]
[Top right]
[Bottom left]
[Bottom center]
[Bottom right]
The position of the page number on the page.
[Start with page num-
ber]
The number with which the page numbering
starts.
[Text before page
number]
[Text after page num-
ber]
The text that is printed before or after the page
number.
Description of the Print Job Settings that You Can Change on the Control Panel
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 169
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change the [Output] Settings
Change Two-Sided into One-Sided and Vice Versa
Introduction
Jobs for which [1-sided] or [2-sided] printing was defined, will be printed on either one side or
both sides of a sheet. If required, you can change this setting.
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [1- or 2-sided] button.
5. Touch the desired value.
6. Press [OK].
Change the [Output] Settings
170 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change the Binding Edge
Introduction
The binding edge determines whether the binding position is along the long edge or the short
edge of the media. The binding edge is usually set via the printer driver, for example. However,
you can view and change the binding edge via the operator panel. The binding edge has a
relation with the direction of the margin shift, orientation and staple position.
When the binding edge is changed for two-sided printing, the image orientation is automatically
adjusted to get the correct layout. The orientation of the image on the back side of the page will
be changed too.
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [Binding edge] button.
5. Touch the desired value.
6. Press [OK].
Change the Binding Edge
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 171
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Select Another Media for a Job
Introduction
If you want to print a job on other media than originally defined for that job, you can select a
different media via the operator panel. Requirements regarding the new media:
• The media must be available in the media catalog.
• The media must have the same size as the original media.
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. In the preview pane at the right-hand side, touch the media you want to change.
When more than one media was defined for a job, the preview pane displays a separate button
for each media.
5. From the list, select the new media.
6. Press [OK].
Select Another Media for a Job
172 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change the Settings for Covers
Introduction
When front covers or back covers are required, the settings are usually set in the printer driver,
for example. However, you can view and change the settings for the covers via the control panel.
You can change the following settings for both the front cover and the back cover separately.
• Enable or disable the use of a cover.
• Select the desired media from the media catalog.
• Indicate whether the cover must be left empty, printed one-sided, or printed two-sided.
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [Cover] button.
5. Make the required changes.
6. Press [OK].
Change the Settings for Covers
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 173
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Shift the Image Roughly to Create Binding Space
Introduction
If you want to create space for staples or punch holes, for example, you can use the [Align]
function. The preview in the right-hand pane of the control panel displays the consequences of
your changes.
The [Align] function allows a rough image shift. You can select one of the following settings:
[Align] values
When you select: Then the image is moved to:
[Top left] The upper left corner of the sheet.
[Top center] The upper center of the sheet.
[Top right] The upper right corner of the sheet.
[Center left] The left-hand side of the sheet, over the center line.
[Center] The middle of the sheet.
[Center right] The right-hand side of the sheet, over the center line.
[Bottom left] The lower left corner of the sheet.
[Bottom center] The lower center of the sheet.
[Bottom right] The lower right corner of the sheet.
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [Align] button.
5. Make the required changes.
6. Press [OK].
Shift the Image Roughly to Create Binding Space
174 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Shift the Image Precisely to Create Binding Space or Correct the Layout
Introduction
If you want to create space for staples or punch holes, for example, you can use the [Align]
function. However, when the [Align] function is not precise enough, you can use the [Margin
shift] and [Image shift] functions. These functions allow you to shift the image more precisely.
The preview in the right-hand pane of the control panel displays the consequences of your
changes. If you shift the margin too much, you may loose part of the image.
The [Shift] function has two options.
• [Margin shift] allows you to increase or decrease the margin horizontally to create more
binding space, for example. With [Margin shift], you can shift an image relative to the binding
edge.
• [Image shift] allows you to move the image horizontally and vertically. This gives you more
freedom in moving the image exactly to the desired position.
By default, the values of the front side and the back side are linked. To define different values for
each side, touch . The changes you make are valid for the whole document, not only for the
current page.
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [Shift] button.
5. Make the required changes.
NOTE
You can touch the - and + buttons to change the values. You can also enter the
required value directly. Touch the number to enter a value manually. The numeric
keyboard appears. There you can enter the required value.
6. Press [OK].
Shift the Image Precisely to Create Binding Space or Correct the Layout
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 175
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change the Print Delivery Settings
Introduction
Usually the print delivery settings have been defined in the printer driver. This section describes
how to change some settings on the control panel.
Overview of the Print Delivery Settings
Setting Description
[Output location] Change the output location for the job. The list shows all the out-
put locations that are available for your system.
Make sure there is a match between the selected output location
and the job requirements. For example, when a job requires sta-
ples, you must select an output location that allows stapling.
[Sort] Change the sorting method of the prints. You can select sort [By
page] or [By set].
[44] Sort by page
[45] Sort by set
[Offset stacking] Stack the prints with an offset.
This setting is only available when the [Offset stacking] setting of
the active [Workflow profile] is set to [Sets (as in job)].
[Advanced settings] Finishing equipment often requires that the printed sheets are de-
livered in a certain order. For finishers that are integrated in your
printing system, the required settings are adapted automatically.
However, sometimes it can be necessary to change a number of
settings manually, for example when you want to finish the prints
using offline finishers. If required, you can change the [Sheet or-
der], [Sheet orientation], [Print order] and [Rotation].
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [Print delivery] button.
5. Make the required changes.
6. Press [OK].
Change the Print Delivery Settings
176 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change the Stacking Method per Job
Introduction
The [Offset stacking] function creates a visible distinction between sets or jobs in an output
location. The active workflow profile or the active automated workflow determines the default
type of offset stacking.
You can only change the type of [Offset stacking] per job when the [Offset stacking] setting of the
active [Workflow profile] is set to [Sets (as in job)].
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
NOTE
Remember that you can only change the stacking method per job when the active
[Workflow profile] is set to [Sets (as in job)].
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [Print delivery] button.
5. Touch the [Offset stacking] button to toggle between [On] and [Off].
6. Press [OK].
Change the Stacking Method per Job
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 177
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change the Print Quality Settings
Introduction
The print quality settings help you to optimize the quality of your prints. You can use the
following applications to change the print quality settings.
• Printer drivers.
• Job submission applications such as PRISMAprepare.
• The control panel of your printer.
• The Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller.
In the printer driver, in PRISMAprepare and on the control panel, you can change the settings per
job. In the Settings Editor, you can change the settings for all upcoming jobs.
The tables below describe both the basic and advanced print quality settings you can change
through the control panel.
Basic Settings
Basic print quality settings
Basic settings Description
[Brightness] (default 0) When your prints are too dark or too light, changing the bright-
ness can correct this problem.
-1 to -3 creates darker prints.
+1 to +3 creates lighter prints.
[Contrast] (default 0) When the difference between light and dark areas of a print is not
big enough, you can change the contrast to correct this problem.
Example: When a blue text is displayed rastered, you can increase
the contrast to make the text more black and sharper.
NOTE
Each of the 35 combinations of contrast and brightness settings corresponds to a specific
transfer curve (i.e. transfer.ps file). In the Settings Editor, you can change the default settings for
contrast and brightness adjustments for jobs that do not ask for any brightness or contrast
adjustment.
Advanced Settings
Advanced print quality settings
Advanced settings Description
[Fattening] (default [Off]) The fattening function can increase the readability of texts with
small fonts (< 6 points, 6/72 inch).
However, when you print special data such as bar codes, fattening
can make bar codes difficult to read. Therefore, you can turn the
fattening function off when you print such special data.
[Minimum line width] (de-
fault [On])
The minimum line width function is required to keep thin lines
visible. The lines in PS/PDF jobs always keep a minimum width of
1/600 inch.
However, when you print special data such as CAD drawings,
smaller lines may be required. Therefore, you can turn the mini-
mum line width function off. Then even thinner lines will be prin-
ted. 4
Change the Print Quality Settings
178 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Advanced settings Description
[RIP resolution] (default
[600x2400] dpi)
The RIP resolution can improve the readability of fine details.
When you print very thin, slanted lines, for example in Chinese
characters, 1200x1200 gives the best result. 600x2400 is best suit-
ed for mainly horizontal and vertical objects.
[RIP raster] (default
[LINE_200LPI])
The default raster is [LINE_200LPI]. This is best suited for over
most of the prints. In special cases, for example moiré patterns
from scanned images, you can try to improve the print result with
the [DOT_200LPI] raster or even the [DOT_125LPI] raster. However,
then you may loose some fine details.
The raster screen for PS/PDF jobs is [LINE_200LPI]. All raster
screens are compatible with resolutions of 600x2400 dpi and
1200x1200 dpi.
[Color profile] (default
[Normal])
You can use color profiles when you print color images on a B&W
printer. The selected color profile determines how a color image is
reproduced in black and white.
• [Enhanced] is a color profile developed by Océ that converts
CMYK or RGB data into different gray values in a contrast-bal-
anced way. When you select [Enhanced], the images will be-
come lighter, softer and less contrast-rich.
•[Normal] is a color profile developed by Adobe® that converts
color data into gray values. When you select [Normal], the im-
ages will become darker and more contrast-rich.
NOTE
You can also use your own color profiles. Make the re-
quired settings in the Settings Editor.
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch [Print quality].
5. Make the required changes.
6. Touch [OK].
Change the Print Quality Settings
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 179
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change the Finishing Method
Introduction
The required finishing method is usually set in the printer driver. However, you can change the
finishing method on the control panel.
Depending on the configuration of your system you can change the following finishing methods,
for example.
• Number of staples.
• Number of punch holes.
• The location of the staples or punch holes.
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or go to a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [Binding] button.
5. Make the required changes.
6. Press [OK].
Change the Finishing Method
180 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Define the Finishing for Print Jobs
Introduction
The required finishing method is usually set in the printer driver. However, you can change the
finishing method on the control panel.
Depending on the configuration of your system you can change the following finishing methods,
for example.
• Number of staples.
• Number of punch holes.
• The location of the staples or punch holes.
• Folding method.
• Trimming method.
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [Binding], [Folding] or [Trimming] button.
5. Make the required settings.
6. Press [OK].
Define the Finishing for Print Jobs
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 181
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change the [Job] Settings
Change the Number of Sets
Introduction
Follow the procedure below to change the number of sets for a job that is present in the list of
[Waiting jobs] or [Scheduled jobs], or in a DocBox.
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [Number of sets] button.
5. Enter the desired number of sets (between 1 and 65,000).
If necessary, touch the arrow button <- to correct the previous entry, or touch [Cancel] to close
the numerical keyboard without saving the changes.
6. Press [OK].
Change the [Job] Settings
182 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Check the First Set
Introduction
When you have a large print job and you want to check whether the job is printed correctly, it is
advised to check the first set before printing all other sets. When a job is sent to the printer, the
submitter can indicate in the job submission application that the first set must be checked.
However, the workflow profile that is selected on the control panel determines how the printer
handles these requests.
Depending on the selected workflow profile, the [Check first set] setting can have the following
values:
• [On]
• [Off]
• [As in job]
When you use the [Check first set] function, the printed set is subtracted from the indicated total
number of sets for a job. For example, when you need 10 sets, the printer will print the first set
and then stop. When you continue the job, the nine remaining sets are printed. This is different
from printing a proof.
Methods to check the first set
You can use one of the following methods to indicate that you want to check the first set.
• Use a workflow profile where [Check first set] is enabled. Then the printer stops after the first
set.
• Enable the function [Check first set] in the [Properties] window for a specific job only. However,
you can only change the [Check first set] setting there when a workflow profile is selected
where the [Check first set] setting is [As in job].
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [Number of sets] button.
5. Touch [Check first set] when the button states [Off].
The text changes from [Off] to [On]. A check mark indicates that the checking of the first set is
enabled.
6. Press [OK].
The [Number of sets] button has a check mark.
7. Press [OK].
Check the First Set
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 183
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change the Page Range You Want to Print
Introduction
Usually, in the printer driver is defined whether all pages or only a range of pages must be
printed. However, you can also change this setting through the control panel.
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [Page range] button.
5. Touch [Method] -> [Pages].
6. Touch the [From] button.
Enter the number of the first page you want to print.
7. Touch the [To] button.
Enter the number of the last page you want to print.
8. Press [OK].
Change the Page Range You Want to Print
184 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change the Use of Separator Sheets
Introduction
Separator sheets are empty sheets that are automatically inserted before each new set or job to
separate two sets or jobs. In the Settings Editor you can define the media that must be used as
separator sheets. You can also specify after how many sets you want to include a separator sheet
in the stack. The use of separator sheets can be enabled via the automated workflows in the
Settings Editor. However, you can change this setting through the control panel.
NOTE
You cannot change this setting for the active print job .
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. Touch the [Separator sheets] button to toggle between [On] and [Off].
5. Touch [OK].
Change the Use of Separator Sheets
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 185
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change the Print Job Settings on Page Level
Introduction
You can change settings of a job on page level via the [Page programming] in the job properties.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs], or select a
DocBox.
2. Touch the job you want to change.
3. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window.
4. If you want to carry out extended page programming, touch [Page programming].
5. Change the required settings.
6. Press [OK].
Change the Print Job Settings on Page Level
186 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Print Your Jobs Using the Control Panel
Reprint a Job
Introduction
NOTE
The following description is only applicable when the setting [Printed jobs] in the Settings Editor
is enabled.
Print jobs that have been completed are moved from the list of [Scheduled jobs] list to the list of
[Printed jobs]. The [Printed jobs] list helps you to reprint jobs quicker and easier.
The List of Printed Jobs
• When you want to reprint a job, the selected job is always copied to the list of [Waiting jobs]
first.
• You cannot change the job settings in the list of [Printed jobs]. This is only possible in the list
of [Waiting jobs].
• You cannot reprint streaming jobs.
• The list of [Printed jobs] does not store proof prints, system jobs and jobs that were stopped or
deleted.
• When you shut down the printer all jobs remain present in the list of [Printed jobs].
• The list of [Printed jobs] can only store jobs. To prevent the disk of your system from becoming
full, jobs must be deleted manually or automatically on a regular basis. In the Settings Editor,
you can indicate the cleaning period, then the clean-up is carried out at midnight or at the next
start-up (in general the next morning).
• If E-shredding is enabled, the jobs will be shredded after removal from the list of [Printed jobs].
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Printed jobs].
2. Touch the job(s) you want to reprint or use the [Select] button to make a selection.
To undo the multiple selection and only select one job, you must touch and hold that job for two
seconds.
3. Press [Copy].
4. Touch [Queues] -> [Waiting jobs].
5. Touch the job you want to reprint.
6. Touch [Properties] if you want to change the settings, for example the number of sets.
7. Press [Print].
Print Your Jobs Using the Control Panel
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 187
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Select more than One Job for Printing
Introduction
The table below describes the possibilities to select more than one job for printing.
Select more jobs
Options Description
Select two or more jobs
manually
Touch the jobs you want to print one by one.
[Select] button - [All] All jobs in the list of [Waiting jobs] are printed. The order in the list
of [Waiting jobs] determines the print order. However, in the list of
[Scheduled jobs] you can give priority to a job.
[Select] button - [Jobs with
available media]
All jobs for which the required media are currently available in the
paper trays, will be printed. This improves the productivity, be-
cause you must not change the required media during printing.
You may only need to add more of the currently available media
types.
[Select] button - [Jobs with
label]
A label is a name or tag that helps you to identify certain jobs on
the control panel. When a job is sent to the printer, the person
who submits the job can add a label to that job. The label can be
any name that helps to identify certain jobs. The label can be de-
fined in the printer driver, in a job ticket or via an automated work-
flow. When the label in the printer driver is identical to a defined
automated workflow, then the print job will be printed with the
settings of this automated workflow. For example, the label ‘Cus-
tomer XYZ’ can be added to jobs. Then you can select and print all
the jobs for 'Customer XYZ' at once.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues].
2. If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Waiting jobs], or go to a DocBox.
3. Touch the jobs you want to print one by one, or make a selection using the [Select] button.
The selected jobs are highlighted.
4. Press [Print].
Select more than One Job for Printing
188 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Print a Job Ticket
Introduction
Job tickets are used to transfer settings from an application to the printer. It can be convenient to
print a job ticket before printing a job, to get an overview of the main job characteristics.
Job tickets can contain the following information, for example.
• Job name.
• Job owner.
• Job destination.
• Job settings such as the number of sets.
• Required media.
Where to Find the [Ticket] Button
The [Ticket] button is available at the following sections of the control panel.
• [Scheduled jobs].
• [Waiting jobs].
• [Printed jobs] (if enabled in the Settings Editor).
• [DocBox] (in the drop-down list ).
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs].
2. Select one of the locations mentioned above.
3. Touch one or more jobs of which you want to print the job ticket.
4. Press [Ticket].
The job is sent to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The job may not be immediately
visible in the list of [Scheduled jobs]. You can recognize the job by the prefix @_ in front of the
job name.
Print a Job Ticket
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 189
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Make a Proof
Introduction
You can make a proof to check whether the quality and the layout of the output meet your
expectations. When you use the [Proof] function, the machine prints one copy of the job. You can
only make a proof for a job in the list of [Waiting jobs] or in the [DocBox] (optional).
When you make a proof, the printed set is not subtracted from the defined total number of sets
for a job. For example, if you need 10 sets the printer will still print 10 sets after you made the
proof. This is different from the checking of the first set.
Locations of the [Proof] Button
The [Proof] button is available at the following locations.
• List of [Waiting jobs].
• [DocBox] (optional).
NOTE
To make a proof of a job in the list of [Printed jobs], you must first touch [Copy] to copy the job
to the list of [Waiting jobs]. There you can select the job and touch [Proof].
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Jobs].
2. Select one of the locations mentioned above.
3. Touch the job of which you want to print a proof.
NOTE
You can select multiple jobs.
4. Press [Proof].
A copy of the job goes to the bottom of the list of [Scheduled jobs]. The original job remains in
the list of [Waiting jobs] or in the [DocBox].
You can recognize a proof by the magnifying glass on the job icon .
Make a Proof
190 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Stop the Printer
Introduction
The printer can stop in two ways.
• Manually
Use the Stop button or the [Stop after job] button to stop the printer.
• Automatically
Define a corresponding setting in the workflow profiles.
Stop the Printer Manually
Manual stop
When to stop Action Description
After a set Press the Stop
button one
time
• The printer stops when the currently printed set of the
active print job is completed.
• The dashboard displays the [Resume] button with a
vertical green bar, and the message [Stopping after
set...].
• When the set is completed, the vertical green bar
changes into red and the message [On hold] appears.
• Touch the [Resume] button to continue printing.
NOTE
It depends on the set size and the moment you
press the Stop button when the printer will
stop. For example, when you have a large set
of 1,000 pages and you press the Stop button
after the first page, the printing will continue
for a couple of minutes.
As soon as possi-
ble
Press the Stop
button two
times
• The printer stops when the printer buffer is empty (as
soon as possible).
• The dashboard displays the [Resume] button with a
vertical red bar, and the message [Stopping as soon
as possible...].
• When the printer buffer is empty, the message [On
hold] appears.
• Touch the [Resume] button to continue printing.
NOTE
The buffer can contain up to 50 pages. Be-
cause the printer stops when the buffer is
empty, it is possible that the last printed set is
not complete. 4
Stop the Printer
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 191
Canon varioPRINT DP line
When to stop Action Description
After a job Touch the [Stop
after job] button
• In [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Scheduled jobs] you must se-
lect the job after which the printer must stop. Then
touch the [Stop after job] button.
• A horizontal, red and white stop bar indicates that the
stop-after-job function is active.
• The printer stops when the last job before the stop bar
is completed.
• Touch the [Resume] button to continue printing.
NOTE
The [Stop after job] button is not available
when the [Confirm start of job] setting in the
active [Workflow profile] is set to [On]. Then
the printer stops automatically after each job.
NOTE
When you print streaming jobs or jobs that consist of 1 large set, you must press the Stop
button two times to stop the printer as soon as possible.
Procedure
Automatic stop
When Then
• The [Check first set] setting in a [Workflow
profile] is [On], and
• The [Check first set] setting is also enabled
in the job.
The printer stops each time the first set of a
print job is completed. You can check the first
set before you continue the print job.
The [Confirm start of job] setting in a [Work-
flow profile] is [On].
The printer stops each time at the start of a
new job. You must start each job manually.
Stop the Printer
192 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Delete Print Jobs
Locations where You Can Delete Print Jobs
You can delete jobs from the following locations.
• List of [Printed jobs] (if this function is enabled in the Settings Editor).
• List of [Scheduled jobs].
• List of [Waiting jobs].
• [DocBox] (optional).
NOTE
You can only delete the active print job in the list of [Scheduled jobs] when the printer is on
hold. If necessary, press the Stop button two times to put the printer on hold.
Select the Jobs You Want to Delete
The table below describes your options to select one or more jobs.
Select one or more jobs that you want to delete
What to delete? How to do?
One or more separate jobs • Select the desired location described above.
• Touch the jobs one by one.
All jobs • Select the desired location.
• Touch [Select] -> [All].
[Jobs with available media] • Select the desired location.
• Touch [Select] -> [Jobs with available media].
[Jobs with label] • Select the desired location.
• Touch [Select] -> [Jobs with label].
[Printed jobs] in the [Doc-
Box]
• Select the [DocBox].
• Touch [Select] -> [Printed jobs].
New jobs in the [DocBox] • Select the [DocBox].
• Touch [Select] -> [New jobs].
NOTE
For the list of [Printed jobs], you can indicate in the Settings Editor that the list must be cleaned
automatically at specified times. The factory default is one day. Furthermore, in the Settings
Editor you can manually clean up the jobs in the lists of [Printed jobs], [Scheduled jobs],
[Waiting jobs] and the [DocBox].
Procedure
1. Go to one of the following locations.
• On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]
If collapsed, first touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs] or [Waiting jobs].
• Touch [Jobs] -> [Printed jobs]
2. Select the jobs you want to delete.
3. Press [Delete].
A message appears.
4. When you are sure that you want to delete the selected job(s), touch [Yes].
Delete Print Jobs
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 193
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Variable data printing
Variable data printing
Introduction
Printing variable data (VDP or variable document printing) is a print method that uses variable
text and graphics, for example names and addresses. A VDP job has records to distinguish the
different sets. VDP is used for direct marketing, advertising and personalized letters.
PRISMAsync supports several PPML formats and the PDF/VT format for variable data printing.
PDF/VT enables variable document printing with the use of the latest PDF standards. Also
manually created VDP jobs are supported.
Submit variable data jobs to PRISMAsync with an automated workflow, a hotfolder or
PRISMAprepare. When PRISMAsync receives a variable data print job, it distinguishes the record
structure. Records are treated as print sets with fixed content.
VDP job
The icon indicates a VDP job.
When the VDP job arrives in the print queue, you can use the following functions:
• Print a proof of the first record.
• Interrupt the print process after a certain record, and resume the print process of the job later.
• Print a range of records.
• Change the settings of the job. Be aware that when you change settings of a PDF/VT job, these
settings are applicable to all records of the job.
NOTE
Page programming is not available for VDP jobs.
Variable data printing
194 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Convert a job to a variable data job
If you print a large document that has the structure of a variable data document, you can instruct
the print system to handle this job as a variable data job.
To indicate how the job is composed, you enter either the number of records or the pages per
record. The job is split into records.
You can also convert jobs to variable data jobs with an automated workflow.
[46] Indicate the structure of the job
Procedure
1. Touch [Jobs].
2. Go to the location of the job.
3. Select the job you want to convert.
4. Touch [Properties], or double tap the job.
5. Touch [Job type].
6. Touch [Normal] -> [Variable data].
7. Specify the number of records and the pages per record.
8. Touch [OK] to store the new job type.
9. Touch [OK] to start the conversion.
After you finish
After conversion you can make the job settings and print the variable data job.
NOTE
You cannot change a VDP job into a normal job.
Convert a job to a variable data job
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 195
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Transaction Printing (Option)
Introduction to the [Transaction] Section
Introduction
NOTE
Transaction printing requires a license. The [System] view on the control panel displays the
[Transaction] section only when transaction printing is licensed.
Transaction printing enables you to print typical transactional documents like invoices, salary
slips or other variable data streams. Before you can start transaction jobs, you must first activate
the transaction mode via the control panel. The [Transaction] section contains the settings that
you need to use transaction printing. There you can also shift the image in case of a
misalignment.
The following information is described below.
• An overview of the items in the [Transaction] section on the control panel.
• The sequence of steps you must perform to print your transaction jobs.
Overview of the [Transaction] Section
1
4
32
[47] Overview of the [Transaction] section
Transaction Printing (Option)
196 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The Items of the [Transaction] Section
Description of the [Transaction] section
Num‐
ber
Item Function
1 Dashboard The dashboard displays the following information for
transaction printing.
• The connection status
• The IP address of the host that sends the jobs
• The name of the active transaction job
• The progress of the active transaction job
2 [Connection] The [Connection] section gives access to the following
functions.
• Turn the transaction printing mode on or off
• Select the setup for the transaction jobs
You can define setups in the Settings Editor ([Transac-
tion printing] -> [Setups]).
• Put the printer online or offline. The printer must be
online for the host to be able to connect to the printer.
3 [Print protocol] Display the active printer description language (read-on-
ly).
You can change the active PDL in the Settings Editor
([Transaction printing] -> [Settings] -> [Requested active
PDL]).
When the requested active PDL is changed, the new PDL
becomes effective when you put the printer online.
4 [Image shift] Display and change the active image shift settings, for
example when the images on the front and back of a
sheet are not aligned correctly.
Sequence of Steps to Print Transaction Jobs
The following table describes the sequence of steps for transaction printing. Make sure that the
list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty before you begin.
Step Actions on the print‐
er
Actions on the host Remarks
1 Switch the printer in-
to the transaction
printing mode.
Via the control panel: [System] ->
[Transaction] -> [Transaction print-
ing mode] -> [On].
2 Select the active set-
up that you need.
• Via the control panel: [System] -
> [Transaction] -> [Active trans-
action setup], or
• Via the Settings Editor: [Trans-
action printing] -> [Setups], or
• By the host via the data stream
(when the printer is online and
connected). 4
Introduction to the [Transaction] Section
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 197
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Actions on the print‐
er
Actions on the host Remarks
3 Change the active
PDL when currently
the wrong PDL is ac-
tive. This is only pos-
sible when you have
licenses for more
than one PDL.
Via the Settings Editor: [Transac-
tion printing] -> [Setups] -> [Re-
quested active PDL].
4 Load the required
media into the paper
trays.
Only required when the active set-
up has set the tray mode to tray to
tray.
5 Put the printer on-
line.
• Via the control panel: [System] -
> [Transaction] -> [Transaction
online] -> [On], or
• Via the Settings Editor: [Trans-
action printing] -> [Settings] ->
[Switch the printer online or off-
line].
6 Connect to the printer.
7 Submit the transaction
print jobs.
8 Print the transaction
print jobs.
You must perform all the regular
activities, for example load the
media, empty the output locations,
add the supplies and solve errors.
9 Put the printer off
line when the trans-
action print jobs are
ready.
• Via the control panel: [System] -
> [Transaction] -> [Transaction
online] -> [Off], or
• Via the Settings Editor: [Trans-
action printing] -> [Settings] ->
[Switch the printer online or off-
line].
10 Switch the printer
back to the docu-
ment printing mode.
• Via the control panel: [System] -
> [Transaction] -> [Transaction
printing mode] -> [Off].
Introduction to the [Transaction] Section
198 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Activate Transaction Printing
Before you begin
Make sure that the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction printing mode].
The text on the button changes from [Off] to [On].
2. If required, touch [Active transaction setup] and select the desired setup.
The attributes of the transaction setup are defined in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync
controller.
3. Load the required media into the paper trays if the setup selects the tray-to-tray mode.
4. Touch [Transaction online] to put the printer online.
The text on the button changes from [Off] to [On].
5. On the host or mainframe, connect to the printer and start the job.
NOTE
You can also select a setup and put the printer online via the [Transaction printing]
section in the Settings Editor.
Activate Transaction Printing
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 199
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Deactivate Transaction Printing
Before you begin
Make sure that the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction online] to put the printer
offline.
The text on the button changes from [On] to [Off].
Note that you can only switch the [Transaction online] function to offline when
• The transaction print jobs are ready.
• The printer contains no more print data.
• The printer has stopped because all the jobs are ready, not because an error has occurred.
When you switch [Transaction online] to offline, the connection to the host is disconnected
automatically.
2. Press [Transaction printing mode].
The text on the button changes from [On] to [Off].
NOTE
You can also put the printer offline via the [Transaction printing] section in the Settings
Editor.
Deactivate Transaction Printing
200 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Shift the image in the Transaction Printing Mode
Introduction
When a misalignment occurs, you can shift the image to correct the problem. You can shift the
image on the front side and back side horizontally and vertically. Examples of possible
misalignments:
• A name or address is not placed correctly in the right area.
• Lines on the front side and back side of a sheet are not aligned correctly.
To keep the shift settings for future use, you must specify the shift settings in the setup via the
Settings Editor. Each time that the setup is loaded, the shift settings included in the setup will
become the active shift settings.
NOTE
Only use the image shift function if you want to shift the image of the whole job. The image shift
applies to all the media in all the paper trays.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Transaction].
2. Touch the - or + buttons to shift the image on the front side or back side of the sheet.
Shift the image in the Transaction Printing Mode
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 201
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Transaction Setups
Create a New Transaction Setup
Introduction
For transaction printing, transaction setups are required. Transaction setups contain specific
settings for specific transaction jobs. You can create setups in the Settings Editor.
NOTE
This section describes how to create a transaction setup from scratch. If you want to create a
transaction setup that is very similar to an existing setup, you can also create a copy and make
changes afterwards. In this case you must select the setup and click [Copy].
Procedure
1. Go to [Transaction printing] -> [Setups].
2. Click the [Add] button.
A pop-up window appears.
3. Enter a name and description for the transaction setup, then click [OK].
4. Check the box next to the setup, then click [Open] to allow changes to the settings of the setup.
5. Depending on the type of setup you created, click [IPDS setup] or [PCL setup].
NOTE
PCL is not available for all products. If you only have one license, the other PDL is not
available.
You can change the settings:
• By group (click the pencil at the right-hand side of the group settings).
• By item (click the pencil behind the individual settings).
After you changed the settings of a transaction setup, you must load the transaction setup to
make the setup changes active (see
Activate a Transaction Setup
on page 204).
Transaction Setups
202 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Edit a Transaction Setup
Procedure
1. Select [Transaction printing] -> [Setups].
2. Tick the checkbox of the setup you want to edit.
3. If required, click the [Edit] button to change the name or description of the setup, then click [OK].
4. Click [Open] to allow changes to the setup.
5. Depending on the type of setup you want to change, click [IPDS setup] or [PCL setup].
NOTE
PCL is not available for all products. If you only have one license, the other PDL is not
available.
You can change the settings:
• By group (click the pencil at the right-hand side of the group settings).
• By item (click the pencil behind the individual settings).
After you changed the settings of a transaction setup, you must load the transaction setup to
make the setup changes active (see
Activate a Transaction Setup
on page 204).
Edit a Transaction Setup
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 203
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Activate a Transaction Setup
Introduction
After you create a new transaction setup or edited an existing transaction setup, you must
activate the transaction setup in the Settings Editor. Otherwise, the changes are not applied.
Procedure
1. In the Settings Editor, click [Transaction printing] -> [Settings] -> [Switch the printer online or
offline] to switch the printer offline.
2. Click [Transaction printing] -> [Setups], select the setup and click [Load].
The transaction setup is now activated.
Activate a Transaction Setup
204 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Exchange All Setups Between Printers
Introduction
If you have more than one printer, you can exchange the transaction setups between the printers,
provided that the printer type and software version are identical. You can then use identical
transaction setups on two or more printers.
Procedure
1. In the Settings Editor, click [Transaction printing] -> [Setups].
2. Click [Export].
3. Save the file.
4. To import the setups, click [Import].
5. Browse to the location where the setup file is stored.
6. Choose either [Replace] or [Merge].
NOTE
After you imported the setup file you must open and load the transaction setup you
want to use.
Exchange All Setups Between Printers
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 205
Canon varioPRINT DP line
IPDS
Media information (IPDS)
Introduction
The media catalog:
• Contains a list of predefined media and their attributes.
• Is an essential part of the system behavior of the varioPRINT DP line.
• Helps you to print your jobs more easily while using the correct media.
Make sure that the [Tray selection mechanism] setting in the Settings Editor is set to [Tray to
media].
This is the preferred setting. The printer is a media-based machine. The tray-to-media method
supports this behavior.
For [IPDS tray to media for tray 1] assign the media catalogue item from the list. The list displays
all the media in the media catalog. The system copies the media attributes from the selected
media to the transaction setup.
When you assign A3/Tabloid-like media or want to use short-edge feed for other media, change
the feed direction to [Short-edge feed (SEF)].
NOTE
The Settings Editor displays only the media for which the media name is consistent with the
IPDS media name definitions. Valid characters for an IPDS media name are: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, blank.
IPDS
206 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Output Recovery in Case of an Error (IPDS)
Introduction
The printer is equipped with an efficient, reliable output recovery in case of an error. By factory
default, the output recovery is set to [Normal]. After the error is solved, the job continues at the
page where the error occurred automatically.
However, some printing environments require that multiple copies must be avoided. For
example, in transactions involving the printing of valuable documents such as cheques. In such
an environment, the [Output recovery] setting of your IPDS setup must be set to [Suppressed].
When the output recovery is suppressed, the printer will not automatically make sure that the
output is corrected after a recovery. All pending pages in the printer will be deleted and the stack
will be ejected. The host system and the operator are responsible for the recovery. The operator
must restart the job manually on the correct page.
The tables below describe what happens when either the normal output recovery or the
suppressed output recovery is selected.
Normal Output Recovery in IPDS
Job Job progress states Normal output recov‐
ery
End up in the output
location after error re‐
covery
Sheets printed suc-
cessfully.
Are stacked at one of
the output locations.
Sheets are in output
location
Sheets copied to con-
troller memory (in-
cluding error pages).
Remain in controller
memory.
Once the error is re-
solved, the printer re-
starts by printing the
first page in the con-
troller memory. 4
Output Recovery in Case of an Error (IPDS)
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 207
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Job Job progress states Normal output recov‐
ery
End up in the output
location after error re‐
covery
Sheets jammed in the
machine.
The control panel dis-
plays instructions on
how to solve the pa-
per jam. The operator
has to remove these
the jammed sheets
manually. These sheets stay in
the memory of the
controller. Once the
printer resumes print-
ing, these pages will
be printed again.
Sheets in host memo-
ry.
Remain in host mem-
ory.
These sheets stay in
the host memory.
When the printer
starts printing, these
pages will be copied
and sent to the con-
troller.
Suppressed Output Recovery in IPDS
Pages that are copied to the memory of the controller are deleted from the system. The operator
must send these missing pages as a new transaction print job to the printer.
Job Job progress states Suppressed output re‐
covery
End up in the output
location after error re‐
covery
Sheets printed suc-
cessfully
Are stacked at one of
the output locations.
Sheets are in output
location 4
Output Recovery in Case of an Error (IPDS)
208 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Job Job progress states Suppressed output re‐
covery
End up in the output
location after error re‐
covery
Sheets copied to con-
troller memory (in-
cluding error pages).
Are deleted complete-
ly.
These sheets are not
delivered to the out-
put location.
Sheets jammed in the
machine.
The control panel dis-
plays instructions on
how to solve the pa-
per jam. The operator
has to remove these
the jammed sheets
manually. These sheets are not
delivered to the out-
put location.
Sheets in host memo-
ry.
Remain in host mem-
ory.
Once the error is re-
solved, the printer re-
starts by printing the
first page in the host
memory.
Output Recovery in Case of an Error (IPDS)
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 209
Canon varioPRINT DP line
PCL
Media Messages (PCL)
Introduction
The media catalog:
• Contains a list of predefined media and their attributes.
• Is an essential part of the system behavior of the varioPRINT DP line.
• Helps you to print your jobs more easily while using the correct media.
Response to Media Messages
For transaction printing, the content of the paper trays (in terms of media from the media catalog)
is translated into a format that the controller understands. However, the controller receives only a
limited amount of information (name or size of the media). This can lead to miscommunication
where the controller misses a media requirement. Then the controller will ask for the required
media via a message on the control panel. This [Media message] indicates the name or size of the
missing media.
Your response to the [Media message] depends on the mode in which the printer works, either:
• The tray-to-tray mode, or
• The tray-to-media mode.
PCL
210 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Media Mode (PCL)
Procedure
1. A message on the control panel indicates that a media is missing. Select one of the following
actions as a response to the message.
• Press [Assign media].
Continue with step 2 when you select this option.
• Press [Continue].
• Press [Cancel stream].
The print job is stopped. You can now solve the problem. You will most likely be able to solve
the problem on the server.
NOTE
The following steps apply only when you chose to assign a media.
2. From the list of media, select the media that must be used as the media the controller is asking
for, and touch [OK].
If you do not select media from the media catalog with the requested size or name, the printer
will select a media with the default size.
3. Select one of the 16 memory locations of the logical-tray table to be used for the required media.
Note that the media that was previously allocated to that memory position in the setup will be
overwritten. Then that media will no longer be available to the transaction stream.
Now you can assign other media or continue the print job.
Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Media Mode (PCL)
Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs 211
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Tray Mode (PCL)
Procedure
1. A message on the control panel indicates that a media is missing. Select one of the following
actions as a response to the message.
• Press [Assign media].
Continue with step two when you select this option.
• Press [Continue].
• Press [Cancel stream].
The print job is stopped. You can now solve the problem. You will most likely be able to solve
the problem on the server.
NOTE
The following steps two and three apply only when you chose to assign a media.
2. From the list of media, select the media that will be used as the media the controller is asking for
and touch [OK].
The media will now be displayed with the name that is defined in the media catalog.
If you do not select media from the media catalog with the requested size or name, the printer
will select a media with the default size.
3. Select the paper tray where you want to load the required media and touch [OK].
4. Load the media.
5. Close the paper tray.
6. Press [OK].
Now you can assign other media or continue the print job.
Handle the Media Messages in the Tray-to-Tray Mode (PCL)
212 Chapter 9 - Carry Out Print Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 10
Carry Out Copy Jobs
Copy Your Documents
Description of the Copy Job Settings
Introduction
When you make a copy, you can define the following.
• How the originals look.
• How the output must look.
• Generic settings for the whole job.
To improve the productivity, the system defines a number of settings for the [Original] and the
[Output] automatically. However, you can overrule these automated settings manually. The
automated settings have the prefix [Auto].
Copy job settings
1
2
3
4
5
[48] The copy job settings
Section Description
1 [Original] The [Original] section contains the settings to define
how the original looks. 4
Copy Your Documents
214 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Section Description
2 [Output] The [Output] section contains the settings available to
define how the resulting copy must look.
NOTE
All the settings have a fixed position. If a set-
ting is not possible, then the location of that
setting is empty. Example: The [Trimming] set-
ting is only be available when you have a trim-
mer. Otherwise, the location of the [Trimming]
setting is empty.
3 [Job] The [Job] section enables you to define generic proper-
ties for the whole job.
4 Preview The preview section shows the result of the settings de-
fined for the output.
5 Action buttons The buttons in this section allow you to select actions,
for example, save settings to a template, cancel a job, or
start scanning.
With the optional [Page programming] function, you can
insert pages and define the media and finishing settings
for the page ranges in a job.
[Original] Settings - [1- or 2-sided]
Setting Values Description
[1- or 2-sided] The automatically set value for this setting.
[1-sided]
Only the front side contains an image or text.
[2-sided]
Both the front side and the back side contain an im-
age or text.
Description of the Copy Job Settings
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 215
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Original] Settings - [Original type]
Setting Values Description
[Original type] The automatically set value for this setting.
[Portrait] [Binding edge]
[Left]
• The original has a vertical format (height >
width).
• The binding edge is at the left-hand side.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,
the image or text on the back of the sheet is in
readable form.
[Top, head to toe]
• The original has a vertical format (height >
width).
• The binding edge of the original is at the top.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,
the image or text on the back of the sheet is in
readable form.
[Landscape] [Binding edge]
[Left]
• The original has a horizontal format (width >
height).
• The binding edge of the original is at the left-
hand side.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,
the image or text on the back of the sheet is in
readable form.
[Top, head to head]
• The original has a horizontal format (width >
height).
• The binding edge of the original is at the top.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,
the image or text on the back side of the sheet is
in readable form.
[Book] Make copies/scans from a book original on the
glass plate. You can copy/scan the individual pages
of a book.
[Pages]
• [Both pages]: The left-hand half and the right-
hand half of the original (opened book) are cop-
ied/scanned as two separate copies.
• [Left page]: The left-hand half of the original
(opened book) is copied/scanned.
• [Right page]: The right-hand half of the original
(opened book) is copied/scanned.
Description of the Copy Job Settings
216 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Original] Settings - [Size]
Setting Values Description
[Size]
A4, A3, Letter,
Tabloid, etc.
Original in the ADF or on the glass plate:
• Automatic size detection, or
• Enter the media format of the original.
When your original has a non-standard size, you can use
the - and + buttons to enter the exact measures. You can
enter the measures in steps of 1 mm / 0.01". The text of
the[Size] button changes into [Custom].
[Portrait]
[Landscape]
• Automatic orientation detection, or
• Indicate the orientation of nonstandard size media
[Original] Settings - [Image type]
Setting Values Description
[Image type]
[Mixed]
The original contains a combination of text and im-
ages.
[Photo]
The original contains mainly or only images.
[Text]
The original contains mainly or only text.
[High detail]
The original contains an image with lots of details.
[Original] Settings - [Background]
Setting Values Description
[Background] Number Suppression of vague or yellowish background.
Description of the Copy Job Settings
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 217
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Output] Settings - [1- or 2-sided]
Setting Values Description
[1- or 2-sided]
[Auto]
The automatically set value for this setting.
[1-sided]
The output contains an image on one side.
[2-sided]
The output contains an image on both sides.
[Output] Settings - [Binding edge]
Setting Values Description
[Binding edge]
[Auto]
The automatically set value for this setting.
[Portrait left]
• The output has a vertical format (height >
width).
• The binding edge is at the left-hand side.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,
the image or text on the back of the sheet is in
readable form.
[Portrait top]
• The output has a vertical format (height >
width).
• The binding edge of the print is at the top.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding edge
the image on the back side of the sheet is in
readable form. This means that every back side
of a two-sided print is upside down compared to
the front side.
[Landscape left]
• The output has a horizontal format (width >
height).
• The binding edge of the print is on the left side.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,
the text or image is in readable form.
[Landscape top]
• The output has a horizontal format (width >
height).
• The binding edge of the print is at the top.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,
the image on the back side of the sheet is in
readable form. This means that every back side
of a two-sided print is upside down compared to
the front side.
Description of the Copy Job Settings
218 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Output] Settings - [Media]
Setting Values Description
[Media] Names of the media
in the media cata-
logue
Here you can select the media for the copy job.
The list displays all the media that are available in
the media catalogue. The media catalog is a list of
media that you can define in the Settings Editor
application on the PRISMAsync controller.
[Output] Settings - [Cover]
Setting Values Description
[Cover]
[Front]
Here you can indicate that the print job requires a
front cover. When the setting is enabled the corre-
sponding setting [Media] becomes enabled.
[Media] When the setting [Front] is enabled, you can select
a media from the media catalog.
[Print sides] Here you can select the sides of the front cover
you want to print on.
• [Both sides]
• [Front side]
• [Back side]
• [None]
[Back]
Here you can indicate that the print job requires a
back cover. When the setting is enabled the corre-
sponding setting [Media] becomes enabled.
[Media] When the setting [Back] is enabled, you can select
a media from the media catalog.
[Print sides] Here you can select the sides of the back cover you
want to print on.
• [Both sides]
• [Front side]
• [Back side]
• [None]
Description of the Copy Job Settings
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 219
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Output] Settings - [Layout]
Setting Values Description
[Layout]
[Normal]
The machine prints the pages with no special lay-
out settings.
[Booklet]
The machine prints the pages in booklet order. The
pages one and four are printed on the front side of
a sheet. The pages two and three are printed on
the back side of a sheet.
[Same up]
The machine prints the same image multiple times
next to each other. By default, the system keeps
the size of the originals.
When you copy A4/LTR originals with the setting
[Same up] and [Images per sheet] is two, the ma-
chine will automatically print the job on A3 / 11" x
17", for example. When you cut the A3 / 11"x 17"
sheets in two, you get two identical A4 / LTR cop-
ies of your document. To reduce your A4/LTR orig-
inals to A5/STMT prints, you can use the zoom
function or select another media type.
[Multiple up]
The machine prints multiple consecutive images
on one side of a sheet, next to each other.
[Same-up flipped]
The machine prints the same image twice on one
side of a sheet, but one image is upside down
compared to the other.
[Images per sheet] Here you can select the number of images you
want to print when you select [Same up] or [Multi-
ple up].
[Output] Settings - [Zoom]
Setting Values Description
[Zoom] [Fit to page] When [Fit to page] is [On], the image is resized so
it fits onto the page.
When [Fit to page] is [Off], the original size of the
image is maintained.
[Percent] Use the + and - buttons to reduce or enlarge the
size of the image (from 25% to 400%). The preview
pane immediately shows the results of your ac-
tion.
Description of the Copy Job Settings
220 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Output] Settings - [Align]
Setting Values Description
[Align]
[Auto]
The automatically set value for this setting.
[Top left]
The [Align] setting allows you to indicate the posi-
tion of the image on the sheet. [Top left] moves
the image to the upper left corner of the sheet.
[Top center]
[Top center] moves the image to the center at the
top of the sheet.
[Top right]
[Top right] moves the image to the upper right cor-
ner of the sheet.
[Center left]
[Center left] moves the image to center of the left
side of the sheet.
[Center]
[Center] moves the image to the center of the
sheet.
[Center right]
[Center right] moves the image to the center of the
right side of the sheet.
[Bottom left]
[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left
corner of the sheet.
[Bottom center]
[Bottom center] moves the image to the center of
the bottom side of the sheet.
[Bottom right]
[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower right
corner of the sheet.
Description of the Copy Job Settings
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 221
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Output] Settings - [Shift]
Setting Values Description
[Shift] [Margin shift] Use this setting to increase or decrease the mar-
gin. By default, the values of the front side and the
back side are interlocked. This means that the val-
ues for the front side and the back side remain
identical.
Widening the margin can be useful if you want to
staple or punch the output, for example. Narrow-
ing the margin can be useful if you do not need
additional space for stapling or punching the out-
put, for example.
If you want to define a different value for each
side, press . The icon changes to the unlocked sta-
tus. Now you can define the values for the front
side and the back side separately.
[Image shift] Use this setting to shift the image horizontally or
vertically. By default, the values of the front side
and the back side are interlocked. This means that
the values for the front side and the back side re-
main identical.
If you want to define a different value for each
side, press . The icon changes to the unlocked sta-
tus. Now you can define the values for the front
side and the back side separately.
Description of the Copy Job Settings
222 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Output] Settings - [Print delivery]
Setting Values Description
[Print delivery] [Output loca-
tion]
Select the output location for the job. Depending on the set-
tings for your copy job, the machine automatically suggests
the preferred output location for your job. However, you can
manually overrule this suggestion.
• [Stacker/stapler upper tray]
Deliver the prints at the upper tray of the stacker/stapler.
• [Stacker/stapler lower tray]
Deliver the prints at the lower tray of the stacker/stapler.
• [Stacker/stapler booklet tray]
Deliver the prints at the booklet tray of the stacker/stapler.
• [Folder main tray]
Deliver the folded prints to the tray at the bottom of the
folder.
[Sort]
[By page]
The output is sorted by page.
[By set]
The output is sorted by set.
[Offset stack-
ing]
This setting is only available when the [Offset stacking] set-
ting is set to [Sets (as in job)] in the workflow profile.
[Each set]
Each set delivered to an output location will have a small
shift on top of the previous set. This makes it easier to rec-
ognize individual sets.
[Off]
All the sets or jobs that get to an output location are stacked
in a straight stack. 4
Description of the Copy Job Settings
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 223
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Print delivery] [Advanced set-
tings] -> [Sheet
order] [Face up]
Deliver the prints face up, first sheet on top.
[Face up reverse]
Deliver the prints face up, last sheet on top.
[Face down]
Deliver the prints face down, first sheet on top.
[Face down reverse]
Deliver the prints face down, last sheet on top.
[Advanced set-
tings] -> [Sheet
orientation] [Header up LEF]
Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in portrait
position (vertical).
[Header up SEF]
Deliver the prints with the header on top side and in land-
scape position (horizontal).
[Header down LEF]
Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in
portrait position (vertical).
[Header down SEF]
Deliver the prints with the header at the bottom side and in
landscape position (horizontal). 4
Description of the Copy Job Settings
224 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Print delivery] [Advanced set-
tings] -> [Print
order]
• [Front/back]
Default value. The front page on the front, the back page
on the back.
• [Back/front]
Puts the front page on the back and the back page on the
front.
[Advanced set-
tings] -> [Rota-
tion]
• [0 degrees]
• [180 degrees]
Rotates the prints 180 degrees.
[Output] Settings - [Margin erase]
Setting Values Description
[Margin erase]
[Binding edge] Margins of a document sometimes contain notes
or punch holes, for example. The machine allows
you to hide these elements on the copy. With the +
and - buttons of the [Binding edge] setting you can
define how much margin of the original you want
to erase. You can enter a value up to 100 mm /
3.94".
[Output] Settings - [Exposure]
Setting Values Description
[Exposure] [Dark] You can adjust the settings for light areas and dark
areas on the print separately.
• When an area on the output must be darker,
then select a value of -1 to -3.
• When the area must be lighter, then select a val-
ue of 1 to 3.
[Light] • When the area must be darker, then select a val-
ue of -1 to -3.
• When an area on the output must be lighter,
then select a value of 1 to 3.
Description of the Copy Job Settings
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 225
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Output] Settings - [Binding]
Setting Values Description
[Binding] [None] Here you can define the required number of sta-
ples. Furthermore you can define where you want
the staples with the [Location] option.
The available locations for one staple:
• [Top left]
• [Top right]
• [Bottom left]
• [Bottom right]
The available locations for two staples:
• [Left edge]
• [Top edge]
• [Bottom edge]
• [Right edge]
Check the preview for the result of the selection.
[1 staple]
[2 staples]
[Saddle stitching]
[Output] Settings - [Folding]
This option is only available when you have a folding unit connected.
Description of the Copy Job Settings
226 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Folding]
[None]
[Z-fold]
Required output location for Z-folded A4R, LetterR
and Legal:
• Folder output tray, or
• Any output tray of the stacker/stapler.
NOTE
Z-folded A3, B4 and Tabloid 11" x 17"
sheets must be sent to the stacker/
stapler.
[Z-fold large sheets
only]
Required output location for Z-folded A3, B4 and
Tabloid 11" x 17": Any output tray of the stacker/
stapler.
[Tri-fold in]
Required output location: Folder output tray
[Tri-fold out]
Required output location: Folder output tray
[Parallel fold]
Required output location: Folder output tray
[Print method] Use the [Print method] option to define on which
side to print:
• [Print inside]
• [Print outside]
Check the preview for the result of the selection.
[Output] Settings - [Trimming]
This option is only available when you have a trimming unit connected.
Description of the Copy Job Settings
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 227
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Trimming] [None] No trimming of the document.
[Trim size]
You can indicate the amount of trimming at
the long edge and short edge (from 2.0 mm to
20.0 mm / 0.08" - 0.80")
[Finishing size]
You can indicate the size of the resulting docu-
ment after trimming. You can either touch
[Size] to select a default media size or manual-
ly define the width and length of the docu-
ment. When you define a non-standard media
size, the [Size] box displays [Custom].
[Output] Settings - [Punching]
This option is only available when you have a punching unit connected.
Setting Values Description
[Punching]
[None]
Here you can select the required number and
the location of the punch holes.
Location:
• [Left]
• [Top]
• [Right]
• [Bottom]
[2 holes]
[3 holes]
[4 holes]
[Die set dependent]
Description of the Copy Job Settings
228 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Number of sets]
Setting Values Description
[Number of sets] [Check first set] When the [Check first set] setting is enabled,
the printer stops after the first set of a job has
been printed. You can check the quality of the
output.
NOTE
This setting is only available when in
the workflow profile [Check first set]
is set to [As in job].
[Number of sets] You can indicate how many copies of the job
you need. You can enter a value from 1 -
65,000. The default value is 1.
Job name
Setting Values Description
[Job name] To identify your job more easily, you can change
the name of the job. When you touch the [Job
name] button a keyboard appears. Then you can
change the name of the job.
[49] Change the job name
Description of the Copy Job Settings
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 229
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Destination]
Setting Values Description
[Destination] [Scheduled jobs] Add the copy job to the list of [Scheduled jobs] in
the [Jobs] view.
[Waiting jobs] Add the copy job to the list or [Waiting jobs] in the
[Jobs] view.
[DocBox] Add the copy job to the [DocBox] (if licensed).
[Separator sheets]
Setting Values Description
[Separator sheets] [On] When the [Separator sheets] setting is enabled, a
separate sheet is inserted automatically before
each set of a job to create a clear distinction be-
tween two sets. Separator sheets are always emp-
ty. In the Settings Editor, select a media from the
media catalog use as separator sheets. You can al-
so indicate the feed direction of the separator
sheets (long-edge feed or short-edge feed).
[Off] No separator sheet will be inserted before each set.
Description of the Copy Job Settings
230 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Make an easy copy
Introduction
An easy copy is a copy for which you only need to define a few settings before touching the Start
button :
• One-sided or two-sided original.
• One-sided or two sided copy.
• Zoom.
• Media.
• Stapling.
• The number of copies required.
When you need more settings, you have to make a copy job instead of an easy copy job.
You must enable the [Easy copy job] in the Settings Editor.
When the [Easy copy job] is enabled in the Settings Editor, also the [Last used] template is
automatically opened after each copy / scan job. This means that you can easily make a number
of the same copies / scans without having to define the settings each time again.
Procedure
1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face
down on the glass plate.
2. Select the [Easy copy job].
You select the [Easy copy job] template from the [Jobs] view: touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan].
3. If required, change the default settings and the required number of copies.
4. Touch .
The job is added to the list of [Scheduled jobs].
Make an easy copy
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 231
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Create templates to use for recurring jobs
Introduction
When you regularly carry out identical copy or scan jobs, you can create custom templates for
them. The custom templates contain the default settings for these jobs.
Procedure
1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan].
2. Select an existing copy or scan job template.
You cannot save the [Easy copy job] template as a custom template.
3. Make the required settings for the recurring job.
4. Touch [Save as template] to save the settings to a custom template.
5. Enter the name of the custom template and touch [OK].
6. Touch [Cancel].
The custom template is now available at [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan].
7. To edit the template, touch the custom template for 2 seconds.
You can now select the following options.
• [Rename].
• [Move].
Touch a blue line in front of a template to indicate the new location.
The location of the [Last used] template is set.
• [Delete]
You cannot delete the [Easy copy job] template.
NOTE
Touch the [Last used] template for 2 seconds to save the settings of the last job to a
template.
Create templates to use for recurring jobs
232 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Copy Non-Standard Size Originals
Introduction
The scanner can detect the following media sizes automatically:
Glass plate ADF
• A3R
• A4
• A4R
• A5
• B4R
• B5
• B5R
• B6
• Statement 5.5" x8.5"
• Letter 8.5" x 11"
• LetterR 11"x 8.5"
• LegalR 8.5" x14"
• TabloidR 11" x 17"
• A3R
• A4
• A4R
• A5
• A5R
• B4R
• B5
• B5R
• B6R
• Statement 5.5" x 8.5"
• StatementR
• Letter 8.5" x 11"
• LetterR 11" x 8.5"
• LegalR 8.5" x 14"
• TabloidR 11" x 17"
When you copy originals with a different size, you must enter the correct measures manually.
The ADF supports originals of 140 mm x 128 mm - 630 mm x 304.8 mm (5.5"x 5" - 24.9" x 12").
The glass plate supports originals of 10 mm x 10 mm - 432 mm x 297mm (0.4" x 0.4" - 17" x
11.7").
Procedure
1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face
down on the glass plate.
2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy job].
3. In the [Original] section, touch [Size].
4. Use the - and + buttons to enter the correct media size.
5. Press [OK].
The [Size] button displays the defined size.
6. In the [Output] section, touch [Media].
7. Select a media from the list and touch [OK].
The setting [Zoom] determines how the copy will look. When [Zoom] ->[Fit to page] is enabled,
the original will be scaled to fit the media size of the output. When [Zoom] -> [Fit to page] is
disabled, you can enter a custom zoom percentage.
Copy Non-Standard Size Originals
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 233
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The Zoom Behavior
Introduction
When you carry out a copy job or scan job, you can use the [Zoom] function to reduce or enlarge
an image, for example:
• Copy an A4 original on an A3 sheet. The system enlarges the image.
• Copy an A3 original on an A4 sheet. The system reduces the image.
• Copy an A4 original with a small illustration on an A4 sheet, and at the same time enlarge the
illustration.
By factory default, the [Zoom] function is set to [Fit to page]. To change the zoom factor
manually, touch the - and + buttons of the [Zoom] function.
The zoom function for originals in the automatic document feeder is different from the zoom
function for originals on the glass plate.
Zoom behavior
Original Starting point of the zoom function
Automatic document feeder Center
Glass plate Upper left-hand corner
NOTE
The zoom function works identical for both copy jobs and scan jobs.
How to Use the Zoom Function for a Scan from the ADF
The following table shows the zoom behavior of the machine when the originals are scanned
from the automatic document feeder. The focus is on the centre of the original.
Scan from the automatic document feeder using the zoom function
Illustration Description
The original is placed face-down and in readable form into the au-
tomatic document feeder.
The center of the original is a fixed point and is used as the origin
of the image.
Result of a scan with a 100% zoom factor.
Result of a scan with a 50% zoom factor.
NOTE
The center of the image is fixed.
Result of a scan with a 200% zoom factor.
NOTE
The center of the image is fixed.
The Zoom Behavior
234 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
How to Use the Zoom Function for a Scan from the Glass Plate
The following table shows the zoom behavior of the machine when the originals are scanned
from the glass plate. The focus is on the upper right-hand corner of the original (upper left-hand
corner of the glass plate).
Scan from the glass plate using the zoom function
Illustration Description
The original is placed face-down and in readable form in the upper
left-hand corner on the glass plate.
The upper left-hand corner of the glass plate is a fixed point and is
used as the origin of the image.
Result on paper of a scan with a 100% zoom factor.
Result on paper of a scan with a 50% zoom factor.
NOTE
The upper right-hand corner of the image is fixed.
Result on paper of a scan with a 200% zoom factor.
NOTE
The upper right-hand corner of the image is fixed.
The Zoom Behavior
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 235
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Staple, Punch, Fold, or Trim the Output
NOTE
When you make one copy of one original, stapling is not possible.
Procedure
1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face
down on the glass plate.
2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy job].
3. At the [Binding] setting, select the required number of staples and the location of the staples.
4. At the [Punching] setting, select the required number of holes.
5. At the [Folding] setting, select the folding method.
6. At the [Trimming] setting, define the trim settings
7. If required, define the other settings for the original document and the output.
8. Enter the generic values in the [Job] section.
9. Touch [Start] .
Staple, Punch, Fold, or Trim the Output
236 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Rename a Copy Job
Introduction
When you carry out a new copy job, the system creates an automatic name for the job. The
default name 'Copy Job' followed by a sequence number is displayed in the [Job name] field.
However, you can rename the copy job into a name of your choice. This name helps you to
recognize the job in the list of [Scheduled jobs], [Waiting jobs] or in the [DocBox] (optional).
Procedure
1. In the job window on the control panel, touch [Job name].
A keyboard appears.
2. Touch and hold 'Backspace' until the current name is deleted.
3. Enter a new name.
4. Press [OK].
Rename a Copy Job
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 237
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Combining subsets into one document
Introduction
You can copy or scan several sets of originals to one document or file with subsets. With the
optional [Page programming] function, you can add pages, for example, tab sheets, and define
the media and finishing settings for each page and subset.
NOTE
When you copy or scan subsets, the [Last used] template is disabled.
Procedure
1. Place the first subset face up into the ADF.
2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Combined copy job].
3. Define the subset settings for both in the [Original] and [Output].
NOTE
Some settings that you define for the first subset apply to the whole job, the [Type] and
[Resolution] settings, for example. These settings are fixed and are grayed out after
scanning the first subset.
4. Touch [Scan].
5. Put the next subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for all subsequent subsets.
A number indicates the order in which the subsets have been scanned.
NOTE
When you combine 1-sided and 2-sided originals, you can define whether a new subset
must continue on a new sheet or on the previous sheet.
7. Touch [Ready] when the last subset is scanned and processed.
A full overview of all the scanned subsets appears in the right-hand pane. If required, you can
add, insert, delete or edit subsets.
8. If required, use the optional [Page programming] function to insert pages and define the media
and finishing settings per page range.
9. Touch [Ready] again to close the [Page programming] function.
10. Touch .
Combining subsets into one document
238 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Insert Tab Sheets to Divide Your Document
Introduction
If you want to use tab sheets to create a physical division in your document, you must treat the
copy job as a combined copy job. The tab sheets will be processed as inserts.
Before you begin
• Make sure that you split up your original document into the parts (subsets) that must be
preceded by tab sheets.
• Make sure that you load the required tab sheets into a paper tray or into the optional inserter
module.
Illustration
[50] Insert tab sheets
Procedure
1. Place the first subset face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face
down on the glass plate.
2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Combined copy job].
3. Define the settings for the subset (both in the [Original] and [Output] section).
4. Press .
5. Place the next subset face up into the ADF, or face down on the glass plate.
6. Repeat the steps three and four for all subsequent subsets.
7. Touch [Ready] when all subsets were scanned.
8. Press [Edit].
A preview pane displays the scanned subsets.
Insert Tab Sheets to Divide Your Document
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 239
Canon varioPRINT DP line
9. Touch the subset before which you want to insert the first tab sheet.
The selected subset is highlighted.
10. Press [Insert].
11. In the settings pane, touch [Media] and select a tab media.
12. Press .
13. Press [Ready].
14. Press [Edit].
15. Repeat the steps nine to fourteen until all the tab sheets were inserted.
16. Touch [Ready] when all the tab sheets were inserted.
17. Define the general job settings such as [Number of sets].
18. Press .
Insert Tab Sheets to Divide Your Document
240 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Scan Now and Print Later
Introduction
You can scan an original document now and print the document later (postponed copying). To
use this function, you must send a copy job to the list of [Waiting jobs] or to the [DocBox]
(optional).
When to do
You must only change the destination to [Waiting jobs] or [DocBox] (optional) when the default
destination of copy jobs is [Scheduled jobs]. The default destination of copy jobs is defined in the
workflow profiles.
Procedure
1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face
down on the glass plate.
2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy job] or [Combined copy job].
3. Define the settings for your copy job.
4. Touch [Destination] to select [Waiting jobs] or [DocBox] (optional).
5. If required, touch [Job name] to rename the job. This helps you to recognize the job more easily.
6. Touch [Start] .
The job is sent to the selected destination. There you can select the job whenever you want to
print it.
Scan Now and Print Later
Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs 241
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Scan Now and Print Later
242 Chapter 10 - Carry Out Copy Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 11
Carry Out Scan Jobs
Configure the Scan Function
Configure the Settings for Scan to File
Introduction
To use the scan-to-file function, the system administrator must configure the function in the
Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]). A scan job will
be sent to the FTP server configured.
How to Configure the Settings for Scan to File
The table below describes the settings that the system administrator must configure in the
Settings Editor.
Settings for scan to file in the Settings Editor
Setting Description
[Connection test] Click [Connection test] to check if the scan-to-file func-
tion is configured correctly.
[Scan to file, scan to email and scan
to SMB enabled]
This setting must be set to [Yes] to use the scan func-
tion.
[Host name / IP address] The name or IP address of the FTP server that receives
the scan jobs.
[Port] The TCP port number of the FTP server. The default val-
ue is 21.
[User name] The user name that is used to access the FTP server
when sending scan jobs.
[Password] The password that corresponds with the user name.
[Destination directory] The directory on the FTP server to which the scan jobs
will be sent.
Configure the Scan Function
244 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Configure the Settings for Scan to SMB
Introduction
To use the scan-to-SMB function, the system administrator must enable this function in the
Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]). The system
administrator must add SMB shares ([Workflow] -> [SMB shares]). The maximum number of SMB
shares is 3. A scan job will be sent to the selected SMB share.
How to Configure the Settings for Scan to SMB
The table below describes the settings that the system administrator must configure in the
Settings Editor.
Settings for scan to SMB in the Settings Editor
Setting Description
[Scan to file, scan to email and scan
to SMB enabled]
This setting must be set to [Yes] to use the scan func-
tion.
[Name] The name of the SMB share.
[Description] The description of the SMB share.
[Network destination] Select [Domain] or [Workgroup].
[Domain name] Name of the domain.
[User name] The user name that is used to access the SMB server
when sending scan jobs.
[Password] The password that corresponds with the user name.
[Path] The directory on the SMB server to which the scan jobs
will be sent.
Configure the Settings for Scan to SMB
Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 245
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Configure the Settings for Scan to Email
Introduction
To use the scan-to-email function, the system administrator must configure the function in the
Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync controller ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity]). A scan job will
be sent as an attachment to the email address defined.
How to Configure the Settings for Scan to Email
The table below describes the settings that the system administrator must configure in the
Settings Editor.
Settings for scan to email in the Settings Editor
Setting Description
[Connection test] Click [Connection test] to check if the scan-to-email func-
tion is configured correctly.
[Mailserver host name / IP address] The name or IP address of the SMTP server that handles
the emails containing the scan jobs.
[Port] The TCP port number of the SMTP server. The default
value is 25.
[User name] The user name that is used to access the SMTP server
when sending scan jobs.
[Password] The password that corresponds with the user name.
[Sender] The name that will be displayed as the sender of the
email that contains the scan job.
[Maximum attachment size] The maximum size allowed for the attached scan job in
MB. You can enter a value from 0 - 2147483647 in steps
of one. The value '0' means unlimited. The default value
is 5 MB.
[Allow scanning to multiple email ad-
dresses]
When enabled you can send the scan job to one or more
email addresses. You must enter the email address on
the control panel. Separate the email addresses with ';'.
You can enter the email addresses in different ways:
• Enter the email address.
• Enter an LDAP user code.
Configure the Settings for the LDAP Server
on page 247
• Select the email address from an address list.
Use an address book for scan to email
on page 259
Configure the Settings for Scan to Email
246 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Configure the Settings for the LDAP Server
Introduction
If the scan-to-email function is enabled, a list of user codes and matching email addresses is
required. When a user enters his/her unique code on the control panel, the scan job will be sent
to the matching email address.
The list of user codes and matching email addresses can be available at the following places:
• On an LDAP server, if available
• If an LDAP server is unavailable, in an address list file (default name: ral.csv), which must be
uploaded to the PRISMAsync controller through the Settings Editor ([Configuration] ->
[Connectivity]).
When a user enters the user code, the system will first look for a matching email address in the
LDAP database. When the system does not find a matching email address there, or when an
LDAP server is not available, the system will search the address list file (ral.csv) for the matching
email address.
How to Configure the Settings for the LDAP Server
The table below describes the settings that the system administrator must configure in the
Settings Editor.
Settings for LDAP in the Settings Editor
Setting Description
[Connection test] Click [Connection test] to check if the connection to the
LDAP server works correctly.
[Enabled] This setting must be set to [Yes] to realize a connection
between the printer and the LDAP server.
[Mailserver host name / IP address] The name or IP address of the LDAP server where user
information for scan to email can be retrieved.
[Port] The TCP port number of the LDAP server. The default
value is 389.
[User name] The user name that is used to access the LDAP server.
[Password] The password that corresponds with the user name.
[LDAP search base] The path to the LDAP directory that contains the user
identifiers, for example o=YourOrganization.
[Search filter] The type of user identification that must be searched for,
for example a telephone number or employee ID.
[Attribute with email address] The LDAP attribute that contains the email address of
the user, for example 'mail'.
Configure the Settings for the LDAP Server
Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 247
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Use the Address List File (ral.csv)
Introduction
If an LDAP server is not available, you must use a remote address list file (ral.csv) for scan to
email. This file must contain the unique user codes and matching email addresses. The
PRISMAsync controller stores the address list file. Proceed as follows:
1. Download the file via the Settings Editor ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity], scroll down to the
LDAP section -> [Download address list file]).
2. Edit the file in Microsoft® Excel®, for example.
3. Upload the file via the Settings Editor ([Configuration] -> [Connectivity], scroll down to the
LDAP section -> [Upload address list file]).
Syntax of the Address List File
The address list file must contain a header line (mandatory) and at least one line with an email
recipient.
A "," or ";" separates the items in a record.
<CR> or <LF> separates records.
The header record shows the fields that the address list uses (ruid,address,comment).
A profile record contains the unique user codes and matching email addresses. ruid and address
are mandatory. comment is optional.
Record Items
Record items
Record item Description
ruid A unique user code, for example an employee number or tele-
phone number.
Maximum 20 digits. Leading zeros are allowed.
address The email address that matches the user code.
Maximum 40 characters. Do not use the characters <CR>, <LF>, ","
and ";".
comments Additional information, if required.
NOTE
Do not change the header information.
Examples of Correct Profiles
• 01234,userA@companyX.com
• 56789,userB@organizationY.com
Use the Address List File (ral.csv)
248 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Scan Your Documents
Description of the Scan Job Settings
Introduction
When you make a scan, you can define the following.
• How the original looks.
• How the resulting file must look.
• Generic settings for the whole job.
To improve the productivity, the system defines a number of logical settings for the [Original] and
the [Output] automatically. However, you can overrule these automated settings manually. The
automated settings have the prefix [Auto].
Illustration
1
2
3
4
5
[51] The scan job settings
Section Description
1 [Original] The [Original] section contains the settings to define
how the original looks.
2 [File] The [File] section contains the settings to define how the
resulting file must look. 4
Scan Your Documents
Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 249
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Section Description
3 [Job] The [Job] section enables you to define generic proper-
ties for the whole job.
4 Preview The preview section shows the result of the settings de-
fined for the output.
5Action buttons The buttons in this section allow you to select actions,
for example, save settings to a template, cancel a job, or
start scanning.
With the optional [Page programming] function, you can
insert pages and define the media and finishing settings
for the page ranges in a job. The optional [Page pro-
gramming] function is available when you scan subsets
into one file.
[Original] Settings - [1- or 2-sided]
Setting Values Description
[1- or 2-sided] The automatically set value for this setting.
[1-sided]
Only the front side contains an image or text.
[2-sided]
Both the front side and the back side contain an im-
age or text.
Description of the Scan Job Settings
250 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Original] Settings - [Original type]
Setting Values Description
[Original type] The automatically set value for this setting.
[Portrait] [Binding edge]
[Left]
• The original has a vertical format (height >
width).
• The binding edge is at the left-hand side.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,
the image or text on the back of the sheet is in
readable form.
[Top, head to toe]
• The original has a vertical format (height >
width).
• The binding edge of the original is at the top.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,
the image or text on the back of the sheet is in
readable form.
[Landscape] [Binding edge]
[Left]
• The original has a horizontal format (width >
height).
• The binding edge of the original is at the left-
hand side.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,
the image or text on the back of the sheet is in
readable form.
[Top, head to head]
• The original has a horizontal format (width >
height).
• The binding edge of the original is at the top.
• When you turn a sheet over the binding edge,
the image or text on the back side of the sheet is
in readable form.
[Book] Make copies/scans from a book original on the
glass plate. You can copy/scan the individual pages
of a book.
[Pages]
• [Both pages]: The left-hand half and the right-
hand half of the original (opened book) are cop-
ied/scanned as two separate copies.
• [Left page]: The left-hand half of the original
(opened book) is copied/scanned.
• [Right page]: The right-hand half of the original
(opened book) is copied/scanned.
Description of the Scan Job Settings
Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 251
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Original] Settings - [Size]
Setting Values Description
[Size]
A4, A3, Letter, Ledg-
er, etc.
Original in the ADF or on the glass plate:
• Automatic size detection, or
• Enter the media format of the original.
When your original has a non-standard size, you
can use the - and + buttons to enter the exact
measures. You can enter the measures in steps
of 1 mm / 0.01". The text of the[Size] button
changes into [Custom].
[Portrait]
[Landscape]
• Automatic orientation detection, or
• Indicate the orientation of nonstandard size me-
dia
[Original] Settings - [Image type]
Setting Values Description
[Image type]
[Mixed]
The original contains a combination of text and im-
ages.
[Photo]
The original contains mainly or only images.
[Text]
The original contains mainly or only text.
[Original] Settings - [Background]
Setting Values Description
[Background] Number Suppression of vague or yellowish background.
[File] Settings - [Type]
The default settings result in small files with an acceptable quality loss. When higher quality is
needed, set the quality factor higher.
Description of the Scan Job Settings
252 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Values Description
[Type] [Format] Select the required format.
[Compression]
Define the compression factor to reduce the file
size.
NOTE
A higher compression factor results in a
scan with lower quality.
[Quality] When a higher quality is needed, you must set the
[Quality] higher.
[File] Settings - [Resolution]
Setting Values Description
[Resolution] [300 dpi] Select [300 dpi] when you want to view or archive
the generated file, for example.
[600 dpi]
Select [600 dpi] when you want to print or edit the
generated file, for example.
[File] Settings - [Size]
Setting Values Description
[Size] All media sizes that
the media catalog
supports
Select the media size of the resulting file.
[File] Settings - [Zoom]
Setting Values Description
[Zoom] [Fit to page] You can select a media size for the file that differs
from the media size of the original. When the [Fit
to page] setting is enabled, the system scales the
original in such a way that the image fits on the se-
lected media size of the file.
[Percent] Use this setting to change the zoom manually
within the range 25% to 400%.
Description of the Scan Job Settings
Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 253
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[File] Settings - [Align]
Setting Values Description
[Align]
[Top left]
The [Align] setting allows you to indicate the posi-
tion of the image on the sheet. [Top left] moves
the image to the upper left corner of the sheet.
[Top center]
[Top center] moves the image to the center at the
top of the sheet.
[Top right]
[Top right] moves the image to the upper right cor-
ner of the sheet.
[Center left]
[Center left] moves the image to center of the left
side of the sheet.
[Center]
[Center] moves the image to the center of the
sheet.
[Center right]
[Center right] moves the image to the center of the
right side of the sheet.
[Bottom left]
[Bottom left] moves the image to the lower left
corner of the sheet.
[Bottom center]
[Bottom center] moves the image to the center of
the bottom side of the sheet.
[Bottom right]
[Bottom right] moves the image to the lower right
corner of the sheet.
Description of the Scan Job Settings
254 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[File] Settings - [Margin erase]
Setting Values Description
[Margin erase] [Binding edge] Margins of a document sometimes contain notes
or punch holes, for example. The machine allows
you to hide these elements on the copy. With the +
and - buttons of the [Binding edge] setting you can
define how much margin of the original you want
to erase. You can enter a value up to 100 mm /
3.94".
[File] Settings - [Exposure]
Setting Values Description
[Exposure] [Dark] You can adjust the settings for light areas and dark
areas on the print separately.
• When an area on the output must be darker,
then select a value of -1 to -3.
• When the area must be lighter, then select a val-
ue of 1 to 3.
[Light] • When the area must be darker, then select a val-
ue of -1 to -3.
• When an area on the output must be lighter,
then select a value of 1 to 3.
[File] Settings - [Color/Black & white]
Setting Values Description
[Color/Black &
white] [Black and white]
Select this setting to make black & white scans.
[Grayscale]
Select this setting to make grayscale scans. When
you select this option, the [Image type] and
[Zoom] functions are disabled. The file type auto-
matically changes into the preferred settings.
[Color]
Select this setting to make color scans.
NOTE
To make color scans, the color scanning
option must be licensed.
[Job name]
Setting Values Description
[Job name] For scan to USB, you can enter a job name.
Description of the Scan Job Settings
Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 255
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[Destination]
Setting Values Description
[Destination] For scan to USB, you can enter the destination of
the scan job on the USB drive. You can select ei-
ther the root of the USB drive, or a new folder
called ScansX, whereby X is an incrementing num-
ber. The first time you use this option, the folder
will be called Scans1.
For the other destinations you select the destina-
tion in the [Destination] field, for example scan to
email or FTP.
[Enter the user code.]
Setting Values Description
[Enter the user
code.]
This setting applies only to scan-to-email jobs. To
use the scan-to-email function, an LDAP server
must be configured. The LDAP server contains a
mapping of unique user codes and email address-
es. When you enter your user code, for example
your employee number or telephone number, the
LDAP server checks if you are a registered user. If
you are a registered user, the system sends the
scan job as an attachment to the corresponding
email address.
This setting is only applicable when you do not
have an address book configured for scan-to-email.
NOTE
The name of this button depends on the
name defined in the scan profile file.
[Account ID]
Setting Values Description
[Account ID] Enter the account ID for the current job. The [Ac-
count ID] setting is only available when the ac-
counting function on the PRISMAsync controller is
enabled.
Description of the Scan Job Settings
256 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Scan to File
NOTE
Scanning mixed size originals is supported.
Procedure
1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face
down on the glass plate.
2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan].
3. Select a scan-to-file profile.
The job window opens.
4. Change the settings for the original and the file.
5. Touch [Start] .
The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to the scan server. The file is
stored with a predefined name in a designated directory. There is no message on the control
panel to inform you that the file was stored successfully. You can access the status information
on the controller.
Scan to File
Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 257
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Scan to Email
Procedure
1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face
down on the glass plate.
2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan].
3. Select a scan profile.
The job window opens.
4. Select email as [Destination].
5. Change the settings for the original and the file.
6. If applicable, change the subject at [Email subject].
A keyboard appears to enter the subject.
7. At [Recipients] enter an email address or user ID.
You can enter more email addresses when you configured this option in the Settings Editor (see
Configure the Settings for Scan to Email
on page 246). Separate the email addresses with a ';'.
You can also select one or more email addresses from the address book, see
Use an address
book for scan to email
on page 259.
When you entered a user ID, the corresponding email address is displayed. You must configure
the connection between ID and email address (see
Configure the Settings for the LDAP Server
on
page 247 and
Use the Address List File (ral.csv)
on page 248).
NOTE
You can create a template for scan to email. See
Create templates to use for recurring
jobs
on page 232.
8. Touch [Start] .
The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to the entered email address
or email addresses.
Scan to Email
258 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Use an address book for scan to email
Introduction
When an address list file (ral.csv also known as address book file; see
Use the Address List File
(ral.csv)
on page 248) is uploaded, you can search and select one or more email addresses via the
control panel. An address book is also available when ldap is configured.
You can also add a new email address.
NOTE
An address book is only available when [Allow scanning to multiple email addresses] is enabled
in the Settings Editor.
Search and select an email address from the address book
1. In the job window of a scan profile, select email as [Destination].
2. Do not enter an email address. Touch [Email address] to open the search on the address
book.
NOTE
When no address list file (ral.csv) is uploaded, the keyboard is displayed to enter an
email address.
3. Enter one or more strings separated with a space. All entries in the address book that contain
any of the strings are displayed in the right-hand column.
4. Touch an email address to select it.
5. Touch [Add to list] to add the email address to the list of recipients.
6. When you want to add another email address, touch [Add]. Go to step 3.
When you have selected all required email addresses, touch [OK] to return to the
[Destination] tile.
Add an email address to the address book
1. In the job window of a scan profile, select email as [Destination].
2. Do not enter an email address. Touch [Email address] to open the search on the address
book.
3. Touch [Add] to add a new email address.
Use an address book for scan to email
Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 259
Canon varioPRINT DP line
4. Enter the email address and a comment. You can use the comment for the name. The
comment is optional.
5. Touch [OK] to return to the [Destination] tile.
Use an address book for scan to email
260 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Scan to USB
Illustration
[52] Scan to USB
Procedure
1. Insert a USB drive into the USB port at the left-hand side of the control panel.
2. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face
down on the glass plate.
3. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Scan to USB].
The job window opens.
4. Change the settings for the original and the file.
5. Touch [Job name] to change the default job name.
Use the keyboard to change the name, then touch [OK].
6. Touch [Destination] to indicate the folder on your USB drive where you want to save the file.
7. If applicable, enter the [Account ID].
8. Touch [Start] .
The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to your USB drive.
9. Touch to eject the USB drive.
10. Remove the USB drive from the control panel when the message [USB drive has been
successfully ejected.] displays.
Scan to USB
Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 261
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Scan to DocBox
Procedure
1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face
down on the glass plate.
2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Copy to DocBox].
The job window opens.
3. Change the settings for the original and the file.
4. Touch [Job name] to change the default job name.
Use the keyboard to change the name, then touch [OK].
5. Touch the [Destination] button.
6. From the drop-down menu, touch [DocBox]
7. Touch the [DocBox] button
8. Touch the DocBox to which you want to scan the job.
9. Touch [OK].
10. Touch [Start] .
The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file (bitmap) to the selected
DocBox.
Scan to DocBox
262 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Scan to SMB
Procedure
1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face
down on the glass plate.
2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Scan to SMB].
The job window opens.
3. Change the settings for the original and the file.
4. Press [Start] .
The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to the shared device.
Scan to SMB
Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 263
Canon varioPRINT DP line
PDF scan job
Introduction
Scan originals to a PDF job that is stored in the DocBox. Now you can use PDF datapath
functionality such as page numbering.
Procedure
1. Place the originals face up into the automatic document feeder (ADF), or place one original face
down on the glass plate.
2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [PDF scan job].
The job window opens.
3. Change the settings for the original and the file. Select the DocBox where the PDF job must be
stored.
4. Touch [Job name] to change the default job name.
Use the keyboard to change the name, then touch [OK].
5. Touch [Start] .
The scanner scans the originals. The system sends the resulting file to the selected DocBox.
In the DocBox you can use PDF datapath functionality such as page numbering.
PDF scan job
264 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Create templates to use for recurring jobs
Introduction
When you regularly carry out identical copy or scan jobs, you can create custom templates for
them. The custom templates contain the default settings for these jobs.
Procedure
1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan].
2. Select an existing copy or scan job template.
You cannot save the [Easy copy job] template as a custom template.
3. Make the required settings for the recurring job.
4. Touch [Save as template] to save the settings to a custom template.
5. Enter the name of the custom template and touch [OK].
6. Touch [Cancel].
The custom template is now available at [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan].
7. To edit the template, touch the custom template for 2 seconds.
You can now select the following options.
• [Rename].
• [Move].
Touch a blue line in front of a template to indicate the new location.
The location of the [Last used] template is set.
• [Delete]
You cannot delete the [Easy copy job] template.
NOTE
Touch the [Last used] template for 2 seconds to save the settings of the last job to a
template.
Create templates to use for recurring jobs
Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 265
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Combine subsets into one file
Introduction
You can copy or scan several sets of originals to one document or file with subsets. With the
optional [Page programming] function, you can add pages, for example, tab sheets, and define
the media and finishing settings for each page and subset.
Procedure
1. Place the first subset face up into the ADF or face down on the glass plate.
2. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> Scan profile -> [Subsets]
3. Define the subset settings for both [Original] and [File].
NOTE
Some settings that you define for the first subset apply to the whole job, the [Type] and
[Resolution] settings, for example. These settings are fixed and are grayed out after
scanning the first subset.
4. Press [Scan].
5. Put the next subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate.
6. Repeat the steps 3 - 5 for all other subsets.
A number indicates the order in which the subsets have been scanned.
NOTE
When you combine 1-sided and 2-sided originals, you can define whether a new subset
must continue on a new sheet or on the previous sheet.
7. Touch [Ready] when the last subset is scanned and processed.
A full overview of all the scanned subsets appears in the right-hand pane. If required, you can
add, insert, delete or edit subsets.
8. If required, use the optional [Page programming] function to insert pages and define the media
and finishing settings per page range.
9. Touch [Ready] again to close the [Page programming] function.
10. Press .
Combine subsets into one file
266 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Optimize the Scan Quality
Introduction
The printer can detect photos, rasters and fine lines on the original. This information is processed
in such a way that the digital result has a high scan quality. This means that in most cases you do
not need to adjust quality settings to get the best result.
Problems and Solutions
Overview of possible scan problems and solutions
Description of the problem Solution
All the pages are upside
down
You placed the originals in the wrong direction into the automatic
document feeder (ADF) or on the glass plate.
Make sure the originals are placed correctly and scan the originals
again.
Every second page is up-
side down
The [Original type] and [Size] settings that you selected do not
correspond with the orientation of the information on the origi-
nals.
Select the correct [Original type] and [Size] settings and scan the
originals again.
All the pages are posi-
tioned sideways
There is more than one explanation for this problem.
• Wrong orientation selected.
• Original feed direction confused with the orientation of the in-
formation on the original.
• The application you use does not process the TIFF/PDF file in
the right way.
Select the correct [Original type] and [Size] settings and scan the
originals again. If the problem remains, the application you use
can be the cause of the problem. Check the results in another ap-
plication.
The information on the
page is too large or too
small
This problem can occur when the size of the original and the se-
lected size of the target scan are not the same. The problem can
also be caused by a (manual) change in the zoom factor.
Check the size of the [Original] and the [File] on the operator panel
and scan the originals again.
The information on the
page is too light or too
dark
You can change the [Exposure] settings to influence the result.
Procedure
1. Place the originals face up into the ADF, or place one original face down on the glass plate.
2. On the control panel, touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan].
3. Select a scan profile.
4. Define the settings for the [Original]
5. From the [Image type] setting, select the correct type of original ([Photo], [Text] or [Mixed])
6. Define the settings for the [File].
7. Select [Exposure].
Optimize the Scan Quality
Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs 267
Canon varioPRINT DP line
8. Select the desired value to change the settings for the [Light] and [Dark]areas on the scan.
[Light]: When the area must be darker, then select a value of -1 to -3. When an area on the output
is light gray but must be white, then select a value of 1 to 3.
[Dark]: When an area on the output is dark gray but must be black, then select a value of -1 to -3.
When the area must be lighter, then select a value of 1 to 3.
9. Press [OK].
Optimize the Scan Quality
268 Chapter 11 - Carry Out Scan Jobs
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 12
Keep the system printing
Use the Schedule (Option)
Introduction to the [Schedule] View
Introduction
The [Schedule] is your daily planning board for print jobs. The [Schedule] helps you to keep the
machine running.
This section shows and describes the main parts of the [Schedule].
NOTE
The descriptions of the colors of the bars and the indication of the required amount of sheets are
only valid for document printing. For streaming jobs , all the bars remain grey until the paper
trays are empty or the output locations are full. Then the machine stops and the bars become
red. Furthermore, the media toolbar does not indicate the required amount of sheets.
NOTE
The descriptions of the colors of the bars and the indication of the required amount of sheets are
only valid for document printing. For streaming jobs , all the bars remain grey until the paper
trays are empty or the output locations are full. Then the machine stops and the bars become
red. Furthermore, the media toolbar does not indicate the required amount of sheets.
Illustration
[53] The [Schedule] view
1. The Jobs Pane
The jobs pane shows the jobs on a timeline. The width of the job corresponds to the (remaining)
print time. A vertical line separates the jobs. The vertical line moves to the left as the printing of a
job progresses.
Use the Schedule (Option)
270 Chapter 12 - Keep the system printing
Canon varioPRINT DP line
An icon and the job name represent a job. The icon indicates the state of the job, for example
printing .
Furthermore, the icon indicates the stop moments of the machine. For example, when the
setting [Confirm start of job] in the workflow profiles (see list of references below) is set to [On] or
when you use the [Stop after job] function.
2. The [Required media] Pane
The [Required media] pane displays the media that are required for each scheduled job. For each
required media, the media properties are displayed (see list of references below). The bars show
the availability of the media. The bars can have the following colors.
The colors of the bars
Color of the bar Description
Green The required media is available.
Orange The media is required in the future, but not available then. For example
because the paper trays do not contain sufficient sheets of the required
media.
Yellow The system cannot determine the exact number of sheets that is availa-
ble in the paper trays.
Red The media is required now, but not available. The job can only start
when you load the required media.
When you print small jobs, the bars for these jobs may not be completely visible. To prevent that
you do not see the status of these small jobs, the operator panel can show the following images.
NOTE
When you set the zoom control (5) to a shorter time-scale, in most cases the operator panel will
display bars for these small jobs.
The possible display of small jobs
Image Description
Green. The required media is available.
Orange. The media is required in the future, but not available then. For
example because the paper trays do not contain sufficient sheets of the
required media.
Red. The media is required now, but not available. The job can only
start when you load the required media.
3. The Media Toolbar
The media toolbar displays the following information for the media that is selected in the
[Required media] pane. Furthermore, the media type toolbar contains the [Load] button to load
and assign the required media.
Introduction to the [Schedule] View
Chapter 12 - Keep the system printing 271
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The icons in the media toolbar
Icon Description
The list of [Required media] shows the required media for the sched-
uled jobs. When the paper module indicator is completely grey, this
means that not one of the required media is available in the paper
trays.
The list of [Required media] shows the required media for the sched-
uled jobs. When a paper tray is highlighted in green, the highlighted
paper tray contains a media that is required by one of the scheduled
jobs.
The list of [Required media] shows the required media for the sched-
uled jobs. When a paper tray is highlighted in blue, the highlighted pa-
per tray contains the media that is also highlighted in blue in the list of
[Required media].
4. The Output Locations Pane
The output locations pane displays the output locations that are required for the scheduled jobs.
The bars show the availability of the output locations. The bars can have the following colors.
The colors of the bars
Color of the bar Description
Green The output location is required and available.
Orange The output location is required in the future, but not available then. For
example, because the output location will be full soon.
Red The output location is required now, but not available. For example, be-
cause the output location is full.
Gray The output location is required, but availability is unknown.
5. The Zoom Control
The zoom control enables you to adjust the time scale visible in the [Schedule]. When you touch
the zoom button, a drop-down list appears. Then you can select the desired time scale (five
minutes - eight hours).
Introduction to the [Schedule] View
272 Chapter 12 - Keep the system printing
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Load Media via the [Schedule] View
Introduction
When the [Schedule] view is available on your printer, you can load and assign the required
media directly in the [Schedule] section.
NOTE
When you load a different media size, you must also set the paper guides inside the paper tray
to the correct dimensions. You cannot change the media size for the internal bulk trays one and
two. These are preset to a fixed media size. To switch to another media size for the bulk trays,
these trays must be adapted manually first.
Illustration
[54] Load the media
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch the button for the media you want to load, for example Special A4.
2. Press [Load].
The [Trays] view appears.
3. On the screen, touch the paper tray where you want to load the media.
4. Touch [OK] to open the paper tray.
5. Load the media into the paper tray.
The system assumes you loaded the selected media type, in this example Special A4. The system
will automatically assign Special A4 to that paper tray.
NOTE
You can always change the assigned media type later by touching the [Assign] button.
6. Gently close the paper tray.
Load Media via the [Schedule] View
Chapter 12 - Keep the system printing 273
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The Dashboard
Introduction
The dashboard is the upper part of the control panel. The dashboard is always visible,
irrespective of the current view. The dashboard shows the following.
• The status of the system.
• The status of the supplies.
• The status of the finishers.
• The current process.
• Instructions for the operator.
• The [Resume] button after you stopped the printer.
Illustration
The following illustration shows the dashboard while the machine is busy. The vertical status bar
is green. No action is required.
32
14
The following illustration shows the dashboard while the machine is busy. The vertical status bar
is orange. Next to the status bar, the dashboard displays a message that indicates which action is
required soon.
32
14
The Parts of the Dashboard
The dashboard
Number Function
1 Display the status of the machine, for example [Initializing...], [Printing...] or
[Printing will stop...]. Each status message can have a sub-message with addi-
tional information.
2 Display the file name of the current job (for document printing) or current stream
(for stream printing). Furthermore, the progress of the current job is displayed.
For document printing, the counter can display the following information.
• Set X of Y
• Sheet X of Y or Sheet X.
X represents the current status of the print job. Y represents the total number of
sets or sheets of a print job.
When the sorting method for a job is set to [By set] the dashboard displays the
set count (Set X of Y).
If the sorting method for a job is set to [By page], or when you print stream jobs,
the dashboard only displays a sheet count. 4
The Dashboard
274 Chapter 12 - Keep the system printing
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Number Function
3 Display the action that you must do now or soon. The colors of the vertical status
bar at the left-hand side match the colors of the LED on the control panel and the
operator attention light. When the color is orange or red, a message indicates the
required action.
Orange means that action is required soon. How long before an upcoming action
the control panel starts to display the message depends on the defined warning
time.
Red means that action is required now.
4 • Display that maintenance is required soon or immediately
• Display the status of the finishers.
• Display the status of the staple cartridges.
• Display the status of the toner reservoir.
NOTE
The dashboard can only display one message at a time. When there are more messages, the
dashboard displays the first required or most important message. The dashboard indicates that
there are more messages. Touch this message to display all other messages.
The Dashboard
Chapter 12 - Keep the system printing 275
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The Operator Attention Light
Introduction
The operator attention light on top of the printer helps you to monitor the status of the printer
from a distance. The colors of the lights match the printer status that the dashboard displays.
Illustration
[55] The operator attention light
Status Colors
The status colors of the operator attention light
Color Description
Red The machine has stopped, for example because a required media
type is not available or an error has occurred.
Operator attention is required now.
Orange The machine will stop soon, for example because more paper is
required.
Operator attention is required soon.
The orange light illuminates when the machine reaches the warn-
ing time. The warning time is a time you can set to determine
when the orange light must illuminate. You can set the warning
time in the [System] section of the operator panel.
By factory default, the warning time is set to 10 minutes. So 10 mi-
nutes before operator attention is required, the orange light will il-
luminate.
Green The machine is busy printing. The machine can print longer than
the set warning time.
Operator attention is not required.
All lights off The machine is idle. There are no jobs scheduled for printing.
The Operator Attention Light
276 Chapter 12 - Keep the system printing
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Remote Monitor
Description
NOTE
Remote Monitor requires a license.
Remote Monitor is a web application that you can access via a URL from a remote PC. The
application shows part of the operator panel with up-to-date status information, for example
about how long the printer can continue printing without operator intervention.
Remote Monitor also has an alert function. The Remote Monitor window will automatically pop
up on your PC monitor when the printer status changes from 'running' (attention light is green) to
'stopped' (attention light is red) or 'going to stop' (attention light is orange).
For confidentiality reasons, Remote Monitor does not display job information.
NOTE
The time zone of the remote PC must be the same as the time zone of the printer.
Specifications
Remote Monitor specifications
URL to access Remote Monitor http://<printername or IP address>/remoteinfo
https://<printername or IP address>/remoteinfo
Recommended resolution of your
computer screen
Minimum 640 x 480 pixels
Supported web browsers • Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 8 and higher
•Mozilla Firefox® 10 and higher
• Google Chrome™ 17 and higher
•Apple Safari® 6 and higher
Language As defined in your browser, as long as the printer sup-
ports this language
Update frequency Every 5 seconds
Time line Fixed (30 minutes)
Printer information displayed • Host name
• System mode
• Status panel
• Attention light
• Operator instruction
• Time line
Remote Monitor
Chapter 12 - Keep the system printing 277
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Remote Monitor
278 Chapter 12 - Keep the system printing
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 13
Media Handling
Introduction
Introduction to the Media Handling
Media Handling
During printing, the printer can draw sheets from any tray that contains the required media for
that sheet in the job. You can open any tray while the system is running to add paper. The tray
opens as soon as possible without causing a paper jam. If the required media is available in other
trays, printing continues. Otherwise, printing stops.
Reload behavior
If you open and close a tray, and the slider position in the tray is consistent with the media type
previously configured for that tray, then the system assumes that the media type has not
changed. Otherwise, the system prompts you to assign a new media type to the tray.
Media assignment through the control panel
The control panel enables you to assign a specific media type to a tray at any time. You can select
the media to be assigned from the media catalogue and from the temporary media types. When
the print jobs require media that are not included in the media catalogue, these media become
temporary media on the system.
Supported media types per paper tray
All paper trays, except the internal bulk trays one and two, can be configured as desired.
The internal bulk trays one and two only support A4, LTR and B5. There is no sensor on these
trays that can detect the configuration. When you open and close these bulk trays, the
assumption is that the size is not changed. To load a different media size, the bulk trays must be
adjusted first.
What is the Media Catalog
The print system uses a central media catalog from which you can select media for jobs. The
[Media catalog] is a list of predefined media and media attributes which you can define in the
Settings Editor application on the controller. When enabled in the Settings Editor you can also
define the [Media catalog] on the control panel. The use of the [Media catalog] is only
recommended, not compulsory.
When you use the media catalog, the control panel, the printer drivers and other applications all
display the same list of predefined media. The control panel and the printer driver automatically
retrieve and display the latest version of the media catalog.
What are Temporary Media
You can also use many other media that are not included in the media catalog. These media
become temporary media. You can look up the currently used temporary media in the [Media]
section of the [System] view. Furthermore, you can assign the temporary media to a paper tray.
The temporary media remain available on the system until:
• No more waiting jobs need this media type
• No more scheduled jobs need this media type
• No more printed jobs need this media type
• No more DocBox jobs need this media type
• This media type is no longer available in the paper trays.
Introduction
280 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
If you plan to use these media more often, you can add these temporary media to the media
catalog;
Add Temporary Media to the Media Catalog
on page 291.
Introduction to the Media Handling
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 281
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Introduction to the [Trays] View
Introduction
The [Trays] view has the following functions.
• Display the current content and filling level of the paper trays
• Open the paper trays and assign the media to paper trays
• Change the media that is currently assigned to a paper tray.
The Items of the [Trays] View
1
23456
[56] Example of a configuration with 1 external paper module
Num‐
ber
Item Function
1 Content of the paper trays Indicate the current content and filling level of the paper
trays. The [Trays] view displays the parameters of the
media that are currently in the paper trays. The parame-
ters are a combination of icons and texts.
2 [Assign] button Assign media from the media catalogue.
3 [Unassign] button Unassign media from the paper tray.
4 [Open] button Open the selected paper tray to load the media.
5 [Registration] button Perform a media registration on the selected media.
6 Arrow buttons When your configuration contains more paper modules
than the [Trays] view can display in one screen, you can
touch the arrow buttons to change the part of the ma-
chine displayed.
Introduction to the [Trays] View
282 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The paper tray information
The [Trays] view displays the following textual information for each paper tray.
• The media name, for example 'Normal paper'.
• The media size, for example A4 or LTR.
• The media weight, for example 80 g/m² or 20 lb bond.
• The media color
• The special characteristics of the media, for example [cyclic] or [punched]. In brackets,
additional information is given about these media, for example the cycle count or the number
of holes for punched media.
The [Trays] view displays the following icons for each paper tray.
The meaning of the icons
Icon Description
The paper tray is empty.
The paper tray is full.
NOTE
Each line indicates the presence of about 100 sheets.
The paper tray is too full. Remove sheets from the stack.
The plate inside the paper tray is down.
The paper tray is open.
The paper guides inside the paper tray do not match the selected me-
dia size. You must correct the paper guides or the selected media.
or
The paper tray contains media that are fed over the long edge or
short edge . The small icons indicate A4/LTR or A4/LTR-like media.
The large icons indicate A3/Tabloid or A3/Tabloid-like media. When you
defined a color for a media, the icon can have that color.
The paper tray is in use for one or more scheduled jobs.
The paper tray contains tab sheets.
The paper tray contains tab sheets that must be processed as inserts.
The paper tray contains inserts.
The paper tray contains media that are fed over the long edge.
The paper tray contains media that are fed over the short edge.
Introduction to the [Trays] View
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 283
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Introduction to the [Media] Section
Introduction
The [System] view gives access to system settings, system information, media information and
maintenance tasks.
This section gives an overview of the [Media] section in the [System] view.
Overview of the [Media] section
The print system uses a central media catalog from which you can select media for jobs.
Correctly defined media attributes are important in order to ensure high print quality.
When enabled in the Settings Editor, you can add, delete and change media in the media catalog
via the control panel.
The items of the [Media] section; [Media management via control panel] disabled
When [Media management via control panel] is disabled you can only view the media catalog.
[57] Overview of the [Media] section; [Media management via control panel] disabled
Item Function
1 [Registration] button Touch the [Registration] button after selecting a media
from the media catalog to start a registration procedure
for that media.
2 [To catalog] button Touch the [To catalog] button after selecting a tempora-
ry media to add that media to the media catalogue.
Add Temporary Media to the Media Catalog
on
page 291 4
Introduction to the [Media] Section
284 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Item Function
3 List of all the media that
are available in the media
catalog.
The list displays the current content of the media cata-
log.
4 List of temporary media The list displays the temporary media that are currently
available on the system.
What are Temporary Media
on page 280
The items of the [Media] section; [Media management via control panel] enabled
When [Media management via control panel] is enabled you can add, delete and change media in
the media catalogue via the control panel.
1
234 5
[58] Overview of the [Media] section; [Media management via control panel] enabled
Num‐
ber
Item Function More information
1 • List of all the media that
are available in the [Me-
dia catalog].
• List of temporary media
• List of all media
• Display the current con-
tent of the [Media cata-
log].
• Display the temporary
media that are currently
available on the system .
• Display the [Media cata-
log] and the temporary
media.
What are Temporary Media
on page 280
4
Introduction to the [Media] Section
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 285
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Num‐
ber
Item Function More information
2 Media management Manage the media catalog:
• Add (new, copy)
• Edit
• Delete
• Optimize
• [To catalog] (only for
temporary media)
• Add
Add media to the media
catalog
on page 290
• Optimize
Media Registration
on
page 311
• [To catalog]
Add Temporary Media
to the Media Catalog
on
page 291
3 Search button for the me-
dia.
Search through the list of
media.
4 Select which media you
want to display.
[Media catalog], temporary
media or all media.
5 Filter the media. • Filter the list of media
on:
• Media size
• Media weight
• Clear the filters
Introduction to the [Media] Section
286 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Media Related Actions
Open a Tray and Load Media Using the Paper Tray Button
Introduction
Besides loading media via the [Load] button in the [Schedule] view, there are two ways to open a
tray and to load and assign media:
1. Through the softkey for the [Trays] view at the bottom of the control panel.
2. Through the paper tray button at the right-hand side of the control panel.
In both cases, the control panel displays an overview of the printer and the paper trays. Now you
can open a tray, and load and assign media.
This section describes the use of the paper tray button .
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you remove the packaging carefully from the paper because glue stains on the
paper can pollute the machine. To prevent pollution, it is advised to remove the first and the last
sheet of a pack of paper. In case of pollution of the machine, you must carry out the drum
cleaning procedure via the Maintenance section on the control panel.
NOTE
You only have to assign the media to a paper tray when you change the media type for that
paper tray. For example, when the paper tray previously contained Normal A4 and you load
Coated A4 now. Then you have to assign Coated A4 to that paper tray.
NOTE
You can order all required supplies from your local authorized dealer.
Procedure
1. Press the paper tray button at the right-hand side of the control panel.
2. On the control panel, touch the tray in which you want to load the media.
3. Touch [Open] to open the selected tray.
4. Load the media into the tray (header up, face up).
5. When you loaded a different media type than the media previously contained in the selected
paper tray, touch [Assign media].
6. Select the correct media type from the media catalogue.
7. Press [OK].
8. Press [Done].
9. Close the paper tray gently by pushing in the middle of the tray cover.
Media Related Actions
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 287
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Load and Assign Media Using the [Trays] Softkey
Introduction
Besides loading media via the [Load] button in the [Schedule] view, there are two ways to open a
tray and to load and assign media:
1. Through the softkey for the [Trays] view at the bottom of the control panel.
2. Through the tray hardkey at the right-hand side of the control panel.
In both cases, the control panel displays an overview of the printer and the paper trays. Now you
can open a tray, and load and assign media.
This section describes the use of the softkey for the [Trays] view.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you remove the packaging carefully from the paper because glue stains on the
paper can pollute the machine. In case of pollution of the machine, you must carry out the drum
cleaning procedure via the Maintenance section on the control panel.
NOTE
You only have to assign the media to a paper tray when you change the media type for that
paper tray. For example, when the paper tray previously contained Normal A4 and you load
Coated A4 now. Then you have to assign Coated A4 to that paper tray.
NOTE
You can order all required supplies at your local authorized dealer.
Illustration
[59] Load and assign media using the [Trays] softkey
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Trays].
2. Touch the paper tray where you want to put the media.
3. Press [Open].
Load and Assign Media Using the [Trays] Softkey
288 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
4. Load the new media.
5. Close the paper tray gently by pushing in the middle of the tray cover.
6. Press [Assign].
A list of media from the Media catalogue appears. The list displays all the media in the Media
catalogue that match the position of the paper guides inside the closed paper tray. When the list
is empty, the media catalog does not contain media that match the position of the paper guides.
7. Touch the new media type.
8. Press [OK].
Load and Assign Media Using the [Trays] Softkey
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 289
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Add media to the media catalog
When enabled in the Settings Editor, you can add new media to the media catalog via the control
panel.
[60] Media management via the control panel
Procedure
1. Touch [System] -> [Media].
2. Use one of the following methods to add new media.
• Touch [Copy] to use one of the current media definitions as starting point and copy its
attributes to the new media definitions.
• Touch [New] to define all attributes from scratch.
• Touch [New] -> [Import from media library] to import a media with correct media attributes
from the media library.
3. If required, define the name and attributes of the new media.
For convenient retrieval of media in the media catalog, use the following media attributes:
• Name
• Custom type name
IMPORTANT
For optimal print quality, define the correct values for the following media attributes.
Refer to the packaging of the media for this information.
• Size
• Weight
• Surface type
4. Touch [OK].
Add media to the media catalog
290 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Add Temporary Media to the Media Catalog
Introduction
When a job is submitted that requires media that are not included in the media catalog, these
media become temporary media. The control panel displays the temporary media in the
following places.
• In the list of [Required media] in the [Schedule] view, when the job is scheduled for printing.
• In the list of [Temporary media] in the [Media] tab of the [System] view.
When you plan to use a temporary media more often, you can add the media to the media
catalog.
This section describes how to add temporary media to the media catalog.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Media].
The names of the temporary media are displayed in the [Temporary media] section.
2. Select the media you want to add to the media catalog.
3. Press [To catalog].
The media is added to the media catalog.
NOTE
If required, you can edit the attributes of the media in the media catalog, that is part of
the Settings Editor.
Add Temporary Media to the Media Catalog
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 291
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Media indicators Black & White
Media is displayed on several locations of the control panel. Extra information about the media is
displayed by icons.
Icon Description
The media is required for a job in the list of scheduled jobs or list of waiting
jobs.
The media is loaded into a paper tray.
The media is used in a scheduled job and loaded into a paper tray.
The warning icon indicates that the media definition needs attention. Check
if all important attributes are defined.
Media indicators Black & White
292 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Use the Separation Enhancer
Introduction
The separation enhancer improves the separation performance of specific media, such as coated
media. The table below gives recommendations about the use of the separation enhancer.
To prevent the risk of double sheet separations, it is advised to remove the separation enhancer
in all other situations.
The trays three and four both contain a separation enhancer. You can use the separation
enhancer in all the trays.
When to use the separation enhancer
Media formats Coated media types All other media types
Small formats: A4, LTR, 16K, B5, US Standard > 100 g/m² (28 lb
bond)
Never
Large formats: (A3, SRA3, A3+, 8K, B4, Legal) Always > 160 g/m² (60 lb cov-
er)
NOTE
Only deviate from the recommendations above when the printer repeatedly stops while the
operator panel displays the error code ORE147x1.
Illustration
[61] The separation enhancer
Procedure
Install the separation enhancer
Step Action Remarks
1 Touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Go
to maintenance tasks] -> [Separation en-
hancer] -> [Start]. 4
Use the Separation Enhancer
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 293
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Remarks
2 [Open the tray (tray 3 or 4) and loosen the
separation enhancer.]
[Place the separation enhancer in the sep-
aration unit.]
3 [Lock the separation enhancer.]
Use the Separation Enhancer
294 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray
Introduction
The bulk trays are designed to contain the media that you frequently use a lot. Therefore, the
paper guides inside the bulk trays are set to a fixed media size.
However, if you want to use a different media size with a bulk tray, you must do the following.
• Reposition the paper guides of the bulk tray manually to match the new media size, and
• Assign the changed media size to the corresponding bulk tray.
Before you begin
1. Touch the paper tray button at the right-hand side of the control panel.
2. On the control panel, touch the bulk tray of which you want to adjust the size.
3. On the control panel, touch [Open] to open the selected bulk tray.
Required tools
Socket wrench
Illustration
[62] Required tools
Procedure
Adjust the bulk tray
Step Action Illustration
1 [Remove the paper.]
4
Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 295
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
2 [Use the socket wrench to loosen the bolt
at the back side.]
3 [Remove the top paper guide.]
4
Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray
296 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
4 [Turn the side paper guide out of the
slots.]
4
Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 297
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
5 [Place the side paper guide. Align the 4
pins with the desired slots.]
4
Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray
298 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
6 [Place the top paper guide. Align the 4
pins with the desired slot.]
7 [Use the socket wrench to tighten the
bolt.]
8 [Adjust other side]
Repeat the previous steps for the front
side.
4
Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 299
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
9 [Check if all plates are aligned with the
corresponding size marks.]
10 [Close the tray.]
11 In the [Trays] view on the control panel,
assign the new media size to the bulk
tray.
Adjust the Size of the Bulk Tray
300 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Adjust the Size of the optional Bulk Tray for small Format
Introduction
The bulk trays are designed to contain the media that you frequently use a lot. Therefore, the
paper guides inside the bulk trays are set to a fixed media size.
When the optional bulk tray for small format is installed, you can adjust the size of the bulk tray to
A5 or Statement.
NOTE
When you want to adjust the size of the bulk tray from A5 or Statement to A4 or Letter, remove
the A5 paper guide plates. Change the media size for the selected bulk tray. Assign the new
media.
Required tools
Socket wrench
Procedure
1. Touch the paper tray button at the right-hand side of the control panel.
2. On the control panel, touch the bulk tray of which you want to adjust the size.
3. On the control panel, touch [Open] to open the selected bulk tray.
Adjust the Size of the optional Bulk Tray for small Format
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 301
Canon varioPRINT DP line
4. Place the paper guide plates for small format over the existing paper guide plates.
5. Use the socket wrench to tighten the bolts.
6. Close the tray.
7. Change the media size for the selected bulk tray. [System] -> [Setup] -> [System configuration]
(under [Advanced]) -> [System settings] -> [Bulk tray 1 media size] or [Bulk tray 2 media size].
8. In the [Trays] view on the control panel, assign the new media to the bulk tray.
Adjust the Size of the optional Bulk Tray for small Format
302 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Use the JIS B5 Adapter (Option)
When to do
When you place small media with a short edge of 182 mm - 203 mm (7.2" - 8.0") in the bulk trays
of an external paper module, especially JIS B5.
Before you begin
1. Open a bulk tray of an external paper module.
2. Remove the current media from that bulk tray.
3. Place the media.
Required tools
1 JIS B5 adapter
Procedure
Place and remove the adapter
Step Action Illustration
1 Place the adapter over the
front slider at the right-
hand side.
2 Slide the adapter against
the media.
4
Use the JIS B5 Adapter (Option)
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 303
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
3 When you place a larger
media type, make sure that
you remove the adapter.
NOTE
Do not store the
adapter inside
the paper tray.
Otherwise, an er-
ror can occur.
Use the JIS B5 Adapter (Option)
304 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Process Special Media
Process Pre-Printed Media and Use of the [Pre-printed mode]
Setting
Introduction
The system is able to handle pre-printed media without problems if the guidelines regarding pre-
printed media and inks are taken into account. In case media or inks are used that are not listed in
the guidelines, the use of pre-printed media can lead to undesired print quality issues. To prevent
print quality issues, a [Pre-printed mode] function is available on the printer. It is advised to
enable the [Pre-printed mode] when there are problems with processing pre-printed media. The
system will then be cleaned at fixed intervals. It is advised to enable the [Pre-printed mode] only
when you process pre-printed media. Afterwards, the function should be disabled.
NOTE
Contact your local authorized dealer for the latest guidelines.
Illustration
[63] The [Pre-printed mode] setting
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Advanced media settings] (under [Advanced]).
2. Touch the [Pre-printed mode] button.
Process Special Media
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 305
Canon varioPRINT DP line
3. Press [On].
NOTE
Make sure that you put the [Pre-printed mode] setting back to [Off] when you have
finished using pre-printed media.
4. Press [OK].
NOTE
The text on the [Advanced media settings] button has changed into [Custom], which
indicates that a default setting in the [Advanced media settings] section has changed.
Result
The pre-printed mode is active. At the right-hand side of the dashboard the following icon is
displayed.
Process Pre-Printed Media and Use of the [Pre-printed mode] Setting
306 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Process Wax Paper and Use of the [Wax mode] Setting
Introduction
Wax paper and print quality issues
During the production process of paper, in most cases a chemical is added to enable writing on
the paper.
Paper that contains this chemical that leads to pollution inside the system is called wax paper.
The paper is called wax paper because the pollution is a wax-like substance inside the system.
The pollution can lead to undesired print quality issues. To prevent or solve this so-called wax
problem, a [Wax mode] function is available on the printer. It is advised to use the [Wax mode] in
case of problems with processing wax paper. Then the system will be cleaned automatically after
printing wax paper. It is advised to enable the [Wax mode] only when you process wax paper.
Afterwards, the function should be disabled.
The wax modes
The printer has two wax modes that help you to solve print quality issues with wax paper. Each
wax mode consists of two steps:
1. Safe preheating of the system to prevent the deposition of wax.
2. After printing, the printer remains in the stand-by mode to decompose the remaining wax.
Differences between wax mode [1] and [2]
• Wax mode [2] requires a higher start-up temperature, which increases the start-up time of the
printer.
• Wax mode [2] requires more time for the decomposition of the wax.
Important information about the cleaning process
The more wax paper you print, the longer the printer needs to decompose the wax. For an
optimal performance of the wax mode, do not print more than 50,000 sheets of wax paper. If you
must print more, first let the printer run in stand-by mode to decompose the wax, or carry out
print jobs that do not require wax paper.
After processing wax paper, do not switch off the printer manually or put the printer into the
sleep mode manually. Leave the printer in stand by-mode to allow the cleaning of the wax
components. After maximum 2 hours in the stand-by mode, the printer will switch to the sleep
mode automatically. If these two hours were not enough to decompose all the wax, the machine
remains stand-by after the next job, until all the wax is cleaned.
When to do
• Select wax mode [1] when you have print quality issues with wax paper.
• Only select wax mode [2] when wax mode [1] is not sufficient to solve the print quality issues.
Process Wax Paper and Use of the [Wax mode] Setting
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 307
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Illustration
[64] The [Wax mode] setting
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you put the [Wax mode] setting back to [Off] when you have finished using wax
paper.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Advanced media settings] (under [Advanced]).
2. Touch the [Wax mode] button.
3. Touch [1] or [2].
4. Touch [OK].
The text on the [Advanced media settings] button has changed into [Custom]. This indicates that
a default setting in the [Advanced media settings] section has changed.. The control panel does
not display any other reminder that helps you to remember that the [Wax mode] setting is active.
Process Wax Paper and Use of the [Wax mode] Setting
308 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Deal with Paper Dust and Use of the [Paper quality] Setting
Introduction
Good paper is best run with the highest paper quality factor: [Normal].
Lower grade media such as recycled paper can leave more paper dust in the machine. This can
lead to uneven, dark areas on prints with ghosts (echos) of previous pages. If necessary, you can
improve the print quality by decreasing the value of the [Paper quality] setting to [Low] or
[Lower].
When to do
1. Decrease the [Paper quality] from [Normal] to [Low] when the use of lower grade media
causes quality issues.
2. Decrease the [Paper quality] from [Low] to [Lower] when the quality issues are not solved by
using the [Low] mode.
NOTE
When you change a value of the [Paper quality] setting, a restart of the printer is required. The
restart takes 2-3 minutes.
Illustration
[65] The [Paper quality] setting
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you put the [Paper quality] setting back to [Normal] when you have finished
using fiber-rich media.
Deal with Paper Dust and Use of the [Paper quality] Setting
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 309
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Advanced media settings] (under [Advanced]).
2. Touch the [Paper quality] button.
3. Touch [Low] or [Lower].
4. Press [OK].
The text on the [Advanced media settings] button has changed into [Custom]. This indicates that
a default setting in the [Advanced media settings] section has changed. The control panel does
not display any other reminder that helps you to remember that the [Paper quality] setting is
active.
Deal with Paper Dust and Use of the [Paper quality] Setting
310 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Media Registration
When to Perform a Media Registration
Examples of when to Perform Media Registration
Introduction
Media registration is an indication for how accurately an image is positioned on a sheet of paper.
The position and the form of a printed image can differ slightly from the original image or the
digital image. Possible causes:
• Printer component tolerances.
• Media size tolerances.
Possible causes:
• Inaccuracies during the paper production, or
• The relative humidity or temperature of the environment in which the paper is stored and
used.
• Media type (glossy media, for example).
• Job type (1-sided or 2-sided).
• Feed direction (LEF or SEF)
• A change of media supplier.
• A new batch of media.
The different properties of media can influence the alignment of images when the media are
printed. This section gives examples of situations when media registration can be required.
NOTE
• It is recommended to check the media registration after every 500,000 prints.
• After a software upgrade, you must verify the media registration.
• When you copy the media catalog from one printer to another, you must verify the media
registration because the media registration depends on the printer and on the media.
• The situations described are only examples. There are more situations possible when media
registration must be performed.
Example 1 - Images and Text
When you print images and text on a sheet, the following deviations can occur:
The lines on the front and back are not aligned
(front-to-back side registration).
4
Media Registration
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 311
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The image is not in the center of the sheet
(shifted image).
The image is skewed (skewed image).
The image is tilted (diamond shape image).
4
Examples of when to Perform Media Registration
312 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
The top of the image is smaller than the bot-
tom of the image, or the other way around
(trapezoid shape image).
The image is reduced or shrunk in the feed di-
rection (elongation).
NOTE
Combinations of two or more deviations can occur.
Examples of when to Perform Media Registration
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 313
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Example 2 - Forms
When you print text on forms, the text must be printed in the designated area. For example, an
address or a date must be printed at the correct position. Here you see an example where the
printed date is not positioned correctly.
23-10-2012 Océ Technologies B.V.
St-Urbanusweg
Venlo, Limburg
Netherlands
5900 MA
Phone: 111-222-3333
Fax: 111-222-4444
www.oce.com
Date:
Ordered By
Company:
Address:
State/Province:
Zip/Postal Code:
Phone:
Fax:
Contact Name:
Deliver To Same as Above
Company:
Address:
State/Province:
Zip/Postal Code:
Phone:
Fax:
Contact Name:
Item Description Quantity Unit Price Amount
Sub-total
Grand Total
Payment
Check payable to
Credit Card
American Express
Mastercard
Visa
Card Number:
Expiration Date:
Cardholder Name:
Data is not secure.
Internal Use Only
Order
Completed:
Ship Date:
Order Form
Examples of when to Perform Media Registration
314 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
How to Perform a Media Registration
Media Registration Quick Start
Introduction
This section gives a general description on how to perform a media registration. A detailed
description is given in the sections that follow.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, select the media for which you want to perform the media registration.
You can start a media registration from the trays view (touch [Trays] -> [Optimize]), or from
the media catalog (touch [System] -> [Media]). There you can select the required media.
[66] Perform the media registration via the trays view
How to Perform a Media Registration
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 315
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[67] Perform the media registration via the media catalog
2. Touch [Registration].
3. When you start a media registration from the media catalog, select the feed direction for
which you want to perform the media registration. The media registration can be different for
LEF and SEF.
When you start a media registration from the trays view, the feed direction is already
selected.
If the printer is not warmed up, the media registration starts by warming up the printer.
4. Select [Correction of shift / zoom] or [Manual registration]. It is recommended to start with the
automatic media registration adjustment.
At [Correction of shift / zoom], touch [Start].
When you select [Manual registration], go to step 8.
5. Follow the instructions on the control panel to scan the printed registration sheets.
6. You can verify the result of the automatic registration adjustment on the verification chart.
Touch [Print verification chart] to print the verification chart.
NOTE
Depending on the media type and the media size, the dots, circles and lines on the
verification chart do not have to match perfectly.
7. If you perceive that the media registration is not optimal, you must perform a manual media
registration adjustment. But after automatic media registration, the media registration is
optimal in almost all cases.
At the [Manual registration], touch [Start].
8. In the manual registration adjustment, you can adjust the registration parameters for the front
side and the back side separately. Only use [Advanced settings] in exceptional cases. Use
[Advanced settings] carefully because these settings influence each other.
Media Registration Quick Start
316 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
A detailed description is given in the sections that follow.
NOTE
X means an adjustment in the feed direction.
Z means an adjustment perpendicular to the feed direction.
9. You can verify the result of the manual registration adjustment on the verification chart.
Touch [Print verification chart] to print the verification chart.
NOTE
• Depending on the media type and the media size, the dots, circles and lines on
the verification chart do not have to match perfectly.
• You can also perform a manual media registration via the Settings Editor. The
manual media registration via the control panel is preferred because you can
print the verification chart immediately after you changed a setting.
Media Registration Quick Start
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 317
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Order of the Media Registration Actions
Introduction
When the media registration is not optimal, you can take various actions to solve the
misalignment. This section describes the order of the actions you must take.
Media Registration Options
Procedure
Option Where Scope When
Automatic media registration
via the control panel.
See
Media-Specific Registration
on page 321.
Control
panel
Specific me-
dia
Media registration is not opti-
mal.
Manual media registration.
Only needed in incidental cases.
The manual media registration
can be done via the control pan-
el (see
Via the Control Panel
on
page 326) and via the Settings
Editor.
The manual media registration
via the control panel is prefer-
red because you can print the
verification chart immediately
after you changed a setting.
Both procedures have the same
result.
Control
panel (pre-
ferred)
Settings
Editor
Specific me-
dia
Only when the media registra-
tion is not optimal after you per-
formed the automatic media
registration via the control pan-
el.
Or when the media is 1-sided
media, because the automatic
media registration prints a 2-si-
ded registration print. Examples
of 1-sided media are tab sheets
and transparency media with
paper backing.
If the printer is not warmed up, the media registration starts by warming up the printer.
After you performed one of the media registration options, you can print a verification chart to
verify the media registration adjustment. See
Print the Verification Chart for Media Registration
on page 319.
It can occur that the media registration for a media is correct but the image overlaps some
preprinted parts of the media. You must shift the image for that specific preprinted media (see
Corrections for Preprinted Media
on page 345).
Order of the Actions
Procedure
1. Perform the automatic media registration on the control panel for the media of your current job.
Print the job again or print the verification chart to verify if the media registration is correct now.
If the media registration is not optimal, continue with step 2 below.
2. Perform a manual media registration adjustment via the control panel (preferred) or via the
Settings Editor. Only needed in incidental cases. E.g. media registration is not optimal, media is
1-sided.
Order of the Media Registration Actions
318 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Print the Verification Chart for Media Registration
Introduction
You can print the verification chart on a specific media to verify if the media registration for that
specific media is optimal.
NOTE
You cannot print the verification chart on media that you can only print 1-sided because the
verification chart is 2-sided. Use your own job to verify if the media registration is optimal.
Examples of 1-sided media are tab sheets and transparency media with paper backing.
Before you begin
Before you print the verification chart, make sure that the printer is warmed up. The printer must
have printed for at least 20 minutes.
[68] Front side (circles) and back side (dots) of the verification chart for media registration
Print the Verification Chart for Media Registration
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 319
Canon varioPRINT DP line
[69] Print the verification chart via the trays view
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [Trays].
2. Select the media via the tray that contains the media.
3. Touch [Optimize] -> [Registration].
4. You can also select the media via the media catalog.
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Media] to open the media catalog.
2. Select the media from the media catalog for which you want to print the verification chart for
media registration.
3. Touch [Registration].
4. Select the feed direction for which you want to print the verification chart.
5. Touch [Print the verification chart].
The verification chart is printed and you can verify the media registration for the selected media.
The verification chart has an optimal result when the paper path is filled. Therefore three blank
sheets precede the verification chart and two blank sheets are delivered after the verification
chart is printed.
You are not charged for the blank sheets.
Result
You must use the lines in the corners of the verification chart to measure the registration for
manual registration adjustment.
Print the Verification Chart for Media Registration
320 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Option 1 - Automatic Media Registration Adjustment
Media-Specific Registration
When to do
When the media registration for a specific media is not optimal.
You can start a media-specific registration from the trays view or from the media catalog. First,
the steps of the media registration procedure are described in general.
NOTE
• The media-specific registration overwrites any automatic or manual media-specific
registration performed previously.
• You cannot perform media-specific registration for temporary media. You must add the
temporary media to the media catalogue first.
• You cannot perform an automatic adjustment for media that you can only print 1-sided,
because the adjustment procedure prints 2-sided registration sheets. Examples of 1-sided
media are tab sheets and transparency media with paper backing. For these media, you must
perform a manual media registration.
• It is recommended to perform the media registration when the list of [Scheduled jobs] is
empty. Otherwise, other jobs can start printing while the media registration takes place.
NOTE
• When the media is larger than the glass plate (larger than 420 mm (16.5") in X direction (feed
direction) and / or larger than 297 mm (11.7") in Z direction (perpendicular to the feed
direction)), you can still perform media specific registration. The information needed for the
automatic adjustment is within the range of the glass plate. You must only enter the actual
sheet size via the manual adjustment for this media. The scanner cannot detect the actual
sheet size and assumes the nominal sheet size.
Option 1 - Automatic Media Registration Adjustment
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 321
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Media Registration Procedure
1. The system prints a number of registration sheets.
2. Scan the printed registration sheets one by one. First the front side, then the back side.
3. The systems calculates the registration adjustment parameters.
4. The system sets the calculated parameters as default registration parameters for this specific
media.
Start a Media-Specific Registration via the Trays View
1. On the control panel, touch [Trays] to open the trays view.
2. Select the media for which you want to perform the media registration.
3. Touch [Optimize] -> [Registration].
When the media is larger than 420 mm (16.5") in X direction (feed direction) you get a
reminder to enter the actual sheet size via the manual adjustment.
4. At [Correction of shift / zoom], touch [Start].
When a maintenance PIN is defined in the Settings Editor, a numerical keyboard appears.
5. Enter the maintenance PIN to start the wizard.
6. Touch [Next].
Start a Media-Specific Registration from the Media Catalog
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Media] to open the Media Catalog.
Media-Specific Registration
322 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
2. Select the media for which you want to perform the media registration.
3. Press [Registration].
When the media is larger than 420 mm (16.5") in X direction (feed direction) you get a
reminder to enter the actual sheet size via the manual adjustment.
4. Select the feed direction for which you want to perform the media registration ([LEF
registration] or [SEF registration])
5. At [Correction of shift / zoom], touch [Start].
When a maintenance PIN is defined in the Settings Editor, a numerical keyboard appears.
6. Enter the maintenance PIN to start the wizard.
7. Press [Next].
Actions for Media-Specific Registration
Procedure
Step Action Remark
1 Place the registration sheet with number
1 face down on the glass plate, and touch
[OK] to scan.
NOTE
Make sure that the registration
sheets are placed correctly in
the left-hand upper corner of
the glass plate. Make sure that
the registration sheet on the
glass plate is not curled or has
dog ears. You can use a stack of
paper to reduce the curl.
You must close the ADF / cover
for each scan. 4
Actions for Media-Specific Registration
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 323
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Remark
2 Place the registration sheet with number
2 face down on the glass plate, and touch
[OK] to scan.
3 Repeat the steps 1 and 2 with the next
registration sheets.
4 The media registration is completed when
the control panel displays the message
[Remove the registration sheet from the
glass plate.]
Touch [Next].
5 The control panel displays the message
[Do you want to print the verification
chart?]. When you touch [Yes], the verifi-
cation chart is printed.
The automatic media registration is com-
pleted.
NOTE
The media specific registration
adjustment overwrites any au-
tomatic or manual media specif-
ic registration performed previ-
ously.
6
If the adjustment was successful, this icon
appears behind the media registered in
the media catalog in the Settings Editor.
7 When the following conditions apply, you
must enter the actual sheet size via the
manual media registration for this media.
• The media registration is not optimal
and
• The sheet is larger than 420 mm (16.5")
in X direction (feed direction) and larg-
er than 297 mm (11.7") in Z direction
(perpendicular to the feed direction).
See
Registration Values
on page 328.
If you do not enter the actual sheet size,
you will see a large deviation in front-to-
back side registration.
8 Only if the media registration is not opti-
mal, continue with the next option.
Print the verification chart to verify if the
media registration is optimal now.
Actions for Media-Specific Registration
324 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Option 2 - Manual Media Registration Adjustment (Only Needed in Incidental
Cases)
When to Do
• You already performed the automatic registration adjustment via the control panel (option 1),
but the result is still not optimal, or
• The media is 1-sided media. Examples of 1-sided media are tab sheets and transparency media
with paper backing.
Description
You can do the manual adjustment of the media registration via the control panel and via the
Settings Editor. Both procedures have the same result. The manual adjustment via the control
panel is preferred because you can print the verification chart immediately after you changed a
setting.
Determine the kind of adjustment you need. This depends on the image on the sheet, for example
elongation, image shift or skew.
You can define the following settings:
• Standard settings for front side and back side
• X elongation
• X offset; in the feed direction
• Z offset; perpendicular to the feed direction
• Advanced settings for front side and back side. Touch [Advanced settings] to display these
settings.
• Trapezoid
• Diamond
• Skew
Option 2 - Manual Media Registration Adjustment (Only Needed in Incidental Cases)
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 325
Canon varioPRINT DP line
NOTE
It is recommended to perform the media registration when the list of [Scheduled jobs] is empty.
Otherwise, other jobs can start printing while the media registration takes place.
Via the Control Panel
Before you begin
NOTE
• The media-specific registration adjustment overwrites any automatic or manual media
specific registration performed previously.
• You cannot perform media-specific registration for temporary media. You must add the
temporary media to the media catalogue first.
Print the verification chart to verify the media registration.
1. On the control panel, touch [Trays] to open the trays view.
2. Select the media for which you want to perform the media registration.
3. Touch [Optimize] -> [Registration].
When the media is larger than 420 mm (16.5") in X direction (feed direction), you get a
reminder to enter the actual sheet size via the manual adjustment.
4. At [Manual registration], touch [Start].
When a maintenance PIN is defined in the Settings Editor, a numerical keyboard appears.
5. Enter the maintenance PIN to start the manual adjustment.
6. Touch [Next].
You can also select the media via the media catalogue, instead of via the trays view.
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Media] to open the media catalog.
Via the Control Panel
326 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
2. From the media catalog, select the media for which you want to perform the media
registration.
3. Touch [Registration].
When the media is larger than 420 mm (16.5") in X direction (feed direction), you get a
reminder to enter the actual sheet size via the manual adjustment.
4. Select the feed direction for which you want to perform the media registration.
5. At [Manual registration], touch [Start].
When a maintenance PIN is defined in the Settings Editor, a numerical keyboard appears.
6. Enter the maintenance PIN to start the manual adjustment.
7. Touch [Next].
Via the Control Panel
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 327
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Registration Values
Section What to enter
Upper section (1) The actual sheet size measured in the feed di-
rection. It is recommended to measure several
(6) sheets. Determine the average sheets size
in the feed direction. For LEF, enter the sheet
width.
[70] For LEF, enter the sheet width
For SEF, enter the sheet length.
[71] For SEF, enter the sheet length
The actual sheet size is used in the front-to-
back registration. The actual sheet size has im-
pact on the distance between the leading edge
of the sheet and the leading edge of the image.
Lower section (2) The required values. Use the verification chart
to determine which value to change. The sec-
tions hereafter describe how to determine the
values you must enter. For most situations you
can correct the media registration with the
standard settings. Only in exceptional cases,
you need the advanced settings.
Via the Control Panel
328 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
NOTE
You can touch the - and + buttons to change the values. You can also enter the required value
directly. Touch the number to enter a value manually. The numeric keyboard appears. There you
can enter the required value.
NOTE
If you touch [Close] before you apply the changes, the values are not saved.
You must decide whether you want to correct the media registration of the front side or the back
side or both. You can base this decision on the processing of the jobs that have an incorrect
media registration, for example cutting, booklet making or folding. To correct the media
registration of the front side touch [Describe front side]. For the back side, touch [Describe back
side].
For 1-sided media you simply have to correct the media registration of the front side. Examples of
1-sided media are tab sheets and transparency media with paper backing. For 1-sided media you
cannot use the verification chart because the verification chart is 2-sided. To perform the media
registration you must use your own image to determine the required values.
NOTE
• In most cases, after automatic media registration you must only adjust the elongation and / or
the image shift.
• If there are two or more registration problems, you must solve the problems one by one. First
you correct the registration of each side. Then you correct the front-to-back side registration.
For example, if the image is skewed and there is a problem with the front-to-back side
registration, then you must first adjust the skewed image. If the skewing is correct, you must
improve the front-to-back side registration.
NOTE
If you are unable to recognize which kind of media registration deviation you have (see
Example
1 - Images and Text
on page 311), perform the following actions:
1. Measure the value for the skewed image, diamond shape image and trapezoid image. See
the corresponding sections.
2. Select the deviation with the largest value and correct the deviation. Use the corresponding
manual actions described in this document.
3. Print the verification chart.
4. If the angles in the corners are straight then continue with the next step. If not, repeat step 1 -
3.
5. If needed, correct the image shift and / or elongation. Use the corresponding manual actions
described in this document.
Elongation
When to do
Elongation occurs in the feed direction.
Elongation
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 329
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Procedure
Job Verification chart
<-- Feed direction
Media Registration
With elongation, the lines at the left-hand side (leading edge) of the verification chart are at the
correct position. The image is elongated / shrunk at the right-hand side (trailing edge) of the
sheet.
Procedure
1. On the verification chart, determine if the image on the back side has an elongation or the image
on the front side.
Use the X elongation back to adjust the back side.
Use the X elongation front to adjust the front side.
2. On the verification chart, use an accurate ruler to measure the distance between the lines on the
front side and the back side at the right-hand side of the sheet.
• Measure the distance between the vertical lines at the front side and the back side at the top-
right corner.
For example, hold the verification chart against the light, or measure the distance between the
line and the edge of the sheet on the front side and the back side.
• Measure the distance between the vertical lines at the front side and the back side at the
bottom-right corner.
• Calculate the average value.
3. Calculate this average value as a percentage of the media size in the feed direction.
For example: 1 mm is 0.48% of 210 mm (0.04" is 0.48% of 8.27").
4. Enter the value according to the table below.
5. Confirm the changed value.
6. Print the verification chart again and verify if the media registration is optimal.
If the media registration is not optimal, change the value or use another setting depending on
how the registration looks.
Values for the Media Registration
Media Registration
330 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Procedure
Settings front side What to enter
X elongation (0.01%) The image is elongated or shrunk in incre-
ments of 0.01%.
A value > 0 elongates the image by moving the
trailing edge of the image to the right:
• The length of the image in the feed direction
increases.
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the image on the sheet re-
mains the same.
• The circles on the right-hand side of the ver-
ification chart move to the right (trailing
edge).
A value < 0 shrinks the image by moving the
trailing edge of the image to the left:
• The length of the image in the feed direction
decreases.
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the image on the sheet re-
mains the same.
• The circles on the right-hand side of the ver-
ification chart move to the left (leading
edge).
Settings back side What to enter
X elongation (0.01%) The image is elongated or shrunk in incre-
ments of 0.01%.
A value > 0 elongates the image by moving the
trailing edge of the image to the right:
• The length of the image in the feed direction
increases.
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the image on the sheet re-
mains the same.
• The dots on the right-hand side of the verifi-
cation chart move to the right (trailing
edge).
A value < 0 shrinks the image by moving the
trailing edge of the image to the left:
• The length of the image in the feed direction
decreases.
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the image on the sheet re-
mains the same.
• The dots on the right-hand side of the verifi-
cation chart move to the left (leading edge).
Values for the Media Registration
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 331
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Ranges
Setting Range
X elongation (0.01%) -500 to +500
NOTE
If the elongation is too great, the image can become larger than the sheet. In this case the image
is printed over the edges of the sheet.
• Risk of reprinting.
• Risk of system pollution.
Shifted Image
When to do
The image is shifted in the X direction (feed direction) and/or in the Z direction (perpendicular to
the feed direction).
Procedure
Job Verification chart
<-- Feed direction
Media Registration
With an image shift, all corners are shifted in the same direction. We assume that the skew is
correct.
Procedure
1. On the verification chart, determine if the image on the back side is shifted or the image on the
front side.
Change the back side if the image on the back side is shifted.
Shifted Image
332 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change the front side if the image on the front side is shifted.
2. On the verification chart, use an accurate ruler to measure the distance that the image is shifted
in the feed direction (X) and in the direction perpendicular to the feed direction (Z).
• Measure the distance between the top-left corner on the front side and the back side in the
feed direction.
• Measure the distance for all the corners in the feed direction.
• Measure the distance for all the corners in the direction perpendicular to the feed direction.
• Calculate the average value in the feed direction (X) and the average value in the direction
perpendicular to the feed direction (Z).
3. Enter the values according to the table below.
4. Confirm the changed values.
5. Print the verification chart again and verify if the media registration is optimal.
If the media registration is not optimal, change the value or use another setting depending on
how the registration looks.
Values for the Media Registration
Procedure
Settings front side What to enter
[X offset ({0})] The image is shifted in X direction (feed direc-
tion) in mm (inches).
A shift > 0 moves the image to the right-hand
side (trailing edge):
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the image on the sheet increa-
ses.
• The distance between the trailing edge of
the sheet and the image on the sheet de-
creases.
• The circles on the verification chart move to
the right-hand side (trailing edge).
A shift < 0 moves the image to the left-hand
side (leading edge):
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the image on the sheet de-
creases.
• The distance between the trailing edge of
the sheet and the image on the sheet increa-
ses.
• The circles on the verification chart move to
the left-hand side (leading edge). 4
Values for the Media Registration
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 333
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Settings front side What to enter
[Z offset ({0})] The image is shifted in Z direction (perpendic-
ular on the feed direction) in mm (inches).
A shift > 0 moves the image to the top of the
sheet:
• The distance between the top of the sheet
and the image on the sheet decreases.
• The circles on the verification chart move to
the top of the sheet.
A shift < 0 moves the image to the bottom of
the sheet:
• The distance between the top of the sheet
and the image on the sheet increases.
• The circles on the verification chart move to
the bottom of the sheet.
Settings back side What to enter
[X offset ({0})] The image is shifted in X direction (feed direc-
tion) in mm (inches).
A shift > 0 moves the image to the right-hand
side (trailing edge):
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the image on the sheet increa-
ses.
• The distance between the trailing edge of
the sheet and the image on the sheet de-
creases.
• The dots on the verification chart move to
the right-hand side (trailing edge).
A shift < 0 moves the image to the left-hand
side (leading edge):
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the image on the sheet de-
creases.
• The distance between the trailing edge of
the sheet and the image on the sheet increa-
ses.
• The dots on the verification chart move to
the left-hand side (leading edge). 4
Values for the Media Registration
334 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Settings back side What to enter
[Z offset ({0})] The image is shifted in Z direction (perpendic-
ular on the feed direction) in mm (inches).
A shift > 0 moves the image to the top of the
sheet:
• The distance between the top of the sheet
and the image on the sheet decreases.
• The dots on the verification chart move to
the top of the sheet.
A shift < 0 moves the image to the bottom of
the sheet:
• The distance between the top of the sheet
and the image on the sheet increases.
• The dots on the verification chart move to
the bottom of the sheet.
Ranges
Setting Range (mm) Range (inches)
[X offset ({0})] -5.0 to +5.0 -0.197 to +0.197
[Z offset ({0})] -2.5 to +2.5 -0.098 to +0.098
NOTE
If the shift is too much, the image be printed over the edges of the sheet.
• Risk of reprinting.
• Risk of system pollution.
Trapezoid Shape Image
When to do
The trapezoid shape is perpendicular to the feed direction.
Trapezoid Shape Image
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 335
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Procedure
Job Verification chart
b
a
<-- Feed direction
Media Registration
Procedure
1. On the verification chart, determine if the image on the back side has a trapezoid image or the
image on the front side.
If the trapezoid image is on the back side, change the back side.
If the trapezoid image is on the front side, change the front side.
2. On the verification chart, use an accurate ruler to measure the distance between the corners of
the image at the bottom of the sheet and at the top of the sheet.
• Measure the distance between the bottom-left corner and the bottom-right corner. b in the
figure above.
E.g. the distance between the corners is 190.8 mm (7.51").
• Measure the distance between the top-left corner and the top-right corner. a in the figure
above.
E.g. the distance between the corners is 191.3 mm (7.53").
• Determine the difference between the distance measured at the bottom and the distance
measured at the top. b - a.
In the example the measured difference is -0.5 mm (-0.02").
3. Enter the measured difference according to the table below.
4. Confirm the changed value.
5. Print the verification chart again and verify if the media registration is optimal.
If the media registration is not optimal, change the value or use another setting depending on
how the registration looks.
Media Registration
336 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Values for the Media Registration
Procedure
Settings front side What to enter
[Trapezoid ({0})] The image is adjusted in mm (inches).
Measured difference > 0:
• At the bottom of the sheet, the length of the
image in the feed direction decreases.
• The distance between the circles at the bot-
tom of the verification chart decreases.
Measured difference < 0:
• At the top of the sheet, the length of the im-
age in the feed direction decreases.
• The distance between the circles at the top
of the verification chart decreases.
Settings back side What to enter
[Trapezoid ({0})] The image is adjusted in mm (inches).
Measured difference > 0:
• At the bottom of the sheet, the length of the
image in the feed direction decreases.
• The distance between the dots at the bot-
tom of the verification chart decreases.
Measured difference < 0:
• At the top of the sheet, the length of the im-
age in the feed direction decreases.
• The distance between the dots at the top of
the verification chart decreases.
Ranges
Setting Range (mm) Range (inches)
[Trapezoid ({0})] -2.5 to +2.5 -0.098 to +0.098
Diamond Shape Image
When to do
The diamond shape is perpendicular to the feed direction. You can measure the diamond shape
via the diagonal of the image.
Values for the Media Registration
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 337
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Procedure
Job Verification chart
b a
<-- Feed direction
Media Registration via the Diagonal of the Image
Procedure
1. On the verification chart, determine if the image on the back side has a diamond shape or the
image on the front side.
If the diamond shape is on the back side, change the back side.
If the diamond shape is on the front side, change the front side.
2. On the verification chart, use an accurate ruler to measure the distance between:
• The top-right corner and the bottom-left corner. a in the figure above.
For example, the distance is 336.0 mm (13.23").
• The top-left corner and the bottom-right corner. b in the figure above.
For example, the distance is 335.0 mm (13.19").
3. Determine the difference between the second value measured and the first value measured. b - a.
In the example, the measured difference is -1.0 mm (-0.04").
4. Enter the measured difference according to the table below.
5. Confirm the changed values.
6. Print the verification chart again and verify if the media registration is optimal.
If the media registration is not optimal, change the value or use another setting depending on
how the registration looks.
Media Registration via the Diagonal of the Image
338 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Values for the Media Registration via the Diagonal of the Image
Procedure
Settings front side What to enter
Diamond The image is adjusted in mm (inches).
Adjustment > 0:
• The diagonal from the top-right corner of
the image to the bottom-left corner of the
image increases.
• The distance between the circle at the top-
right corner and the circle at the bottom-left
corner increases.
• The diagonal from the top-left corner of the
image to the bottom-right corner of the im-
age decreases.
• The distance between the circle at the top-
left corner and the circle at the bottom-right
corner decreases.
Adjustment < 0:
• The diagonal from the top-right corner of
the image to the bottom-left corner of the
image decreases.
• The distance between the circle at the top-
right corner and the circle at the bottom-left
corner decreases.
• The diagonal from the top-left corner of the
image to the bottom-right corner of the im-
age increases.
• The distance between the circle at the top-
left corner and the circle at the bottom-right
corner increases.
Values for the Media Registration via the Diagonal of the Image
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 339
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Settings back side What to enter
Diamond The image is adjusted in mm (inches).
Adjustment > 0:
• The diagonal from the top-right corner of
the image to the bottom-left corner of the
image increases.
• The distance between the dot at the top-
right corner and the dot at the bottom-left
corner increases.
• The diagonal from the top-left corner of the
image to the bottom-right corner of the im-
age decreases.
• The distance between the dot at the top-left
corner and the dot at the bottom-right cor-
ner decreases.
Adjustment < 0:
• The diagonal from the top-right corner of
the image to the bottom-left corner of the
image decreases.
• The distance between the dot at the top-
right corner and the dot at the bottom-left
corner decreases.
• The diagonal from the top-left corner of the
image to the bottom-right corner of the im-
age increases.
• The distance between the circle at the top-
left corner and the circle at the bottom-right
corner increases.
Ranges
Setting Range (mm) Range (inches)
Diamond -2.5 to +2.5 -0.098 to +0.098
Skewed Image
When to do
The image is skewed (rotated) on the front side and/or on the back side.
Skewed Image
340 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Procedure
Job Verification chart
b
a
<-- Feed direction
Media Registration
Procedure
1. On the verification chart, determine if the image on the back side is skewed or the image on the
front side.
If the image on the back side is skewed, change the back side.
If the image on the front side is skewed, change the front side.
2. On the verification chart, use an accurate ruler to measure the distance between:
• The leading edge of the sheet and the top-left corner. a in the figure above.
For example, the distance is 10.3 mm (0.40").
• The leading edge of the sheet and the bottom-left corner. b in the figure above.
For example, the distance is 9.5 mm (0.37").
3. Determine the difference between the value measured at the bottom and the value measured at
the top. b - a. This is the skew (rotation).
In the example, the measured skew is -0.8 mm (-0.03").
4. Enter the value according to the table below.
5. Confirm the changed value.
6. Print the verification chart again and verify if the media registration is optimal.
If the media registration is not optimal, change the value or use another setting depending on
how the registration looks.
Media Registration
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 341
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Values for the Media Registration
Procedure
Settings front side What to enter
Skew The image is rotated in mm (inches).
Adjustment > 0:
• The image is rotated clockwise.
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the circle at the top-left corner
is increased.
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the circle at the bottom-left
corner is decreased.
Adjustment < 0:
• The image is rotated counter-clockwise.
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the circle at the top-left corner
is decreased.
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the circle at the bottom-left
corner is increased.
Settings back side What to enter
Skew The image is rotated in mm (inches).
Adjustment > 0:
• The image is rotated clockwise.
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the dot at the top-left corner is
increased.
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the dot at the bottom-left cor-
ner is decreased.
Adjustment < 0:
• The image is rotated counter-clockwise.
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the dot at the top-left corner is
decreased.
• The distance between the leading edge of
the sheet and the dot at the bottom-left cor-
ner is increased.
Ranges
Setting Range (mm) Range (inches)
Skew -2.5 to +2.5 -0.098 to +0.098
Values for the Media Registration
342 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Front-to-Back Side Registration
Introduction
When the front-to-back side registration is not satisfactory:
• Correct the front side registration.
• Correct the back side registration.
Procedure
Job Verification chart
<-- Feed direction
Media Registration
Before you begin
To correct the front-to-back side registration, you must first get one side correct and then shift the
other side in such a way that the front-to-back registration is correct.
Procedure
1. If the verification chart displays a trapezoid image, a diamond shape or skew, use the
corresponding manual actions described in this document to correct the registration.
2. Correct the image shift to adjust the front-to-back side registration.
3. If the image is elongated / shrunk, use the corresponding manual actions described in this
document to correct the registration.
4. Print the verification chart again and verify if the media registration is optimal.
If the media registration is not optimal, change the value or use another setting depending on
how the registration looks.
Front-to-Back Side Registration
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 343
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Via the Settings Editor
Before you begin
NOTE
• It is not preferred to perform the manual media registration via the Settings Editor. The
manual media registration via the control panel is preferred because you can print the
verification chart immediately after you changed a setting.
• The media specific registration adjustment overwrites any automatic or manual media specific
registration performed previously.
Print the verification chart to verify the media registration.
1. Start the Settings Editor application.
2. Click [Media] to open the media catalog.
3. Select the media from the media catalog for which you want to perform the media
registration.
4. Click [Registration].
When you are not logged in, the login screen appears.
5. Enter the username and password to start the registration.
6. Select for which feed direction you to perform the media registration.
7. Enter the required values. The sections related to the manual media registration via the
control panel (see
Via the Control Panel
on page 326) describe how to determine the values
you must enter. Only the [Corrections for preprinted media] are not available on the control
panel. These settings are described in this section.
For 1-sided media you simply have to correct the media registration of the front side.
Examples of 1-sided media are tab sheets and transparency media with paper backing. For 1-
sided media you cannot use the verification chart because the verification chart is 2-sided. To
perform the media registration you must use your own image to determine the required
values.
Possible settings, as displayed in the Settings Editor:
• Actual sheet size
• Registration front side
• Trapezoid
• Diamond
• Skew
• X elongation (0.01%)
• X offset
• Z offset
• Registration back side
• Trapezoid
• Diamond
• Skew
• X elongation (0.01%)
• X offset
• Z offset
• Corrections for preprinted media (see
Corrections for Preprinted Media
on page 345)
• [X image shift front ({0})]
• [X image shift back ({0})]
• [Z image shift front ({0})]
• [Z image shift back ({0})]
8. When the media registration is ready, the icon appears behind the media registered.
Via the Settings Editor
344 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
NOTE
• In most cases, after automatic media registration you must only adjust the elongation and / or
the image shift.
• If there are two or more registration problems, you must solve the problems one by one. First
you correct the registration of each side. Then you correct the front-to-back side registration.
For example, if the image is skewed and there is a problem with the front-to-back side
registration, then you must first adjust the skewed image. If the skewing is correct, you must
improve the front-to-back side registration.
NOTE
If you are unable to recognize which kind of media registration deviation you have (see
Example
1 - Images and Text
on page 311), perform the following actions:
1. Measure the value for the skewed image, diamond shape image and trapezoid image. See
the corresponding sections.
2. Select the deviation with the largest value and correct the deviation. Use the corresponding
manual actions described in this document.
3. Print the verification chart.
4. If the angles in the corners are straight then continue with the next step. If not, repeat step 1 -
3.
5. If needed, correct the image shift and / or elongation. Use the corresponding manual actions
described in this document.
Corrections for Preprinted Media
Introduction
When you use preprinted media, there is a possibility that the image is not at the correct position,
even when the media registration is correct. For example, it is possible that a preprinted line
along an edge of the media covers part of the printed image. In that case you can perform an
image shift for all the jobs that are printed on this media.
Procedure
1. Print a representative job on the preprinted media.
2. Measure the distance that the image must shift for the front side and the back side.
3. In the section [Corrections for preprinted media] enter the values according to the table below.
4. Click [OK].
5. Print the job again and check if the image is printed at the correct position.
Values
Procedure
Settings front side What to enter
[X image shift front ({0})] The image is shifted in X direction (feed direc-
tion) in steps of 0.1 mm (0.001 inches).
[Z image shift front ({0})] The image is shifted in Z direction (perpendic-
ular to the feed direction) in steps of 0.1 mm
(0.001 inches).
Corrections for Preprinted Media
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 345
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Settings back side What to enter
[X image shift back ({0})] The image is shifted in X direction (feed direc-
tion) in steps of 0.1 mm (0.001 inches).
[Z image shift back ({0})] The image is shifted in Z direction (perpendic-
ular to the feed direction) in steps of 0.1 mm
(0.001 inches).
Ranges
Setting Range (0.1 mm) Range (0.001 inches)
[X image shift front ({0})] -500 to +500 -1969 to +1969
[X image shift back ({0})] -500 to +500 -1969 to +1969
[Z image shift front ({0})] -500 to +500 -1969 to +1969
[Z image shift back ({0})] -500 to +500 -1969 to +1969
Values
346 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Media registration: Troubleshooting
Introduction
When you perform media registration some issues can occur. This section gives an overview of
known issues and what to do.
Registration of Preprinted Media Fails
Issue
The registration of preprinted media fails.
Cause
If the registration sheet contains pre-printed information, the scanner will have difficulties
performing the measurements.
Solution
• Perform a manual media registration on the preprinted media.
• Perform an automatic media registration on the same media without the preprinted
information.
• Perform an automatic media registration on a media similar to the preprinted media. The
similar media must not contain any preprinted information.
Media registration: Troubleshooting
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 347
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Automatic Media Registration of Long Sheets is not satisfactory
Issue
The result of an automatic media registration on sheets longer than 420 mm (16.5") is not
satisfactory.
Cause
The automatic media registration cannot handle sheets longer than 420 mm (16.5"). The
automatic media registration assumes the nominal sheet length of the media.
Solution
Measure the actual sheet length and enter this value via the manual media registration.
Automatic Media Registration of Long Sheets is not satisfactory
348 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Shifted Image after Paper Path Registration (Only if POC is Applicable)
Issue
After you performed the paper path registration the image can be shifted in X direction (feed
direction). This offset occurs mainly when you use A4 or Letter for the paper path registration.
Cause
Possible causes:
• The bulk media has media registration settings from a previous media registration setting.
• The sheet length of the bulk media differs from the nominal sheet length for this media.
• The paper path registration for A3/Ledger was performed before the paper path registration for
A4/Letter.
• The printer is not sufficiently warmed-up. The mentioned offset in X direction (feed direction) is
related to the temperature of the environment and how much the printer is warmed up.
Solution
Perform one or more of the following actions depending on the possible cause:
• Set the media specific registration settings of the bulk media to 0. Perform the paper path
registration again.
• Enter the actual measured sheet length of the bulk media via the manual media registration
adjustment.
• First perform the paper path registration for A4/Letter and after that perform the paper path
registration for A3/ledger.
• Make sure that the printer is warmed up. The printer must have printed for at least 20 minutes.
Perform the paper path registration again.
• Perform a manual media registration adjustment for the bulk media.
Shifted Image after Paper Path Registration (Only if POC is Applicable)
Chapter 13 - Media Handling 349
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Media Registration: Frequently Asked Questions
Introduction
In this section you find answers to some frequently asked questions regarding media registration.
Question Answer
What should you do after a software
update?
After a service technician upgraded the software you
must verify the media registration. You can print the ver-
ification chart to verify if the media registration is opti-
mal (see
Print the Verification Chart for Media Registra-
tion
on page 319).
What should you do after you copied
the media catalog?
When you copy the media catalogue from one printer to
another printer you must verify the media registration.
You can print the verification chart to verify if the media
registration is optimal (see
Print the Verification Chart
for Media Registration
on page 319). The media registra-
tion depends on the printer and on the media.
How do you perform a media regis-
tration for temporary media?
You cannot perform media specific registration for tem-
porary media. First add the temporary media to the me-
dia catalog. Next, perform the media registration for the
selected media.
How do you perform a media regis-
tration of 1-sided media? Examples
of 1-sided media are tab sheets and
transparency media with paper back-
ing.
You must perform a manual media registration. You
cannot perform the automatic adjustment for media that
you can only print 1-sided, because the adjustment pro-
cedure prints 2-sided registration sheets.
You cannot print the verification chart for 1-sided media
because the verification chart is 2-sided. Use your own
job to determine the required values and to verify the
media registration.
Media Registration: Frequently Asked Questions
350 Chapter 13 - Media Handling
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 14
Maintain the print system
System configuration
System configuration and maintenance
Your organization and print environment can ask for a system configuration that meets
production and workflow requirements. In addition, authorization, security and sustainability
guidelines are important when you establish a print system.
The installation of the print system includes most configuration tasks, such as definitions of
preferences, job workflows and print languages.
Changing the settings at a later time depends upon the type of print, copy or scan job.
Configuration tasks for the system administrators and key operators
The configuration settings are available via a web-based configuration tool, the Settings Editor.
Both the key operator and the system administrator can change settings in the Settings Editor. A
part of the Settings Editor settings and information is also available on the System view and Start
view of the control panel. You need rights to access configuration settings to change these
settings. (
Users of the print system
on page 11)
[72] The system configuration settings on the control panel
Maintenance tasks for operators
Operators are responsible for refilling the consumables, the removal of staple and punch waste,
and manual cleaning tasks.
System configuration
352 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Maintenance tasks for maintenance operators
Maintenance operators can perform procedures to clean machine parts or improve the image
quality. Furthermore, they are responsible for mechanical maintenance tasks and maintenance
procedures via the control panel.
For some procedures you must have the rights to perform maintenance tasks to prevent
unauthorized use.
[73] Maintenance tasks on the control panel
System configuration and maintenance
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 353
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control
panel
Introduction
NOTE
The information contained in this section is primarily intended for key operators and system
administrators.
The Settings Editor application on the PRISMAsync controller is a web based application that
allows key operators and system administrators to adapt the system to the situation in an
organization and production environment. The Settings Editor allows key operators and system
administrators to manage settings regarding to network configuration, system preferences, job
preferences and media, for example.
For convenience reasons, a subset of frequently used settings is accessible through the control
panel.
• Via a button on the start up screen.
You can access the subset of settings without initialization of the printer or without making a
connection to the network.
• Via the [System] tab.
Settings available via the control panel
Group of settings Available settings Short description
[About] • [Serial number]
(read-only)
• [Version of printer
software] (read-on-
ly)
The [About] section allows you to look up the
serial number and software version of the
printer.
[Security settings] • [System installation
from USB]
• [Confirmation after
system recovery]
• [HTTP/HTTPS traf-
fic]
• [Use of USB drive]
• [Disable IPsec com-
munication]
The [Security settings] section allows you to
set the security to the required level.
You can prevent unauthorized software up-
grade via USB. You can also enable / disable
the USB drive.
You can configure whether or not you want a
confirmation after system recovery. Because a
system recovery restores to the previous PRIS-
MAsync system working state, it can happen
that security settings are lost.
You can configure the HTTP/HTTPS traffic and
the IPsec communication. 4
Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel
354 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Group of settings Available settings Short description
[Software updates] • [Download auto-
matically]
• [Upgrade from USB
drive]
• [Upgrade from
server]
• [PRISMAsync
downgrade]
• [Install Windows
update]
• [Uninstall Windows
update]
• [Install software
from USB installa-
tion drive]
You can upgrade the printer software through
this section when the service organization has
made an update available. You can upgrade
the Microsoft® Windows® software through
this section. You can downgrade patches
through this section. Follow the instructions on
the control panel when you upgrade or down-
grade the software.
When you enable [Download automatically] an
update is downloaded automatically, when
available via ORS. You only have to install the
update.
You can select the setting to keep existing jobs
on the system when you upgrade the software
from USB.
The jobs on the system are not deleted after
you upgrade the software from server.
Service can install software from an USB in-
stallation drive.
When you install from an USB installation
drive the current installation of the system will
be erased. The master boot record of the hard
disk will be cleaned.
[Software licenses] • [Install new license]
• [Upload license]
When you have a new license to activate a
new feature on the printer, you can upload the
license through this section. After uploading
the license, the feature becomes active.
You can only use this section after you inser-
ted an USB drive in an USB port of the PRIS-
MAsync controller or on the control panel.
Follow the instructions on the control panel
when you upload the license.
[Backup] • [Creation date last
backup] (read-only)
• [Include confiden-
tial data in backup]
• [Create backup]
• [Export backup to
USB drive]
• [Delete backup]
The system administrator can make a backup
of the configuration of the print system. The
system administrator can use this backup a/o
to restore the configuration or for fleet man-
agement.
[Restore] • [Import backup
from USB drive]
• [Restore complete
configuration]
• [Restore service
configuration]
• [Restore user con-
figuration]
A user can restore the user configuration. The
user configuration consists of workflow set-
tings like AWF and DocBox and other settings
that are not related to the hardware of the sys-
tem. For example you can use the user config-
uration for fleet management.
Only service can restore the complete configu-
ration or the service configuration. 4
Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 355
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Group of settings Available settings Short description
[Logging] • [Save data dump
file]
• [Save trace file]
• [Print configuration
report]
When an error occurs, the help desk of your
printer supplier can ask you to create and send
a trace file and a datadump file. The datadump
file is a .zip file that contains detailed technical
information about your system. Furthermore,
the system can store trace log files in .zip files.
You can save both .zip files to a USB drive.
The configuration report contains information
about the configuration of your printing sys-
tem, for example information about the sys-
tem configuration, controller configuration and
network settings. You can print the configura-
tion report for backup purposes, for example.
Follow the instructions on the control panel
when you save a file or print a report.
[Connectivity] • [MAC address]
(read-only)
• [Hostname]
• [Link speed and du-
plex settings]
• IPv4 settings
• IPv6 settings
• DNS settings
• WINS settings
• [Test TCP/IP con-
nection]
• [HTTP port]
• [HTTPS port]
The [Connectivity] section contains the main
settings to integrate the printer into a network.
After you have adapted the network settings,
you can test the connection from here.
Follow the instructions on the control panel
when you adapt the network settings.
[Proxy server] • [Proxy server us-
age]
• [Proxy server
name]
• [Proxy server port]
• [Proxy server au-
thentication]
• [Proxy server au-
thentication type]
• [Username for
proxy authentica-
tion]
• [Password for
proxy authentica-
tion]
• [Proxy server do-
main]
The [Proxy server] section contains the set-
tings to configure the proxy server.
Follow the instructions on the control panel
when you adapt the proxy server settings.
4
Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel
356 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Group of settings Available settings Short description
[Remote connection]
(optional)
• [Remote connection
status] (read-only)
• [eRDS connection]
(read-only)
• [Remote connection
enabled]
• [Remote Service
country code]
• [Remote Service
custom country
code]
• [Service organiza-
tion ID]
• [Test Remote con-
nection]
The [Remote connection] section (optional)
contains the settings to enable the remote con-
nection and to configure the Remote Service.
NOTE
Only Service can adapt the remote
connection settings. After Service
adapts the remote connection set-
tings, you can test the remote con-
nection with this setting.
[System settings] • [Date and time]
• [System of meas-
urement]
• [Media weight]
• [Time zone]
• [Show install wiz-
ard after next start-
up]
The [System settings] section contains a/o set-
tings to change the date and time of the sys-
tem, or the system of measurement used.
When you change the system of measure-
ment, all corresponding values on the system
will be changed. For example, when you
change [Metric] into [Imperial], all length val-
ues will be displayed in inches. You can also
indicate how the media weight is displayed.
Group of settings Available settings Short description
[System settings] • [Update finisher
configuration]
• [Bulk tray 1 media
size]
• [Bulk tray 2 media
size]
Furthermore, when a new finisher was added
to your configuration, you can use the [Update
finisher configuration] function to tell the sys-
tem that your configuration was updated. Then
the finisher will be added to the output loca-
tions in the job parameters section, for exam-
ple.
From the [System settings] you can also indi-
cate the media in the bulk trays one and two.
NOTE
A5 and Statement are only valid if
the bulk tray for small format is in-
stalled and configured by the service
technician. If you select A5 or State-
ment and the bulk tray for small for-
mat is not installed, you are not able
to assign media to the bulk tray.
Procedure
NOTE
The key operator PIN or the system administrator password is required to make changes in
this section.
1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [System configuration] (under [Advanced]).
Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 357
Canon varioPRINT DP line
2. Touch the button of the group that contains the setting you want to change or view.
3. Touch the required setting.
4. Look up the required information or make the required changes.
5. If you make a change, touch [OK] to confirm.
6. Press [Close].
Change a number of settings in the Settings Editor via the control panel
358 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Introduction to the [Setup] Section
Introduction
The [System] view gives access to system information, the system setup and media information.
This section gives an overview of the [Setup] section in the [System] view.
Overview of the [Setup] Section
[74] Overview of the [Setup] section
The Items of the [Setup] Section
Description of the [Setup] section
Num‐
ber
Item Description
1 Summary of the defined
workflow settings
Display the main settings of the current workflow profile.
2 [Workflow profile] Select a workflow profile or manually define the settings
that match your needs.
3 [Language] Change the language of the system.
4 [Warning time] Define the moment when the system warns you about
an action that is required soon, for example 10 minutes
in advance. The warning is displayed in the dashboard
and indicated through the operator attention light.
5 [Job name truncation] Define the way the system shortens the job name when
the job name is too long to display fully. 4
Introduction to the [Setup] Section
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 359
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Num‐
ber
Item Description
6 [Control panel settings] Adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen of the
control panel.
7 [Shut down system] Shut down the printer and the controller in a controlled
way.
8 [Advanced media settings] • Enable or disable the [Pre-printed mode].
• Enable or disable the [Wax mode].
• Set the paper quality factor to [Normal], [Low] or
[Lower].
9 [Intermediate check print] Print a test sheet of a running job to check the quality.
10 [Accounting] Define the [Accounting mode] and the [Account ID]. The
[Accounting mode] is only available when the [Identifica-
tion enabled] setting in the Settings Editor on the PRIS-
MAsync controller is set to [Yes].
11 [System configuration] Get direct access to a number of important key operator
settings in the Settings Editor on the PRISMAsync con-
troller.
Introduction to the [Setup] Section
360 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Backup and restore
Introduction
The system administrator can make a backup of the configuration of the print system. The system
administrator can use this backup a/o to restore the configuration.
• After a hardware failure, for example a crash of the hard disk.
• After installation of a new version of the software.
The system administrator can use the backup also for fleet management. The system
administrator configures one system and makes a backup. Then the system administrator
restores the backup at other systems.
Backup and restore are part of the system configuration. System configuration is available on the
System view and the Start view of the control panel.
You can also make a backup and restore a backup via the Settings Editor.
Backup
1. Insert the USB drive into the USB port at the left-hand side of the control panel.
2. Select the [System configuration] on the System view or on the Start view of the control
panel.
3. Touch [Backup].
4. Touch [Create] to create a backup.
The backup is stored on the controller.
You can export the backup to a USB drive: touch [Export].
You can delete a backup from the system: touch [Delete].
Restore
1. Insert the USB drive with the backup into the USB port at the left-hand side of the control
panel.
2. Select the [System configuration] on the System view or on the Start view of the control
panel.
3. Touch [Restore].
4. Touch [Import] to import a backup from the USB drive to the print system.
5. Touch [Restore] to restore the configuration.
A user can restore the user configuration. The user configuration consists of workflow
settings like AWF and DocBox and other settings that are not related to the hardware of the
system. For example you can use the user configuration for fleet management.
Only service can restore the complete configuration or the service configuration.
Backup and restore
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 361
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Counters
Introduction to the Counters
Description
The following table describes the counters in the [Maintenance] section of the [System] view.
Counter information
Type of counter Description
[Billing counters] The [Billing counters] display the total number of normal and large
prints that have been made since the printer was installed. A service
technician can configure the billing counters displayed. You cannot re-
set the billing counters.
[Day counters] The [Day counters] display the number of normal (A4/Letter-like) and
large (A3/Tabloid-like) prints that have been made since the counter
was last reset to 0. You can reset the day counters at the beginning of a
working day or before you start a new job for a specific customer, for
example.
NOTE
The [Billing counters] and the [Day counters] provide information about the number of one-sided
and two-sided prints that have been made on normal and large media. The length of the media
determines whether a media is normal or large. Media with a length of less than 364 mm (14.3")
are referred to and counted as normal media, for example A4/Letter. Media with a length of 364
mm (14.3") or more are referred to and counted as large media, for example A3/Tabloid.
Counters
362 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Reset the Day Counters
Illustration
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Reset day counters].
A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you really want to reset the day counters.
2. Touch [Yes] to reset the day counters to 0.
Reset the Day Counters
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 363
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Print the Billing Counters Report
Introduction
You can print a report that contains all figures of the configured billing counters. The language of
the billing counters report is the same as the selected language for the system.
Illustration
[75] Print the billing counters report
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Print billing counters report].
Print the Billing Counters Report
364 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Software upgrade
Upgrade PRISMAsync from server
Introduction
You can update the printer with the latest PRISMAsync software that is available from the service
organization. The service organization stores the software on the ORS server for your device.
Before you begin
Remote Service must be available.
Procedure
NOTE
You must log in as System Administrator to upgrade the software.
1. Access the Settings Editor.
2. Click [Support] -> [Software updates].
3. In the [PRISMAsync upgrades] section, click [Upgrade from server]. Select the available version.
If no version is visible, the service organization has not made a version available.
4. After you downloaded the version, you must install this version.
5. When the upgrade is completed you must restart the system.
Software upgrade
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 365
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Upgrade PRISMAsync
Introduction
You can upgrade or downgrade the printer with the PRISMAsync software that is available on the
system.
Procedure
NOTE
You must log in as System Administrator to upgrade the software.
1. Access the Settings Editor.
2. Click [Support] -> [Software updates].
3. In the [PRISMAsync upgrades] section, click [Upgrade]. Select the available version.
When no version is visible, the service organization has made no version available.
4. After you downloaded the version, you must install this version.
NOTE
After you upgraded the software, you can downgrade to the previous installed version.
In the [PRISMAsync upgrades] section, click [Downgrade].
5. You must restart the system once the the upgrade or downgrade is complete.
Upgrade PRISMAsync
366 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Upgrade Microsoft Windows
Introduction
You can update the printer with the latest operating security patches of Microsoft® Windows®.
Before you begin
You must download the operating security patches of Microsoft Windows before you can
upgrade Microsoft Windows with the operating security patches.
Procedure
NOTE
You must log in as System Administrator to upgrade the software.
1. Access the Settings Editor.
2. Click [Support] -> [Software updates].
3. In the [Windows updates] section, click [Install]. Browse to the operating security patches of
Microsoft Windows you downloaded.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to upload the required files.
5. When the upgrade is completed you must restart the system.
Upgrade Microsoft Windows
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 367
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Install software from a USB installation drive
Introduction
NOTE
Only service can execute this action.
Service can install the software via a USB drive. Service can use this option for example to
downgrade to a previous software version.
Before you begin
Service must have a USB installation drive with the required software version available.
Procedure
NOTE
You must log in as Service to install the software from a USB installation drive.
1. Insert the USB drive into the USB port at the left-hand side of the control panel.
2. Select the [System configuration] on the System view or on the Start view of the control panel.
3. Touch [Software updates].
IMPORTANT
When you install from an USB installation drive the current installation of the system will
be erased. The master boot record of the hard disk will be cleaned.
4. Touch [Install software from USB installation drive].
5. When the installation is completed you must restart the system.
Install software from a USB installation drive
368 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Printer Operation Care (POC)
Introduction to Printer Operation Care (POC)
Introduction
Printer Operation Care (POC) is a concept that allows you to replace a number of parts yourself
without the help of a service technician. This saves costs and improves the productivity.
The following actions are part of the POC concept:
• Replace the separation rollers in the paper trays.
• Replace the heat exchanger foils.
• Replace the spiral cleaner.
NOTE
Removing paper from the TTF in case of a paper jam is also part of POC, because this requires
the replacement of the spiral cleaner.
Which POC actions you can carry out depends on your service contract. When a POC action is not
part of your service contract, you will get the message [Call Service] after you selected a
maintenance action.
When maintenance is required, the dashboard will display an orange or red maintenance icon.
The maintenance icons
Icon Description
Maintenance is required soon. It is advised to start maintenance as
soon as possible.
Maintenance is required now. The printer stops. The required mainte-
nance must be carried out before you can resume printing.
CAUTION
Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out POC actions.
Printer Operation Care (POC)
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 369
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Illustration
[76] Start maintenance
Assistance on Printer Operation Care
You can find more assistance on how to replace the consumables at the following places:
• On the control panel. The control panel shows and describes the required actions step by step.
• In this User Manual.
Introduction to Printer Operation Care (POC)
370 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Perform a Paper Path Registration
Introduction
NOTE
Only trained operators who have permission to perform POC actions, and Service Technicians,
are allowed to perform the paper path registration.
The paper path registration adjusts the registration for bulk media for printer-dependent offsets.
Usually, the paper path registration is performed by a Service Technician at the installation or
after a software upgradeThe paper path registration adjustment is a machine adjustment. The
paper path registration is the basis of the media registration. The media-specific adjustment
creates a difference with the bulk registration adjustment.
When to do
The Service Technician must perform the paper path registration adjustment after the
replacement or disassembly of certain units.
After the trained operator replaced the heat exchanger foils, the trained operator must verify the
media registration. If the media registration is not optimal, the paper path registration adjustment
is required.
NOTE
After the bulk registration adjustment, the media-specific registration can be changed. It is
recommended to verify the media registration for the specific media. If the media registration is
not satisfactory, the media specific registration is required.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Go to maintenance tasks] -> Printer
registration adjustment A4/Letter -> [Start].
The tray for the A4/LTR bulk media is tray 1.
NOTE
You must first perform the paper path registration adjustment for A4/LTR and after that
you must perform the paper path registration adjustment for A3/Ledger.
NOTE
When the optional bulk tray for small format is installed, make sure that bulk tray 1
contains A4 or Letter. Also, make sure that you have assigned A4 or Letter to bulk tray
1. If needed you must adjust the size of the tray (see
Adjust the Size of the optional
Bulk Tray for small Format
on page 301).
2. Enter the maintenance PIN
WARNING
Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out POC actions.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.
If the printer has not warmed up, the registration starts with warming up the printer.
Perform a Paper Path Registration
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 371
Canon varioPRINT DP line
NOTE
Make sure that the registration sheets are placed correctly in the left-hand upper corner
of the glass plate. Make sure that the registration sheet on the glass plate is not curled
or has dog ears. You can use a stack of paper to reduce the curl.
You must close the ADF / cover for each scan.
The instructions for the paper path registration are the same as the instructions for the automatic
media specific registration.
4. Repeat step 1, 2 and 3 for A3/Ledger.
The tray for the A3/Ledger bulk media is tray 3.
After you finish
If the front-to-back side registration is not satisfactory after you performed the paper path
registration, you must check the actual sheet length in the feed direction. The paper path
registration assumes nominal sheet length. If the actual sheet length differs from the nominal
sheet length, you must enter the actual sheet size (see
Registration Values
on page 328). If the
media registration is not correct you must perform the manual media registration for this media
(see
Option 2 - Manual Media Registration Adjustment (Only Needed in Incidental Cases)
on
page 325).
NOTE
Previously performed media specific registration can influence the media registration for bulk
media. To verify the paper path registration, we therefore recommend to set all media specific
registration settings to 0.
Perform a Paper Path Registration
372 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Replace the Separation Rollers
When to do
The control panel will indicate when the separation rollers of a paper tray must be replaced. The
life of separation rollers is more than 200,000 sheet separations.
Before you begin
1. Touch the paper tray button at the right-hand side of the control panel.
2. On the control panel, touch the tray of which you want to replace the separation rollers.
3. Touch [Open] to open the tray.
Required tools
Socket wrench
New separation rollers
CAUTION
Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out POC actions.
Illustration
[77] Required tools
Replace the Separation Rollers
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 373
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Procedure
Replace the separation rollers
Step Action Illustration
1 [Turn the upper separation roller until the
roller is face up.]
2 [Use the socket wrench to loosen the
bolt.]
3 [Remove the cover plate.]
4
Replace the Separation Rollers
374 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
4 [Remove the 3 fixation clips.]
4
Replace the Separation Rollers
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 375
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
5 [Remove the upper separation roller.]
6 [Push the lower separation roller down to
remove the middle separation roller.]
7 [Remove the lower separation roller.]
4
Replace the Separation Rollers
376 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
8 [Place a new lower separation roller. Turn
the roller into position.]
9 [Place a new middle separation roller.
Turn the roller into position.]
10 [Place a new upper separation roller. Turn
the roller into position.]
4
Replace the Separation Rollers
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 377
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
11 [Place the 3 fixation clips.]
4
Replace the Separation Rollers
378 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
12 [Place the cover plate back.]
13 [Use the socket wrench to tighten the cov-
er plate.]
14 [Turn the upper separation roller back in-
to position.]
4
Replace the Separation Rollers
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 379
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
15 Gently close the tray.
It is advised to push at the centre of the
tray.
Replace the Separation Rollers
380 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils
Before you begin
NOTE
This POC action is available, depending on the type of the heat exchanger foils.
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Go to maintenance tasks] ->
[Replace the heat exchanger foils] -> [Start].
2. [Enter the maintenance PIN.]
3. [Touch Next to unlock the door.]
Required tools
Socket wrench
New heat exchanger foils
CAUTION
Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out POC actions.
Illustration
[78] Required tools
Procedure
Replace the heat exchanger foils
Step Action Illustration
1 [Open the front door.]
4
Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 381
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
2 [Use handle 3 to slide out the transport
unit.]
3 [Use handle 4 to open the turn unit.]
4
Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils
382 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
4 [Remove the 2 plugs from the heat ex-
changer.]
5 [Use the socket wrench to loosen the 2
fixation pens.]
4
Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 383
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
6 [Use the red handle to remove the heat
exchanger.]
7 [Place the heat exchanger on a clean, flat
surface.]
8 [Turn the pressure plate over.]
4
Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils
384 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
9 [Remove the 2 heat exchanger foils.]
10 [Discard the foils into a common dustbin.]
4
Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 385
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
11 [Place the wrapper with the new foils in
the heat exchanger.]
12 [When the new foils are in place, remove
the wrapper.]
[Caution: Do not touch the foils to keep
the new foils clean.]
4
Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils
386 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
13 [Turn the pressure plate back.]
14 [Place the heat exchanger back.]
4
Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 387
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
15 [Use the socket wrench to tighten the 2
fixation pens.]
NOTE
Push the fixation pens down
during the fastening.
16 [Place the 2 plugs of the heat exchanger
back.]
4
Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils
388 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
17 [Use handle 4 to close the turn unit.]
18 [Use handle 3 to slide the transport unit
back.]
19 [Close the front door.]
20 Answer the question [Which heat ex-
changer foils did you put back?] with
[New] to confirm that you installed new
heat exchanger foils.
When you did not replace the heat ex-
changer foils, touch [Existing].
Replace the Heat Exchanger Foils
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 389
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Replace the Spiral Cleaner
Introduction
When the spiral cleaner is almost full, the control panel displays the orange maintenance icon.
The POC action [Replace the spiral cleaner] becomes active. The table below describes the
meaning of the maintenance icons.
The maintenance icons
Icon Description
Maintenance is required soon. It is advised to replace the spiral cleaner
as soon as possible. You can print about 45,000 more images before re-
placing the spiral cleaner becomes required.
Maintenance is required now. The printer stops. You must replace the
spiral cleaner to resume printing.
When to do
You can replace the spiral cleaner:
• Immediately or at a convenient time in the short-term, if you cannot wait for the printer to cool
down (for example when your printer is in use 24/7), or
• During a cold start of the printer, for example the next morning when the printer was off or in
sleep mode during the night.
NOTE
When the printer is shut down or put into sleep mode while the orange maintenance icon is
displayed, you must replace the spiral cleaner at the next start-up. Then the red maintenance
icon will be displayed.
NOTE
The same indication may appear shortly after you replaced the spiral cleaner. Sometimes error
6324 is displayed shortly.
The cause may be one of the following:
• The spiral cleaner is not connected correctly.
Do not replace the spiral cleaner during the POC action, but install the same spiral cleaner.
• The spiral cleaner is broken.
Replace the spiral cleaner.
• The temperature sensor for the spiral cleaner is dirty.
Clean the sensor.
Do not replace the spiral cleaner during the POC action, but install the same spiral cleaner.
Before you begin
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Go to maintenance tasks] ->
[Replace the spiral cleaner] -> [Start].
2. [Enter the maintenance PIN.]
3. [Touch Next to unlock the door.]
Wait until the printer is turned off.
4. Put on the heat-resistant gloves in case the machine is warm.
Required tools
Heat-resistant gloves
Replace the Spiral Cleaner
390 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Socket wrench
New spiral cleaner
CAUTION
Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out POC actions.
Illustration
[79] Required tools
CAUTION
You must wear the heat-resistant gloves when you replace the spiral cleaner.
Procedure
Replace the spiral cleaner
Step Action Illustration
1 [Open the front door.]
4
Replace the Spiral Cleaner
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 391
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
2 [Use the socket wrench to loosen the 2
fixation pens.]
3 [Turn the red handle counter-clockwise.]
4
Replace the Spiral Cleaner
392 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
4 [Slide the TTF unit out of the frame.]
5 [Pinch both fixation springs.]
6 [Slide the fixation caps from the cleaner
ends.]
4
Replace the Spiral Cleaner
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 393
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
7 [Remove the spiral cleaner from the TTF.]
[Place the spiral cleaner on the packaging
of the new cleaner.]
NOTE
[When the spiral cleaner has
cooled down, discard the clean-
er into a common dustbin.] Or
return the cleaner to your serv-
ice organization.
4
Replace the Spiral Cleaner
394 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
8 [Place the new spiral cleaner in the TTF.]
4
Replace the Spiral Cleaner
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 395
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
9 [Slide both fixation caps over the cleaner
ends until the caps click in place.]
10 Check if the spiral cleaner can rotate free-
ly.
11 [Align the TTF with the rail.]
4
Replace the Spiral Cleaner
396 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
12 [Slide the TTF unit back.]
13 [Turn the red handle clockwise.]
4
Replace the Spiral Cleaner
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 397
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
14 [Use the socket wrench to tighten the 2
fixation pens.]
15 [Close the front door.]
16 Answer the question [Which spiral clean-
er did you put back?] with [New] to con-
firm that you installed a new spiral clean-
er.
When you did not replace the spiral clean-
er, touch [Existing].
Replace the Spiral Cleaner
398 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Remove Paper from the TTF
When to do
The control panel will indicate when paper must be removed from the TTF.
Before you begin
1. When the control panel displays the message [Touch Next to unlock the door.], touch [Next].
Wait until the printer is turned off.
2. Put on the heat-resistant gloves.
Required tools
Heat-resistant gloves
Socket wrench
New spiral cleaner
CAUTION
You must wear heat-resistant gloves.
Illustration
[80] Required tools
CAUTION
You must wear the heat-resistant gloves when you remove paper from the TTF.
Remove Paper from the TTF
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 399
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Procedure
Remove paper from the TTF
Step Action Illustration
1 [Open the front door.]
2 [Use the socket wrench to loosen the 2
fixation pens.]
3 [Turn the red handle counter-clockwise.]
4
Remove Paper from the TTF
400 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
4 [Slide the TTF unit out of the frame.]
5 [Pinch both fixation springs.]
6 [Slide the fixation caps from the cleaner
ends.]
4
Remove Paper from the TTF
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 401
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
7 [Remove the spiral cleaner from the TTF.]
[Place the spiral cleaner on the packaging
of the new cleaner.]
NOTE
[When the spiral cleaner has
cooled down, discard the clean-
er into a common dustbin.] Or
return the cleaner to your serv-
ice organization.
8 [Remove paper underneath the spiral
cleaner.]
4
Remove Paper from the TTF
402 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
9 [Use handle 2 to open the flap and check
for paper.]
10 [Remove sheets underneath the TTF.]
4
Remove Paper from the TTF
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 403
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
11 [Place the new spiral cleaner in the TTF.]
4
Remove Paper from the TTF
404 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
12 [Slide both fixation caps over the cleaner
ends until the caps click in place.]
13 Check if the spiral cleaner can rotate free-
ly.
14 [Align the TTF with the rail.]
4
Remove Paper from the TTF
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 405
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
15 [Slide the TTF unit back.]
16 [Turn the red handle clockwise.]
4
Remove Paper from the TTF
406 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
17 [Use the socket wrench to tighten the 2
fixation pens.]
18 [Close the front door.]
19 Answer the question [Which spiral clean-
er did you put back?] with [New] to con-
firm that you installed a new spiral clean-
er.
When you did not replace the spiral clean-
er, touch [Existing].
Remove Paper from the TTF
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 407
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Remove Paper from the Heat Exchanger
Required tools
Socket wrench
New heat exchanger foils
NOTE
New heat exchanger foils are only needed with certain configurations. Follow the instructions on
the screen.
Procedure
1. When the control panel displays the message [Touch Next to unlock the door.], touch [Next].
Wait until the printer is turned off.
2. Follow the instructions on the screen.
The actions displayed on the screen, depend on the type of the heat exchanger foils.
Remove Paper from the Heat Exchanger
408 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Advanced Maintenance Actions for High Capacity Stacker-G1 and
High Capacity Stacker-H1
Replace the Flip Rings in the Flip Unit
When to do
Replace the four flip rings (indicated by (1) in the illustration below) when the stacking quality is
not OK or when the flip rings are worn significantly. The flip rings are located behind the front
cover.
Required tools
Four new flip rings
CAUTION
Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out this action, if supported by your service
organization.
Illustration
1
[81] The location of the flip rings
Advanced Maintenance Actions for High Capacity Stacker-G1 and High Capacity Stacker-H1
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 409
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Procedure
Replace the flip rings
Step Action Illustration
1 Open the front cover.
2 If required, rotate the flip wheel to get ac-
cess to the flip rings.
3 Put an A3/Tabloid sheet on the stack tray
to prevent parts from falling into the
stacker.
4
Replace the Flip Rings in the Flip Unit
410 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
4 Remove the flip rings one by one.
5 Place the new flip rings one by one.
Check if the flip rings can rotate freely.
4
Replace the Flip Rings in the Flip Unit
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 411
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
6 Remove the sheet from the stack tray.
7 Close the front cover.
Replace the Flip Rings in the Flip Unit
412 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Clear a Paper Jam in the Lower Input Paper Path of the Registration Unit
When to do
• A red LED lights up at the stacker control panel.
• The printer stops. The printer control panel displays the red maintenance icon .
• The printer control panel displays a message that indicates a paper jam in the lower input
paper path of the registration unit.
CAUTION
When the lower input paper path of the registration unit also contains jammed paper, the
printer control panel displays the red maintenance icon . In that case only trained personnel is
allowed to remove the jammed paper.
Illustration
[82] Indication at the stacker control panel
Procedure
Clear a paper jam in the lower input paper path of the registration unit
Step Action Illustration
1 Open the front door.
2Caution: When you turn the knob, be
careful not to get your fingers caught.
Turn A7 to remove the jammed paper.
4
Clear a Paper Jam in the Lower Input Paper Path of the Registration Unit
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 413
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
3 Remove the jammed paper from A6.
4 Lift the handle to open the paper path
section.
5 Remove the jammed paper.
6Caution: When you close the paper path
section, be careful not to get your fingers
caught.
Lower the handle to close the paper path
section.
7 Close the front door.
8 The control panel will display the mes-
sage [Did you remove all sheets from the
paper path?] Touch [Yes] to confirm that
all paper was removed.
Clear a Paper Jam in the Lower Input Paper Path of the Registration Unit
414 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit
When to do
• A red LED lights up at the stacker control panel.
• The printer stops and the printer control panel displays the red maintenance icon .
• The printer control panel displays a message that indicates a paper jam in the registration unit.
Required tools
Socket wrench 5.5
CAUTION
Only trained personnel is allowed to carry out this action, if supported by your service
organization.
Illustration
[83] Indication at the stacker control panel
Procedure
Clear a paper jam in the registration unit
Step Action Illustration
1 Open the top cover.
4
Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 415
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
2 Open B2 to remove the jammed paper.
3Caution: When you close the top cover,
be careful not to get your fingers caught.
Close the top cover.
4 Open the front door.
4
Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit
416 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
5 Use the socket wrench to loosen the
screw and open the cover.
6 Open the 2 retaining clips and disconnect
the flat cable.
4
Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 417
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
7Attention: Do not pull the flat cable.
Pull out the registration unit.
8 Remove any pieces of paper from the reg-
istration unit.
9 Place the registration unit back. The ar-
rows must be on top.
4
Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit
418 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
10 Attention: Do not twist the flat cable.
Connect the flat cable and close the 2 re-
taining clips.
11 Close the cover and use the socket
wrench to fasten the screw.
12 Close the front door.
13 The printer control panel will display the
message [Did you remove all sheets from
the paper path?]. Touch [Yes] to confirm
that all paper was removed.
Clear a Paper Jam in the Registration Unit
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 419
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Remote Service (ORS) (Option)
Remote Service
Introduction
NOTE
Remote Service requires a license. Remote Service also requires a permission to an Canon site
outside the customer domain, either via a proxy server or via IP white list. Contact your local IT
specialist to give you the permission.
Remote Service is an application that runs on a printer or a separate server in the customer's
network. Remote Service requires a working Internet connection to establish a secure connection
between the customer's site and Canon. In case a proxy server is present, Remote Service must
be configured correctly.
Remote Service has the following functionality:
Functionality Description
Remote Diagnostics When a customer contacts Canon in case of a problem, Canon can
automatically retrieve service related data from the printer for
analysis and troubleshooting. With these data, Canon can quickly
identify the source of the problem and possibly solve the problem
via the telephone.
Remote Meter Reading With this function counter information that is needed for billing
can be automatically sent to Canon on a regular basis. Then the
customer does not need to collect the meter readings manually
and send these to Canon. The customer can always check the sent
data and approve the meter readings. 4
Remote Service (ORS) (Option)
420 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Functionality Description
Remote Software Upgrade With this function, the customer can update the printer with the
latest software. The software is only retrieved from Canon when
the customer wants this.
From release 3.3 onwards, the jobs on the system are not deleted
after you upgraded the software.
Illustration
Using Remote Service
• In the Settings Editor, all settings for the customer's proxy server must be set correctly
([Configuration] -> [Connectivity] -> [Proxy server]).
• Via the control panel, the remote connection must be enabled ([System] -> [Setup] ->[System
configuration] -> [Remote connection] -> [Remote connection enabled] -> [Yes]).
• Via the control panel, you can test the remote connection ([System] -> [Setup] ->[System
configuration] -> [Remote connection] -> [Test Remote connection]).
The test can take up to 30 seconds. When the connection is not OK, a message indicates the
reason for the failure.
• The dashboard of the control panel displays a red icon (see figure) when the printer becomes
disconnected from the Internet. Make sure the connection is online, because otherwise Canon
cannot retrieve data from your printer.
• If required, you can change a number of connectivity settings via the control panel ([System] ->
[Setup] ->[System configuration] -> [Connectivity]).
• You can verify the communication with Canon by downloading the audit log files via the
Settings Editor ([Support] -> [Logging] > [Save the log files of the remote service connection]).
The Settings Editor keeps up to four audit log files. Each log file can contain maximum 10 Mb
of data. When all 4 files are full, the first file is overwritten. You can open the audit log files
with any text editing application.
Remote Service
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 421
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Add Toner and Staples
Check the Status of the Toner Reservoir
Introduction
This section describes the following:
• Warnings when the toner level is low.
• Where to find the current filling level of the toner reservoir.
Toner Low Warnings
When the toner level is low, and toner is required, you will get the following warnings:
Filling level Warning
20% • Dashboard: Orange warning icon, and a corresponding mes-
sage.
• Operator attention light: Orange lamp lights up.
0% • Dashboard: Red warning icon, and a corresponding message.
• Operator attention light: Red lamp lights up.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Printer].
The [Supplies] pane displays the current filling level.
[84] Check the status of the toner reservoir
Add Toner and Staples
422 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Add Toner
Introduction
When the control panel indicates that you must add toner, then you can add maximum two
bottles of toner. Add the toner according to the instructions.
Only use genuine Canon toner to get the best print quality.
Product name Supported Canon toner
Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Toner Black
CAUTION
• Handle toner bottles carefully.
• Do not burn or throw used toner bottles into open flames, because this can ignite toner
residuals inside the toner bottles, which can cause burns or start a fire.
• Do not store toner bottles in places exposed to open flames, because this can ignite the
toner, which can cause burns or start a fire.
• If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, then carefully collect the toner particles or wipe them
up using a soft, damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation. If you use a vacuum cleaner to
clean up spilled toner, only use a vacuum cleaner that has safeguards against dust
explosions. The use of a vacuum cleaner without these safeguards can result in a malfunction
of the vacuum cleaner, or a dust explosion due to static discharge.
• Keep toner out of reach of children. If toner is ingested, consult a physician immediately.
• Avoid breathing dust.
• Only use toner in environments with adequate ventilation.
IMPORTANT
• Only use toner bottles that are intended for use with this printer.
• Be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toners are available on the market. The use of
counterfeit toners can result in a poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not
responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner.
For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit.
• Store toner bottles in a cool and dry location, away from direct sunlight. It is recommended to
store the toner at a temperature below 30 °C (86 °F) and a relative humidity below 80%.
• Do not store toner bottles in an upright position.
• Do not add more toner than described in the table below.
• Before you use the toner bottle, shake the closed toner bottle well.
Maximum Amount of Toner to Be Added
Add toner
Icon Indicated % Description
100% The toner reservoir is filled for more than 60%.
Do not add toner.
60% The toner reservoir is filled for 20%-60%.
Add maximum one bottle of toner. 4
Add Toner
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 423
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Icon Indicated % Description
20% The toner reservoir is filled for less than 20%. The printer
can print at least 600 sheets, depending on the coverage.
Add maximum two bottles of toner as soon as possible.
0% The toner reservoir is empty. The printer stops.
Add maximum two bottles of toner immediately to re-
sume printing.
How to add toner
IMPORTANT
Only add toner when the printer is ON.
Procedure
1. Open the cover of the toner reservoir in front of the control panel.
2. Put the toner bottle upside down into the toner reservoir.
3. Pull the slide to the right.
4. Wait until the toner bottle stops shaking, then push the slide to the left.
5. Remove the toner bottle.
6. Close the cover of the toner reservoir.
Add Toner
424 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Check the Status of the Staple Cartridges
Introduction
The stacker/stapler can contain the following staplers:
• One stapler that can add one or two staples to non-booklet prints. These prints are delivered to
the upper or lower output tray.
• One stapler that can add two staples to booklets. These booklets are delivered to the booklet
tray.
This stapler is only available when the stacker/stapler is equipped with the optional saddle
stitch unit.
When all the staple cartridges are sufficiently filled, the staple icon in the dashboard is blue.
When the staple icon in the dashboard is orange or red, one of the staple cartridges is empty or
almost empty. You must refill the staple cartridge as soon as possible.
To find out which staple cartridge is empty or almost empty, you must go to the [Printer] section
of the [System] view. The icon for the staple cartridge that must be refilled is orange or red.
NOTE
Even when the staple icon is blue, you can still go to the [System] view to check the number of
staples that has been used since the last refill.
The Colors of the Staple Icon
The colors of the staple icon
Staple icon Description
A blue staple icon indicates that all the staple cartridges contain suffi-
cient staples.
An orange staple icon indicates that one of the staple cartridges is al-
most empty.
A red staple icon indicates that one of the staple cartridges is empty.
The printer stops when a job requires staples from the empty staple
cartridge.
Check the Status of the Staple Cartridges
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 425
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Illustration
[85] Check the status of the staple cartridges
Procedure
1. Check the staple icon in the dashboard.
2. When the staple icon is orange or red, go to the [Printer] section of the [System] view to check
which staple cartridge must be refilled.
Check the Status of the Staple Cartridges
426 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Stapler Unit
Introduction
When a staple cartridge of the stapler unit inside the stacker/stapler is empty, the control panel
will display a message indicating which staple cartridge must be replaced. The procedure below
describes how to replace the staple cartridge.
Required tools
Staple N1
Procedure
Replace the staple cartridge of the stapler unit
Step Action Illustration
1 Open the front door of the stacker/stapler.
2 Grab the green tab of the staple case and
pull the staple case out of the staple unit.
NOTE
When the stapler unit is at the
back and it is difficult to pull out
the staple case, turn the dial at
the bottom left-hand side to the
left to move the stapler unit.
3 Pull out the staple cartridge.
4 Insert the new staple cartridge (Staple
N1).
4
Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Stapler Unit
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 427
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
5 Gently push the staple case as far as pos-
sible into the stapler unit until the staple
case is securely in place.
6 Pull out the stapler waste box. The stapler
waste box is located below the stapler
unit.
7Caution: Do not touch the staple waste.
Empty the stapler waste box into a com-
mon dustbin.
8 Put the stapler waste box back into place.
9Caution: When you close the front door of
the stacker/stapler, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, because this may re-
sult in personal injury.
Close the front door of the stacker/stapler.
Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Stapler Unit
428 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Saddle Stitch Unit
Introduction
If a staple cartridge of the saddle stitch unit of the optional Saddle Finisher-AF2 is almost empty,
the control panel will display a message indicating which staple cartridge must be replaced. The
procedure below describes how to replace the staple cartridge.
NOTE
This procedure is only necessary when the Saddle Finisher-AF2 is attached.
Required tools
Staple P1
Procedure
Replace the staple cartridge of the saddle stitch unit
Step Action Illustration
1 Open the front door of the stacker/stapler.
2 Pull out the saddle stitch unit.
3 Grab the tab of the staple case and pull
the staple case out of the staple unit.
4 Hold the cover of the staple case by its
left and right sides
Lift the cover and slide the cover off.
4
Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Saddle Stitch Unit
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 429
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
5 Squeeze at the indicated positions to re-
lease the empty staple cartridge.
Lift the empty staple cartridge and pull
the staple cartridge out.
6 Insert the new staple cartridge (Staple
P1).
NOTE
When you replace the staple
cartridges, replace both the
front and back staple cartridges.
7 Return the staple case to its original posi-
tion in the saddle stitch unit.
Make sure that the arrow on the staple
case aligns with the arrow on the saddle
stitch unit.
NOTE
Follow the steps 3 to 7 to re-
place the other staple cartridge
in the saddle stitch unit.
8 Gently push the saddle stitch unit back in-
to the printer.
4
Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Saddle Stitch Unit
430 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
9Caution: When you close the front door of
the stacker/stapler, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, because this may re-
sult in personal injury.
Close the front door of the stacker/stapler.
Replace the Staple Cartridge of the Saddle Stitch Unit
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 431
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Cleaning
Clean the Scanner Sensors
When to do
When copies contain stains.
Required tools
Soft tissue
Procedure
Clean the scanner sensors
Step Action Illustration
1 [Open the main cover.]
2 [Use a tissue to clean the scanner sensor.]
4
Cleaning
432 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
3 [Open the white plate.]
4 [Open the lower right-hand guide.]
5 [Use a tissue to clean the scanner sensor.]
4
Clean the Scanner Sensors
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 433
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
6 [Close the lower right-hand guide.]
7 [Close the white plate.]
9 [Close the main cover.]
Clean the Scanner Sensors
434 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Clean the Z Sensor
When to do
In case of error code 16718.
Required tools
Soft tissue.
Procedure
Clean the Z sensor
Step Action Illustration
1 [Open the front door.]
2 [Use handle 3 to slide out the transport
unit.]
4
Clean the Z Sensor
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 435
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
3 [Use handle 4 to open the turn unit.]
4 [Use handle 5 to open the flap.]
5 [Use a tissue to clean the sensor and the
sensor box on the inner side.]
6 [Close the flap.]
4
Clean the Z Sensor
436 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Step Action Illustration
7 [Use handle 4 to close the turn unit.]
8 [Use handle 3 to slide the transport unit
back.]
9 [Close the front door.]
Clean the Z Sensor
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 437
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Manually Start a Drum Cleaning
Introduction
The cleaning procedure consists of the following steps:
• The drum cools down. The control panel indicates the time required.
• The drum is cleaned automatically. You cannot interrupt this action.
When to do
When the prints contain dots.
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Go to maintenance tasks] -> [Clean the
drum] -> [Start].
2. [Enter the maintenance PIN.]
3. Follow the instructions on the control panel.
Manually Start a Drum Cleaning
438 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Automatic Drum Cleaning
Introduction
The imaging drum inside the machine can get contaminated with glue spots. Glue spots on the
drum can affect the print quality. Possible causes of the glue spots:
• The use of recycled media, or
• Wrapper glue residues on one or more sheets of paper.
The machine contains a sensor that can detect glue spots. When the [Automatic drum cleaning]
setting is enabled, and spots are detected, an automatic drum cleaning procedure will take place.
NOTE
When automatic drum cleaning is enabled, the cleaning will not take place before the first
detection of glue spots. If you want to clean the drum immediately, you must start the manual
drum cleaning procedure via the control panel ([System] -> [Maintenance] -> [Go to maintenance
tasks] -> [Clean the drum] -> [Start]).
Precautions
Some contamination of the drum cannot be excluded completely, but you can take precautions to
limit the possibility of contamination.
Advice:
• Open the wrapper very carefully, using a knife or scissors.
• Remove the top and bottom sheets of the paper package before you load the paper into a
paper tray.
• Use paper from a box.
Settings for Automatic Drum Cleaning
The control panel contains the following settings with regard to automatic drum cleaning.
Setting Description
[Automatic drum cleaning] Here you can enable or disable the automatic drum cleaning func-
tion.
When the setting is disabled, the drum is not cleaned automatical-
ly. The settings described below in this table are grayed out on the
control panel.
If the setting is enabled, the sensor will frequently check the drum
for glue spots ([Glue detection interval]). If necessary, the auto-
matic drum cleaning procedure is performed. The three settings
described below in this table are active.
Possible values:
• [On]
• [Off]
Factory default value: [Off].
NOTE
The drum cleaning can take a couple of minutes. The
control panel provides feedback. 4
Automatic Drum Cleaning
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 439
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Description
[Glue detection interval] You can indicate the interval, in number of sides, after which the
drum sensor checks the drum for glue spots. A lower value means
that the sensor checks the drum more often. The frequency of the
occurrence of glue spots depends highly on the media used.
Possible values:
• [20 sides]
• [50 sides]
• [100 sides]
• [200 sides]
• [350 sides]
Factory default value: [350 sides].
NOTE
A side is not necessarily equal to a sheet. A side is based
on an image on A4/LTR-like media. An image is anything
that is printed on one side of A4/LTR-like media. Below,
you can find an example of the conversion for the [20
sides] value.
At lower intervals, the productivity can decrease.
• When A4/LTR is printed one-sided, then 20 sides = 20 sheets.
• When A4/LTR is printed two-sided, then 20 sides = 10 sheets.
• When A3/Tabloid is printed one-sided, then 20 sides = 10
sheets.
• When A3/Tabloid is printed two-sided, then 20 sides = 5 sheets.
So when you print A3/Tabloid two-sided, for example, the sensor
checks the drum after every 5 sheets printed.
[Glue detection sensitivity] You can indicate the size of glue spots that the sensor detects. The
factory default value makes sure that only fairly large spots will be
detected. Only select a higher value when smaller glue spots must
be detected.
Possible values:
• [Normal]
• [High]
• [Very high]
Factory default value: [Normal].
[Resume automatically af-
ter cleaning]
You can indicate the behavior of the printer after an automatic
drum cleaning took place.
Select [Yes] if you want to continue printing immediately, without
checking the output first.
Select [No] if you first want to check the prints that were made be-
fore the drum cleaning. When the drum cleaning is ready, the con-
trol panel displays a message that asks you if you want to contin-
ue. Now you can check the output.
Possible values:
• [Yes]
• [No]
Factory default value: [No]. 4
Automatic Drum Cleaning
440 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Setting Description
[Start of run detection] You can indicate if the system checks for glue pollution before the
start of a run.
Select [On] if you want the system to check for glue pollution be-
fore the start of a run.
Possible values:
• [On]
• [Off]
Factory default value: [Off].
NOTE
It is advised that you enable [Start of run detection] only
when you often use recycled media.
Advised settings for different types of users
Setting Normal user User that demands high quality
Plain paper Frequent use of
recycled media
Plain paper Frequent use of
recycled media
[Automatic drum
cleaning]
[On] [On] [On] [On]
[Glue detection
interval]
[350 sides] [350 sides] [100 sides] [100 sides]
[Glue detection
sensitivity]
[Normal] [Normal] [Very high] [Very high]
[Resume auto-
matically after
cleaning]
[Yes] [Yes] [Yes] [Yes]
[Start of run de-
tection]
[Off] [On] [Off] [On]
How to Change the Settings for Automatic Drum Cleaning
Procedure
1. On the control panel, touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Advanced media settings] (under [Advanced]).
2. Touch the [Automatic drum cleaning] button to enable the setting.
3. If required, change the values of the settings described in the table.
4. Touch [Apply] to confirm the changes.
Automatic Drum Cleaning
Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system 441
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Automatic Drum Cleaning
442 Chapter 14 - Maintain the print system
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Chapter 15
Troubleshooting
Solving Errors
Introduction
The main types of possible errors are the following.
• Errors that relate to the machine
• Errors that relate to the jobs
This section gives an overview of the possible errors and the solutions to these errors.
NOTE
Only operators who received the special maintenance training are allowed to replace or clean
parts and solve paper jams in the process units.
Overview of Possible Machine Errors
Handle machine errors
Error Solution Additional information
Paper jam Follow the instructions on
the control panel.
After you solved the error, the machine starts
from the point where the printing stopped due
to the error. Check for double prints.
Software error Follow the instructions on
the control panel.
A message on the control panel will indicate
that you must restart the machine.
Service required Follow the instructions on
the control panel.
A message on the control panel will indicate
that you must contact Service or your local au-
thorized dealer.
Unit recondition-
ing
Follow the instructions on
the control panel.
After an error was solved, the machine checks
if the print job can continue from the point
where the printing stopped. When you use cy-
clic media, you must probably remove a cou-
ple of sheets.
The system can-
not determine if
the output is
complete
Follow the instructions on
the control panel and check
the output.
Sometimes, the system cannot determine if
the output is complete. Then you must check
the output. Touch the [OK] button when the
output is complete.
The prints con-
tain dots
Carry out the drum clean-
ing procedure.
On the control panel, you can start this proce-
dure by touching [System] -> [Maintenance] ->
[Go to maintenance tasks].
A paper tray does
not open
Check if all paper trays are
closed correctly.
Paper jams or
dog ears because
the horizontal
transport unit in-
side the printer is
not closed com-
pletely.
Make sure that the horizon-
tal transport unit is always
completely pushed in until
locked.
Solving Errors
444 Chapter 15 - Troubleshooting
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Overview of Possible Job Errors
Handle job errors
Error Solution Additional information
The required sup-
plies are not
available
Add the required supplies
(media, toner and staples)
before the machine stops
printing.
The dashboard helps you to determine when
the supplies are required.
The defined com-
bination of job
settings is not
possible
• The controller corrects
the settings.
• You must define a cor-
rect combination of job
settings in the [Proper-
ties] section of the
[Jobs] view on the con-
trol panel.
The solution depends on the place where the
job settings are defined.
• When the job settings are defined in an ap-
plication or printer driver, the controller au-
tomatically corrects the settings.
• When you define the job settings on the
control panel, the control panel displays a
message that the defined combination is not
possible. The [OK] button is disabled.
Solving Errors
Chapter 15 - Troubleshooting 445
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Store the logging in case of software errors
Introduction
When the system has a software error, you can store the logging. Service can use this logging to
analyse the error.
Procedure
1. On the control panel an error screen is visible that indicates a software error. A software error has
an error code that starts with 115. The system creates a log. This may take a few minutes. After
the creation of the log is complete, you can insert a USB drive into the USB port at the left-
hand side of the control panel.
When you do not want to store the logging of the software error, you can touch the error screen
to exit the error. The system restarts.
Only non-recoverable software errors will store the error log.
2. Touch the USB drive button on the error screen.
The systems stores the logging of the error on the USB drive.
3. When the systems indicates that the storing is completed, remove the USB drive.
4. Touch the error screen to exit the error. The system restarts.
NOTE
When the system has two identical software errors after each other, you can delete all
jobs. If one or more jobs caused the software error, the system restarts without an
error.
NOTE
If the system experiences three identical software errors, one after another the system
reinstalls the software upon restarting. Reinstallation will take a while.
Store the logging in case of software errors
446 Chapter 15 - Troubleshooting
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Appendix A
Specifications
General
Specifications
Specification Value
Description Light to mid production, B&W printer / scanner / copier
Toner Canon varioPRINT 135 Series Toner Black
Imaging technology DirectPress®; mono-component toner
Warm-up time 150-270 seconds, depending on amount of toner in cleaner
First copy time One-sided: 3.9 seconds
First print time One-sided, ripped: 5.1 seconds
Printer dimensions Excluding operator panel: 1,130 mm x 765 mm x 1,040 mm (44.5"
x 30.1" x 40.9")
Including operator panel: 1,130 mm x 765 mm x 1,430 mm (44.5" x
30.1" x 56.3")
Printer weight 263 kg (578.6 lb)
Power requirement 1-Phase: 200-240 V, 50/60 Hz
• USA 20 A (16 A rated)
• USA 15 A (12 A rated)
Certificates EPA Energy Star® / TEC compliancy, RoHS, Cetecom / CE Class A,
FCC Class A, UL / TüV / CE, VCCI, ErP, China RoHS, CRDH FDA
(USA), WEEE, Green Procurement Standards, EAC, KC, RCM Inter-
national Energy Star Program (Japan, EU, USA)
Section 508, EPEAT BRONZE, De-inkability certificate, CCC China
(sourced locally, C-tick Australia (sourced locally)
General
448 Appendix A - Specifications
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Environmental
Specification Description
Ozone emis-
sions
None (printer)
Optimum tem-
perature
17-30 ºC (62.6-86 ºF), printer up to 34 ºC (93.2 ºF). For accessories, refer to their
specifications.
Relative humid-
ity
20-80%
Altitude Lower than 1,000 m (3,281 ft)
Room size and
ventilation or
air change rate
at room size
> 50 m3 and > 100 m3/h
or
> 2 AC/hr for room size > 35 m3
NOTE
This is the ventilation requirement for the printer, additional to the
standard building ventilation requirements.
Sound power
level
Standby: 33 dB
Print: maximum 64 dB
Power con-
sumption
Off mode: 0.2 W
Sleep mode: 4,3 W (excluding controller)
Low power mode: 150 W
Ready mode: 270 W
Operation mode (USA, LTR, 75 g/m², two-sided): 1.9 kW / 2.0 kW / 2.2 kW (vari-
oPRINT® 115 / 130 / 140 respectively)
TEC value USA, LTR, 75 g/m²: 20.3 kWh / 21.2 kWh / 22.8 kWh (varioPRINT® 115 / 130 /
140 respectively)
Environmental
Appendix A - Specifications 449
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Printer Speed
Below you find the maximum engine speeds in images per minute.
Printing, media
weight
Model A4 LEF,
B5 LEF,
A5 SEF
Letter
LEF
Ledger A3 SRA3 JIS B4
SEF
Two-sided, less
than 120 g/m² (31
lb bond)
115 118 115 60 61 58 64
130 133 130 68 69 65 72
140 143 140 73 75 70 78
One-sided, less
than 220 g/m² (80
lb cover)
115 118 115 60 61 58 64
130 133 130 68 69 65 72
140 143 140 73 75 70 78
Two-sided, 120
g/m² - 220 g/m²
(31 lb bond - 80
lb)
115 113 110 57 59 55 61
130 123 120 63 64 60 67
140 123 120 63 64 60 67
> 220 g/m³ (80 lb
cover)
115 61 60 31 32 30 33
130 61 60 31 32 30 33
140 61 60 31 32 30 33
LEF: Long-edge feed
SEF: Short-edge feed
Printer Speed
450 Appendix A - Specifications
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Paper Modules
Internal Paper Module
NOTE
Whenever a number of sheets is mentioned in the table below, the figure is based on media of
80 g/m² (20 lb bond).
Specification Description
Description Standard paper module
Paper trays • Bulk tray 1: 1,500 sheets (A4, JIS B5, Letter, 16K. When the bulk
tray for small format is installed also A5, Statement.)
• Bulk tray 2: 1,500 sheets (A4, JIS B5, Letter, 16K. When the bulk
tray for small format is installed also A5, Statement.)
• Multi-size tray 3: 500 sheets; 140 mm x 182 mm - 320 mm x 432
mm (5.5" x 7.2" - 12.6" x 17.0")
• Multi-size tray 4: 500 sheets; 140 mm x 182 mm - 320 mm x 488
mm (5.5" x 7.2" - 12.6" x 19.2")
Paper weight 50 - 300 g/m² (13 lb bond - 110 lb cover)
Detection Automatic paper size detection (multi-size tray), tray-empty detec-
tion
Paper feed technology Friction feed
Features Paper Logic, tray linking, paper level indication, on-the-fly loading,
tab sheet processing (one side only)
External Paper Module
Specification Description
Description Optional paper module. The bulk trays three and four can be
equipped with dual paper trays (optional).
Dimensions (WxDxH) 980 mm x 750 mm x 1,040 mm (38.6" x 29.5" x 40.9")
Weight 203 kg (447 lb)
Power supply 90-264 V, 40-67 Hz, 200 W
Paper trays • Tray 1: 600 sheets
• Tray 2: 600 sheets
• Tray 3: 1,700 sheets; dual paper tray: 3,300 sheets (A4, LTR)
• Tray 4: 1,700 sheets; dual paper tray: 3,300 sheets (A4, LTR)
Paper size All paper trays: 203 mm x 203 mm - 320 mm x 488 mm (8.0" x 8.0"
- 12.6" x 19.2"), JIS B5 LEF (option), including custom sizes
Paper weight 50 - 300 g/m² (13 lb bond - 110 lb cover)
Detection Automatic paper size detection, tray-empty detection
Paper feed technology Vacuum feed, air separation
Features Paper Logic, tray linking, paper level indication, on-the-fly loading,
tab sheet processing (one side only)
Paper Modules
Appendix A - Specifications 451
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Finishing and delivery specifications
For the specifications of the other optionals, refer to the manuals delivered together with these
optionals.
Copy Tray-R2
Specification Value
Description Output tray to collect printed output
Capacity 250 sheets (80 g/m² / 20 lb bond)
Paper size Default sizes:
330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R, A5R
13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTRR, STMTR
Custom sizes:
100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm
3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2"
Envelope types:
ISO-C5 (162 mm x 229 mm / 6 3/8" x 9"), No. 10 (COM) (104.7 mm
x 241.3 mm / 4 1/8" x 9 ½"), Monarch (98.4 mm x 190.5 mm / 3 7/8"
x 7 ½"), DL (110 mm x 220 mm / 4 1/3" x 8 2/3"), Nagagata 3 (120
mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Yougatanaga (120 mm x 235 mm /
4.7" x 9 1/4"), Kakugata 2 (240 mm 332 mm / 9 ½" x 13")
Paper weight 52 - 300 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 110 lb cover
Dimensions (WxDxH) 422 mm x 382 mm x 175 mm / 16 5/8" x 15" x 6 7/8"
Weight Approximately 1.2 kg / 2.6 lb
Staple Finisher-W1
Specification Value
Description Stacker / stapler with (offset) stacking, stapling with staple-cut for
thin sets, including build-in joggers to optimize output stack quali-
ty
Paper size for stacking As supported by the printer
Paper size for stapling A3, A4, A4R / 11" x 17", LTR, LTRR, Executive, Legal, Ledger, JIS
B4, JIS B5
Paper weight 52 - 256 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 140 lb cover
Maximum stapling capaci-
ty
A4, B5, LTR: 100 sheets (80 g/m² / 20 lb bond)
A3, A4R, B4, LTRR, Legal, Ledger: 50 sheets (80 g/m² / 20 lb bond)
Stacking capacity for non-
stapled sheets
Upper tray: 1000 sheets
Lower tray: 2000 sheets; maximum of 4000 sheets in high volume
stack mode
Stacking capacity for sta-
pled sets
Lower tray: 200 sets; maximum of 3000 sheets
Features Corner stapling, two-point stapling also for A4R and LTRR
Staple-cut function depends on thickness set 4
Finishing and delivery specifications
452 Appendix A - Specifications
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Specification Value
Power requirement 120 V, 8 A
Dimensions (WxDxH) 800 mm x 792 mm x 1239 mm / 31.5" x 31.18" x 48.78"
Weight 130 kg / 287 lb
Booklet Finisher-W1
Specification Value
Description Stacker / stapler with (offset) stacking, stapling with staple-cut for
thin sets, booklet folding, saddle-stitching and saddle-press func-
tionality, including build-in joggers to optimize stack quality
Paper size for stacking As supported by the printer
Paper size for stapling A3, A4, A4R / 11" x 17", LTR, LTRR, Executive, Legal, Ledger, JIS
B4, JIS B5
Saddle stitch capacity 2 - 25 sheets (80 g/m² / 20 lb bond), including 1 cover sheet up to
256 g/m² / 140 lb index
Paper weight 52 - 256 g/m² / 13 lb bond - 110 lb cover
Output capacity of the sad-
dle stitcher
Conveyor belt: 30 booklets. When delivering to an external catch
tray, an unlimited output capacity is available
Stacking capacity for non-
stapled sheets
Upper tray: 1000 sheets
Lower tray: 2000 sheets; maximum of 4000 sheets in high volume
stack mode
Stacking capacity for sta-
pled sets
Lower tray: 200 sets; maximum of 3000 sheets
Maximum stapling capaci-
ty
A4, B5, LTR: 100 sheets (80 g/m² / 20 lb bond)
A3, A4R, B4, LTRR, Legal, Ledger: 50 sheets (80 g/m² / 20 lb bond)
Features Corner stapling, two-point stapling also for A4R and LTRR
Staple-cut function depends on thickness set
Saddle stitching
Folding up to 5 sheets per set
Saddle press functionality to increase the flatness of booklets
Optional: can be combined with 1 or 3 knife trimming
Power requirement 120 V, 8 A
Dimensions (WxDxH) 800 mm x 792 mm x 1239 mm / 31.5" x 31.18" x 48.78"
Weight 182 kg / 401 lb
Finishing and delivery specifications
Appendix A - Specifications 453
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Media Specifications
Media Types
Media Description
Transparencies Only paperbacked and printed one-sided
Tabs Yes
Self adhesives Yes
Textured paper Yes
Die cuts Yes
NCR paper On media recommended by the manufacturer
Pre-printed paper According to the manufacturer's guidelines for pre-printed media
Recycled paper On media recommended by the manufacturer
Media Weights
Media Internal paper module External paper module
Plain paper 50 - 300 g/m² (13 lb bond - 110
lb)
60 - 300 g/m² (16 lb bond - 110 lb)
Offset media 60 - 300 g/m² (16 lb bond - 110
lb)
60 - 300 g/m² (16 lb bond - 110 lb)
Coated media Not recommended* 80 - 300 g/m² (20 lb bond - 110 lb)
NOTE
* Some coated media can be used when you install the separation enhancer.
Media Specifications
454 Appendix A - Specifications
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Printing, Copying and Scanning
Printing
Specification Description
Job management DocBox, lists of [Scheduled jobs], [Waiting jobs] and [Printed jobs]
Print resolution PCL: 600 x 600 dpi
Adobe® PostScript® 3™: 1200x1200 dpi, 600x2400 dpi
Engine resolution 600x2400 dpi
Maximum printable area PCL: adjustable
Adobe® PostScript® 3™: 3 mm from side, maximum 308 mm x
484 mm (12.1" x 19")
Screen frequency PCL: 106 lpi maximum
Adobe® PostScript® 3™: 200 lpi maximum
Gray levels PCL: 125
Adobe® PostScript® 3™: 200
Features pre-RIP, print-while-RIP-while-spool, printing multiple sizes, hot-
folders/automated workflows, optional transaction printing
Copying
Specification Description
Copy resolution 600x1200 dpi
Exposure control Auto / Manual (9-step scale), [Text], [Mixed], [Photo], [High detail]
Zoom 25-400%; automatic
Screen frequency 200 lpi
Gray levels 200
Features Automatic quality optimization for text/photo, light/dark setting,
cover insertion, [Combined copy job], automatic rotation, booklet
printing, multiple images per sheet, margin shift, margin erase,
image position, automatic paper selection, tab copying, combina-
tion of different original sizes. book copy, [Easy copy job], use
[PDF scan job] for page numbering.
Scanning
Specification Description
Resolution 75, 100, 150, 200, 300 (default), 600 dpi
Pull scan Not available
Color scanning Optional license
Destination Scan to email, Scan to FTP, Scan to USB, Scan to DocBox, Scan to
SMB, Scan to PDF (DocBox) 4
Printing, Copying and Scanning
Appendix A - Specifications 455
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Specification Description
File format PDF (single and multiple page), PDF/A, TIFF, JPEG/sRBG (colour
scanning)
Maximum original size 304.8 mm x 431.8 mm
Features Thumbnail preview (DocBox), scan profiles, status overview, gray
level scanning, scan once print many, scan-in-warmup, scan-
while-print, subset-scanning, multi-tasking user interface, RGB col-
or scanning, scan to file with mixed original sizes
Printing, Copying and Scanning
456 Appendix A - Specifications
Canon varioPRINT DP line
PRISMAsync Controller
Specification Description
Description Embedded PRISMAsync controller.
Processor 2.7 GHz
Memory 4 GB
Hard disk 500 GB
Network connectivity 10/100/1000 Base-T
Network protocols TCP/IP (LPR/LPD, socket), SMB static/auto IP (via DHCP)
SNMP v1-v3 (printer MIB, private MIB, job monitoring MIB)
IPv4 & IPv6
Operating system Microsoft® Windows 10®
Supported Page Descrip-
tion Languages (PDL)
•APPE (Adobe® PDF Print Engine)
•Adobe® PostScript® 3™ / streaming PostScript®
• PPML/GA Level 1
• PPML versions 1.5, 2.1 and 2.2
• PCL 6 (combines PCL5e and PCL XL) (option)
• PDF 1.7
• XPS
• IPDS (option)
•Xerox® PPP support
USB printing PDF, PS, PCL, XPS via USB connection on operator panel
Security Common Criteria EAL2+, E-shredding, HTTPs, Firewall, PIN for
DocBox, User authentication to SDS, removable hard disk, IPv6,
software protection license (integrity checker), user authentication
per user role: key operator, system administrator and service rep-
resentative.
Features Print while RIP, streaming, multi-job processing, pre-RIP, no cycle-
down between jobs, multi-tasking (scan/copy/print), web-based
configuration with Settings Editor, Remote meter reading, Remote
Diagnostics, remote software upgrade, Remote Monitor.
Hardware options Generic USB mouse support, Section 508 kit (video, attention sig-
nal), copy control device interface for accounting, operator atten-
tion light, removable hard disk.
PRISMAsync Controller
Appendix A - Specifications 457
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Printer Driver Support
Printer driver Remark
PS3 UPD - Microsoft Windows Server
2003/2008/2008 R2/2012
32 & 64-bit support
PS3 UPD - Microsoft Windows Client Vista/
Windows7/Windows8/Windows8.1/Windows
2012 R2
32 & 64-bit support
PS3 PPD - legacy Microsoft Windows & Mac/
Linux-CUPS/Other
PS3 - Macintosh (Mac OS 10.6/10.7/10.8/10.9) Intel & PowerPC
PCL6 UPD - Microsoft Windows Server
2003(R2)/2008/2008 R2/2012
32 & 64-bit support
PCL6 UPD - Microsoft Windows Client Vista/
Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows8.1/Windows
2012 R2
32 & 64-bit support
PCL6 GPD - legacy Microsoft Windows & Mac/
Linux-CUPS/Other
Microsoft XPS UPD - Microsoft Windows Client
Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows 7/
Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 8/Windows
server 2012/Windows 8.1/Windows 2012 R2
32 & 64-bit support
SAP Device Type (SAP R/3 4.6 and higher) Implementation & support via C&SS
Remote Printer Driver 5.2.0.0 PostScript, PCL and PDF
NOTE
All UPD drivers are Microsoft® certified
Printer Driver Support
458 Appendix A - Specifications
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Index
1
1-sided media
Media registration..........................................350
11504..................................................................... 446
A
Access other functions during copy job or scan
job..........................................................................108
Access rights
description........................................................11
Accessories
Commercial naming........................................ 17
Generic naming................................................17
accid.csv file............................................................75
Account ID
Clear account ID............................................... 83
Fixed..................................................................83
Per job...............................................................83
Account ID file
Content..............................................................74
Download..........................................................75
Edit.................................................................... 75
Upload...............................................................75
Account log file
Description of the data records.......................76
General information.........................................76
Name.................................................................76
Accounting
Enable identification........................................ 73
Enable verification........................................... 73
Fields of the account log file........................... 76
Printer driver.....................................................86
Accounting mode................................................... 83
Actual sheet size...................................................328
Ad hoc workflow
description........................................................11
Add
Automated workflow....................................... 62
Add temporary media to the Media catalog...... 291
Add toner.............................................................. 423
Address book
e-mail.............................................................. 259
Address list file
Download........................................................248
Edit.................................................................. 248
Records........................................................... 248
Upload.............................................................248
Advanced media settings
Paper quality factor........................................309
Pre-printed mode........................................... 305
Wax mode.......................................................307
Advanced settings................................................325
Alignment..............................................................174
Assign media to paper tray
Trays view.......................................................288
Authentication
description........................................................33
Automated settings
Copy job..........................................................214
Scan job.......................................................... 249
Automated workflow
Add....................................................................62
Delete................................................................ 64
Edit.................................................................... 63
Restore default................................................. 65
Automated workflows
Attributes.......................................................... 58
Explanation.......................................................58
Automatic drum cleaning.................................... 439
Automatic media registration......................318, 321
Auxiliary booklet tray
location (professional stacker / stapler)......... 19
Auxiliary tray
output tray........................................................ 21
B
Backup...................................................................361
confidential data.............................................355
create...............................................................355
delete...............................................................355
USB................................................................. 355
Banner page..........................................................121
Billing counters
Description......................................................362
Print the report............................................... 364
Binding edge.........................................................171
Book copy..............................................................216
Glass plate...................................................... 105
Booklet finisher
specifications..................................................453
Brightness
Index
459
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Darker prints...................................................178
Lighter prints.................................................. 178
Bulk media............................................................ 371
Bundle print jobs.................................................. 119
Bundled jobs
Change job settings....................................... 119
C
Change
Alignment....................................................... 174
Binding edge.................................................. 171
Check first set................................................. 183
Finishing method........................................... 180
Image shift......................................................175
Margin shift.................................................... 175
Media.............................................................. 172
Number of sets...............................................182
Offset stacking................................................176
Output location...............................................176
Page range......................................................184
Print order.......................................................176
Rotation...........................................................176
Separator sheets............................................ 185
Settings for covers.........................................173
settings on page level....................................186
Sheet order.....................................................176
Sheet orientation............................................176
Sort by page................................................... 176
Sort by set.......................................................176
Check
Staple cartridges............................................ 425
Toner level......................................................422
Check first set........................................................183
workflow profile............................................... 54
Check-and-print workflow profile
description........................................................54
Clean
Drum....................................................... 438, 439
Clean the drum automatically............................. 439
Clean the drum manually.................................... 438
Clean Z sensor...................................................... 435
Color preset
printer driver.....................................................90
Color profiles........................................................ 178
Combine analog documents............................... 266
Combine subsets
Create 1 document.........................................238
Create 1 file.....................................................266
Create one file................................................ 266
Components
Booklet maker...................................................14
Commercial names..........................................17
Control panel....................................................14
Copy tray...........................................................14
Decurler.............................................................14
External paper module.................................... 14
Folder................................................................ 14
Inserter..............................................................14
Internal paper module..................................... 14
Operator attention light...................................14
Printer module..................................................14
Puncher.............................................................14
Scanner.............................................................14
Stacker.............................................................. 14
Stacker/stapler..................................................14
Trimmer............................................................ 14
Configuration report
Print.................................................................356
Configure
LDAP server....................................................247
Scan-to-email function.................................. 246
Scan-to-file function.......................................244
Scan-to-SMB function....................................245
Connectivity
Default gateway............................................. 356
DNS 1.............................................................. 356
DNS 2.............................................................. 356
DNS suffix follows domain........................... 356
HTTP................................................................356
HTTPS............................................................. 356
MAC address.................................................. 356
Primary DNS suffix........................................ 356
Subnet mask...................................................356
TCP/IP..............................................................356
Test TCP/IP connection..................................356
WINS 1............................................................ 356
WINS 2............................................................ 356
Connectivity
DHCP............................................................... 356
DNS settings...................................................356
Host name.......................................................356
IPv4 settings................................................... 356
IPv6 settings................................................... 356
Link speed and connection type................... 356
WINS settings.................................................356
Contrast
Decrease......................................................... 178
Increase...........................................................178
Control panel
access................................................................33
Accounting mode.............................................83
adjustment of readability................................ 49
brightness.........................................................49
contrast............................................................. 49
Enter an account ID per job.............................85
error recovery transaction print jobs..............40
image shift transaction print jobs...................40
Index
460
Canon varioPRINT DP line
job names......................................................... 48
Manual media registration............................326
media catalog...................................................37
Media registration..................................321, 323
multi-touch....................................................... 50
parts.................................................................. 31
pinch zoom gesture......................................... 50
transaction printing mode...............................40
Conversion table for commercial names and user
interface names...................................................... 17
Copy
book copy....................................................... 105
Glass plate...................................................... 103
media catalog.................................................311
Non-standard size originals.......................... 233
Scan now, print later......................................241
Copy function
Introduction...................................................... 97
Copy job
Align................................................................221
Automated settings........................................214
Background.............................................217, 252
Binding............................................................226
Binding edge.................................................. 218
Covers............................................................. 219
Destination......................................................230
Easy.................................................................231
Exposure.........................................................225
Folding options.............................................. 226
Image type......................................................217
Job name........................................................229
Job settings.................................................... 214
Layout............................................................. 220
Margin erase...................................................225
Media.............................................................. 219
Number of sets...............................................229
Offset stacking................................................223
Original 1- or 2-sided..................................... 215
Original type...................................................216
Output 1- or 2-sided.......................................218
Output location...............................................223
Print delivery.................................................. 223
Print order.......................................................223
Punching.........................................................228
Rename...........................................................237
Rotation...........................................................223
Separator sheets............................................ 230
Sheet order.....................................................223
Sheet orientation............................................223
Shift.................................................................222
Size..................................................................217
Sort by page................................................... 223
Sort by set.......................................................223
Staples............................................................ 226
Trimming........................................................ 227
Zoom...............................................................220
Copy jobs
Access other functions.................................. 108
Combined copy job........................................238
Minimize......................................................... 108
Zoom...............................................................234
Copy templates.............................................232, 265
Copy to.................................................................. 118
Copy tray
specifications..................................................452
Counters................................................................362
Large media....................................................362
Standard media..............................................362
Covers....................................................................173
Create
Hotfolder...........................................................68
Hotfolder default ticket.................................... 70
Create a DocBox................................................... 124
D
Dashboard.............................................................274
Datadump file
Save.................................................................356
Date and time........................................................357
Day counters
Description......................................................362
Reset................................................................363
Deep sleep mode....................................................42
Default gateway....................................................356
Define
Finishing method........................................... 181
Define job settings
Hotfolder...........................................................70
Define print job settings
Automated workflow....................................... 88
Control panel....................................................88
Hotfolder...........................................................88
Job ticket...........................................................88
PDL default settings.........................................88
PDL job settings............................................... 88
Delete
Automated workflow....................................... 64
Delete jobs
All jobs............................................................ 193
DocBox............................................................193
Jobs with available media.............................193
Jobs with label............................................... 193
List of Printed jobs......................................... 193
List of Scheduled jobs................................... 193
List of Waiting jobs........................................ 193
New jobs.........................................................193
One by one..................................................... 193
Index
461
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Printed jobs.....................................................193
DHCP......................................................................356
Diamond shape adjust......................... 337, 338, 339
Diamond shape image.........................337, 338, 339
DNS 1.....................................................................356
DNS 2.....................................................................356
DNS settings......................................................... 356
DNS suffix follows domain..................................356
DocBox
Build function................................................. 143
Combine jobs................................................. 143
Create..............................................................124
Interrupt function........................................... 149
Introduction.................................................... 122
Job settings.................................................... 125
Lock settings...................................................145
Print a job........................................................148
Print an urgent job......................................... 149
printer driver.....................................................90
Split a built job............................................... 144
Split function.................................................. 144
Unlock settings...............................................146
Urgent jobs.....................................................149
DocBox job
1- or 2-sided....................................................127
Align................................................................130
Binding............................................................137
Binding edge.................................................. 127
Brightness.......................................................135
Check first set................................................. 140
Color profile....................................................135
Contrast...........................................................135
Covers............................................................. 128
Edit.................................................................. 142
Exposure.........................................................134
Fattening.........................................................135
Folding............................................................ 137
Job name........................................................140
Layout............................................................. 129
Line width....................................................... 135
Margin erase...................................................134
Media.............................................................. 128
Minimum line width.......................................135
Number of sets...............................................140
Offset stacking................................................132
Output location...............................................132
Page numbering.............................................141
Page range......................................................140
Print order.......................................................132
Punching.........................................................139
RIP raster.........................................................135
RIP resolution................................................. 135
Rotation...........................................................132
Separator sheets............................................ 140
Sheet order.....................................................132
Sheet orientation............................................132
Shift.................................................................131
Sort by page................................................... 132
Sort by set.......................................................132
Staples............................................................ 137
Trimming........................................................ 138
Zoom...............................................................129
Dots on prints............................................... 438, 439
Download
Automatically................................................. 355
Drum cleaning.............................................. 438, 439
Dual paper tray....................................................... 18
E
Easy copy job........................................................231
Edit
Automated workflow....................................... 63
Elongation.....................................................329, 330
Email......................................................................258
address book.................................................. 259
Enable remote connection...................................421
Errors
Job errors....................................................... 444
Machine errors............................................... 444
F
FAQ
Media registration..........................................350
Fattening............................................................... 178
Finishing and delivery
specifications..................................................452
Finishing method..........................................180, 181
Fleet management................................................361
Flip rings................................................................409
Front-to-back side.........................328, 332, 333, 343
G
Generic naming in User Interfaces....................... 17
Generic naming of accessories............................. 17
Glass plate
book copy....................................................... 105
copy.................................................................103
H
Host name.............................................................356
Hotfolder
Activate............................................................. 67
Create................................................................68
Create shared network drive...........................69
Default ticket.....................................................70
Index
462
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Define job settings........................................... 70
Drag & drop......................................................66
General information.........................................66
Job settings...................................................... 66
Job ticket...........................................................66
Link to automated workflow........................... 68
HTTP...................................................................... 356
HTTPS....................................................................356
I
Image adjustment
transaction printing mode...............................40
Image shift............................................................ 175
Back.................................................................343
Front................................................................343
Preprinted media............................................345
Transaction printing.......................................201
X...................................................................... 343
Z.......................................................................343
Install
Windows.........................................................355
Install........................................................ 355
Internal bulk trays
Supported media types................................. 280
IPDS
Output recovery............................................. 207
IPv4 settings..........................................................356
IPv6 settings..........................................................356
J
JIS B5 adapter
Place................................................................303
Remove...........................................................303
Job
Change alignment..........................................174
Change binding edge.....................................171
Change finishing method..............................180
Change number of sets................................. 182
Change settings for covers............................173
Change the media..........................................172
Check the first set...........................................183
Give priority....................................................116
Make a proof...................................................190
Print later........................................................ 117
Print the job parameters................................189
Reprint.............................................................187
Separator sheets............................................ 185
Shift the image...............................................175
Shift the margin............................................. 175
To top..............................................................116
Job management
other printer....................................................118
transaction printing mode...............................39
Job name
truncate.............................................................48
using shorter names........................................48
Job planning
in job workflow.................................................38
Job preparation
in job workflow.................................................38
printer driver.....................................................90
Remote Printer Driver......................................90
Job settings
Copy job..........................................................214
DocBox............................................................125
Hotfolder...........................................................66
Print job...........................................................154
Scan job.......................................................... 249
Job ticket...............................................................189
Job workflow.......................................................... 38
Job-by-job workflow profile
description........................................................53
Jobs with available media...................................188
Jobs with label......................................................188
K
key operator
settings on control panel...............................352
Key operator settings...........................................354
Key operators
user groups.......................................................11
L
Label...................................................................... 188
Labels
printer driver.....................................................90
Language
control panel.....................................................48
Layout
Booklet............................................................ 158
Multiple up......................................................158
Normal............................................................ 158
Same up..........................................................158
Same-up flipped.............................................158
LDAP server.......................................................... 247
Licenses.................................................................355
Software..........................................................355
Link speed and connection type..........................356
Load media
Schedule view................................................ 273
Local key operator settings..................................354
Lock settings in DocBox.......................................145
Logging
Configuration report...................................... 356
Index
463
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Datadump file.................................................356
Software error................................................ 446
Trace file......................................................... 356
Low power mode....................................................42
M
MAC address.........................................................356
Maintenance
tasks................................................................ 353
Maintenance operators
user group........................................................ 11
Make a proof.........................................................190
Manual drum cleaning.........................................438
Manual media registration.......................... 318, 325
Manual planning workflow profile
description........................................................54
Margin shift...........................................................175
Media
add to media catalog..................................... 290
Bulk..................................................................371
Icons................................................................283
indicators........................................................ 292
Information.....................................................283
Preprinted....................................................... 345
Specific............................................................318
Media assignment
transaction printing mode...............................39
Media catalog....................................................... 280
add media.......................................................290
copy.........................................................311, 350
features and benefits....................................... 37
printer driver.....................................................90
PRISMAprepare................................................92
Media catalogue........................................... 285, 286
Media handling
Description......................................................280
Media in bulk trays...............................................357
Media registration
1-sided media.................................................350
Advanced settings..........................................325
Automatic....................................................... 321
Control panel..................................321, 323, 326
Diamond shape image...................337, 338, 339
Elongation...............................................329, 330
FAQ..................................................................350
Front-to-back side.................. 328, 332, 333, 343
Manual............................................................ 325
Order............................................................... 318
Preprinted media............................................347
Quick start.......................................................315
Settings Editor................................................344
Shifted image......................................... 332, 333
Skewed image................................340, 341, 342
Standard settings...........................................325
Temporary media...........................................350
Trapezoid shape image................. 335, 336, 337
Troubleshooting.............................................347
Verification......................................................319
Verification chart............................................319
Microsoft Windows
Security patch.................................................367
Minimum line width.............................................178
Move a job from Scheduled jobs to Waiting jobs...
117
Multi-touch
pinch zoom gesture......................................... 50
N
Naming of accessories...........................................17
New
Scan to file......................................................257
Non-standard size originals.................................233
Number of sets..................................................... 182
O
Offset
X.............................................................. 332, 333
Z...............................................................332, 333
Offset stacking...................................................... 176
Changes in the Properties window...............177
Types...............................................................177
On/Off button..........................................................42
One-sided printing................................................170
Operator
media configuration.........................................37
Operator attention light....................................... 276
Operators
user group........................................................ 11
Optimize the scan quality.................................... 267
Options..................................................................318
Order......................................................................318
Orientation of originals
In the ADF....................................................... 101
On the glass plate.......................................... 101
Output recovery....................................................207
Output tray
parts.................................................................. 21
P
Page number...........................................................96
AWF ..................................................................96
Page programming.............................................. 186
Page range
All pages......................................................... 184
Indicate the range.......................................... 184
Index
464
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Page view..............................................................186
Paper dust............................................................. 309
Paper jam
In the registration unit................................... 415
Lower input paper path of registration unit.413
Paper module
External paper module.................................... 18
Internal paper module..................................... 18
Paper path registration........................................ 371
Paper quality factor.............................................. 309
Paper tray button
location............................................................. 31
Paper tray icons....................................................283
PDF/VT...................................................................194
records............................................................ 194
PDL
Supported.......................................................457
Pinch zoom gesture
control panel.....................................................50
Place the originals................................................ 102
POC........................................................................349
Paper path registration..................................371
Postponed copying...............................................241
Power modes
Deep sleep mode............................................. 42
Low power mode............................................. 42
Off......................................................................42
Ready................................................................ 42
Sleep mode.......................................................42
PPML......................................................................194
Pre-printed media.................................................305
Pre-printed mode..................................................305
Pre-requisites........................................................318
Preprinted media..................................................345
Media registration..........................................347
Primary DNS suffix...............................................356
Print
All jobs............................................................ 188
Job parameters.............................................. 189
Job settings.................................................... 189
Jobs in list of Waiting jobs............................114
Jobs with available media.............................188
Jobs with label............................................... 188
Urgent job.......................................................115
Print a job from USB drive.....................................94
Print a scheduled job later...................................117
Print an urgent job
DocBox............................................................149
Print color images on a B&W printer..................178
Print delivery settings
Offset stacking................................................176
Output location...............................................176
Print order.......................................................176
Rotation...........................................................176
Sheet order.....................................................176
Sheet orientation............................................176
Sort by page................................................... 176
Sort by set.......................................................176
Print job
1- or 2-sided....................................................156
Align................................................................159
Binding............................................................165
Binding edge.................................................. 156
Brightness.......................................................163
Check first set................................................. 168
Color profile....................................................163
Contrast...........................................................163
Covers............................................................. 157
Define finishing method................................181
Fattening.........................................................163
Folding............................................................ 181
Folding options.............................................. 165
Job name........................................................168
Job settings.................................................... 154
Line width....................................................... 163
Media.............................................................. 157
Minimum line width.......................................163
Number of sets...............................................168
Offset stacking................................................161
Output location...............................................161
Page numbering.............................................169
Page range......................................................168
preview........................................................... 154
Print order.......................................................161
Punching.........................................................167
RIP raster.........................................................163
RIP resolution................................................. 163
Rotation...........................................................161
Separator sheets............................................ 168
Sheet order.....................................................161
Sheet orientation............................................161
Shift.................................................................160
Sort by page................................................... 161
Sort by set.......................................................161
Staples............................................................ 165
Trimming................................................ 166, 181
Print job production
in job workflow.................................................38
Print jobs
Bundle several jobs........................................119
convert to variable data job.......................... 195
Split bundled jobs..........................................119
transaction printing mode...............................39
Print settings
transaction printing mode...............................40
Print system
language........................................................... 48
transaction printing mode...............................40
Index
465
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Print ticket
creation............................................................. 90
Printer driver
download..........................................................90
Enable accounting............................................86
job preparation.................................................90
remote...............................................................90
Use accounting.................................................86
Printer software
Version............................................................354
Printer speed.........................................................450
Priority for a job....................................................116
PRISMAprepare
Job preparation................................................92
PRISMAsync
job workflow.....................................................38
media assignment............................................37
media catalog...................................................37
Upgrade.......................................................... 366
Upgrade from server..................................... 365
PRISMAsync Remote Manager........................... 110
Proxy server..........................................................356
Punch unit
location (professional stacker / stapler)......... 19
Q
Quick start
Media registration..........................................315
R
Records..........................................................194, 195
Registration sheet.........................................321, 323
Remote connection
Remote connection enabled......................... 357
Remote connection status.............................357
Remote Service country code.......................357
Remote Service custom country code......... 357
Status.............................................................. 421
Test..................................................................421
Test Remote connection................................357
Remote connection enabled................................357
Remote connection status................................... 357
Remote Control
description......................................................111
usage of.......................................................... 111
Remote Diagnostics............................................. 420
Remote Manager..................................................110
description........................................................36
Remote Meter Reading........................................ 420
Remote Monitor....................................................277
Remote Printer Driver
job preparation.................................................90
Remote Service.....................................................420
Remote Service country code............................. 357
Remote Service custom country code................357
Remote Software Upgrade..................................420
Removable Hard Disk
Insert................................................................. 26
Introduction...................................................... 22
Remove.............................................................24
Troubleshooting...............................................28
Use.................................................................... 22
Rename a copy job...............................................237
Replace staple cartridge
Saddle stitch unit........................................... 429
Stacker/stapler................................................429
Reprint a job..........................................................187
Restart the system..................................................46
Restore.................................................................. 361
complete configuration................................. 355
Default workflow..............................................65
service configuration..................................... 355
USB................................................................. 355
user configuration..........................................355
RIP raster...............................................................178
RIP resolution........................................................178
Rotation.................................................340, 341, 342
S
Saddle-stitch unit
location (professional stacker / stapler)......... 19
Save the audit log files.........................................421
Scan function
Introduction...................................................... 99
Scan job
Account ID...................................................... 256
Align................................................................254
Automated settings........................................249
Black and white.............................................. 255
Color................................................................255
Destination......................................................256
Exposure.........................................................255
File type...........................................................252
Grayscale........................................................ 255
Image type......................................................252
Job name........................................................255
Job settings.................................................... 249
Margin erase...................................................255
Media size.......................................................253
Optimize scan quality.................................... 267
Original 1- or 2-sided..................................... 250
Original type...................................................251
Resolution.......................................................253
Size..................................................................252
User code........................................................256
Index
466
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Zoom...............................................................253
Scan jobs
Access other functions.................................. 108
Combined scan job........................................ 266
Minimize......................................................... 108
Zoom...............................................................234
Scan templates............................................. 232, 265
Scan to email
Address list file.......................................247, 248
Configuration..................................................246
Configure LDAP server.................................. 247
Scan to PDF...........................................................264
Scanner
Clean lower sensor........................................ 432
Clean upper sensor........................................432
Schedule view
Introduction.................................................... 270
Jobs pane....................................................... 270
Media toolbar................................................. 271
Output locations pane................................... 272
Required media pane.....................................271
Streaming jobs...............................................270
Zoom control..................................................272
Schedule waiting jobs..........................................114
Security patch.......................................................367
Security PIN
printer driver.....................................................90
Security settings...................................................354
Select
Different media for job.................................. 172
Separation enhancer
Install...............................................................293
When to use....................................................293
Separator sheets...........................................121, 185
Serial number....................................................... 354
Service technician................................................ 371
Settings Editor........................................................ 34
Access............................................................... 34
Access through control panel....................... 354
Accounting settings......................................... 72
Change settings..............................................354
Media registration..........................................344
settings on control panel...............................352
transaction printing setups............................. 40
View settings.................................................. 354
Shifted image................................................332, 333
Troubleshooting.............................................349
Shut down the system........................................... 45
Skew...................................................................... 342
Skewed image...................................... 340, 341, 342
Skewing.................................................................341
Skewness...................................................... 340, 342
Sleep button............................................................42
location............................................................. 31
Sleep mode.............................................................42
Software
upgrade...................................................354, 355
Software
Licenses.......................................................... 355
Software error
Logging...........................................................446
Software upgrade.................................311, 350, 371
Specific media...................................................... 318
Speed.....................................................................450
Spiral cleaner
When to replace............................................. 390
Split print jobs...................................................... 119
Spots on print....................................................... 439
Stacker/stapler
parts (professional stacker / stapler_..............19
Replace staple cartridge of saddle stitch unit....
429
specifications..................................................452
Stacker/stapler with saddle-stitch unit
specifications..................................................453
Standard settings................................................. 325
Standard workflow profile
description........................................................53
Staple Cartridge
Replace............................................................429
Staple icons...........................................................425
Staples
Stacker/stapler................................................429
Status LED
location............................................................. 31
Stop behavior
Stop after a job...............................................191
Stop after a set............................................... 191
Stop as soon as possible...............................191
Stop button
location............................................................. 31
Stop the printer
After a job....................................................... 191
After a set........................................................191
As soon as possible....................................... 191
Manually......................................................... 191
Structured workflow
description........................................................11
Subnet mask......................................................... 356
Subsets
Tab sheets...............................................238, 266
System
Restart...............................................................46
Shut down........................................................ 45
Turn on..............................................................44
system administrator
media configuration.........................................37
System administrator settings............................ 354
Index
467
Canon varioPRINT DP line
System administrators
user group........................................................ 11
System configuration
tasks................................................................ 352
System of measurement......................................357
System recovery...................................................354
System settings
Date and time................................................. 357
Media in bulk trays.........................................357
System of measurement............................... 357
Time zone....................................................... 357
System view
Media section................................................. 284
Setup section..................................................359
Transaction section........................................196
T
Task splitting
media configuration.........................................37
TCP/IP.................................................................... 356
Templates
Copy........................................................ 232, 265
printer driver.....................................................90
Scan.........................................................232, 265
Temporary media.................................280, 285, 291
Media registration..........................................350
Test Remote connection.............................. 357, 421
Test TCP/IP connection........................................ 356
Ticket..................................................................... 189
Time zone..............................................................357
To top.................................................................... 116
Toner..................................................................... 423
Toner icons........................................................... 422
Toner level
Dashboard...................................................... 423
Printer section................................................ 423
Toner icon.......................................................423
Trace file
Save.................................................................356
Trailer page...........................................................121
Transaction printing.............................................196
Activate........................................................... 199
Deactivate....................................................... 200
Image shift......................................................201
Media messages............................................ 210
Printer offline..................................................200
Printer online..................................................199
Transaction printing mode
configuration.................................................... 40
description........................................................39
image adjustment............................................ 40
secure error recovery.......................................40
Transaction setup
Activate........................................................... 204
Create new......................................................202
Edit.................................................................. 203
Export..............................................................205
Import..............................................................205
Trapezoid...............................................335, 336, 337
Trapezoid shape image........................335, 336, 337
Tray mapping
transaction printing mode...............................39
Trays view
Overview.........................................................282
Troubleshooting................................................... 444
Automatic media registration............... 347, 348
Long media length.........................................348
Long sheets.................................................... 348
Media registration..........................................347
Paper path registration..................................349
POC..................................................................349
Preprinted media............................................347
Shifted image................................................. 349
Truncate
job name...........................................................48
Turn on the system................................................ 44
Two-sided printing............................................... 170
U
Unattended workflow profile
description........................................................55
Unlock settings in DocBox...................................146
Upgrade software.................................................366
Server......................................................355, 365
USB................................................................. 355
Urgent job............................................................. 115
Urgent jobs
DocBox............................................................149
USB drive
Print job.............................................................94
Save a file to another location........................ 94
USB port
location............................................................. 31
User authentication
description........................................................33
User groups
overview........................................................... 11
Username ...............................................................31
Users
description........................................................11
V
Variable data printing...........................................194
convert from normal job............................... 195
VDP................................................................ 194, 195
Index
468
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Verification............................................................319
Verification chart.................................................. 319
Version
Printer software..............................................354
W
Warning time
configuration.................................................... 48
Wax mode.............................................................307
Wax paper.............................................................307
WINS 1...................................................................356
WINS 2...................................................................356
WINS settings....................................................... 356
Workflow profiles
Function............................................................ 52
X
X elongation
Back.........................................................329, 330
Front........................................................329, 330
X elongation back.........................................329, 330
X elongation front........................................ 329, 330
X image shift back........................................343, 345
X image shift front........................................343, 345
X offset.......................................................... 332, 333
Z
Z image shift back........................................ 343, 345
Z image shift front........................................343, 345
Z offset...........................................................332, 333
Z sensor
Clean............................................................... 435
Error code....................................................... 435
Zoom
Fit to page.......................................................158
Percentage......................................................158
Zoom behavior..................................................... 234
Index
469
Canon varioPRINT DP line
Index
470
Canon varioPRINT DP line
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
8000 Mississauga Road Brampton, ON L6Y 5Z7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD
Building A, The Park Estate, 5 Talavera Road, Macquarie Park, NSW 2113, Australia
CANON CHINA CO., LTD
2F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD
1 Fusionopolis Place, #15-10, Galaxis, Singapore 138522
USRM2-8367-00 © CANON INC. 2011-2017

Navigation menu